Thames Valley Flood Scheme Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Home , Beale Wildlife Park, Blackwater Valley, Chieveley services, Pingewood, River Ray, Sutton Wick

May 2021

Environment Agency

SA Scoping Report Environment Agency

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Thames Valley Flood Scheme

Project No: B550C037 Document Title: Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report Revision: P0 3 Date: May 2021 Client Name: Environment Agency Project Manager: Helen Rukin Author: Milly Chapman, Heidi Curran, Stuart Hedgecott, Adam Jones, Lyndsey McGonigle, Ciaran Meehan, David Morris, Daniel Mounsdon, Katie Randall-Stratton, Steven Ross, Erika Schmoke, Nathan Thomas, Rebecca Westlake File Name: ENV0002349C -JAC -XX -00 -AS -SS -0001

Jacobs U.K. Limited

1180 Eskdale Road Winnersh READING RG41 5TU

www.jacobs.com

© Copyright 2021. The concepts and information contained in this document are the property of Jacobs. Use or copying of this document in whole or in part without the written permission of Jacobs constitutes an infringement of copyright.

Limitation: This document has been prepared on behalf of, and for the exclusive use of Jacobs’ client, and is subject to, and issued in accordance with, the provisions of the contract between Jacobs and the client. Jacobs accepts no liability or responsibility whatsoever for, or in respect of, any use of, or reliance upon, this document by any third party.

Document history and status

Revision Date Description Author Checked Reviewed Approved

P01 April 2021 First Issue (with planned omissions) for EA LMcG HC/KRS SH HR comment

P02.01 May 2021 Second Issue of WiP document for EA check LMcG/HC KRS SH

May 2021 Third Issue for EA sign-off LMcG/HC KRS SH HR

P03 May 2021 Fourth Issue for EA sign-off LMcG/HC KRS SH HR

i Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Contents 1. Introduction...... 6 1.1 Overview ...... 6 1.2 Flood Risk in the Thames Valley Catchment...... 8 1.3 Overview of Potential Catchment Approaches...... 9 1.4 Sustainability Appraisal including Strategic Environmental Assessment ...... 11 1.5 Consultation ...... 12 2. Methodology ...... 14 2.1 Study Area ...... 14 2.2 Establishing the SA Baseline ...... 14 2.3 Information Used ...... 15 2.4 The SA Process ...... 16 2.5 Iterative Assessment ...... 20 2.6 Describing Effects and Their Significance ...... 20 2.7 Natural Capital ...... 21 3. Review of Plans and Programmes, Legislation and Policy ...... 23 3.1 Introduction ...... 23 3.2 National Legislation ...... 23 3.3 Environment Agency Plans and Policies ...... 28 3.4 Nationals Plans, Programmes and Strategies ...... 30 3.5 Other Plans ...... 36 3.6 Selected Local Authority Plans ...... 37 3.7 Plans Considered in the Review ...... 42 3.8 Other Plans of Relevance and Considered in the Review ...... 43 3.9 Plans Not Considered in the Review ...... 43 3.10 Conclusion ...... 43 4. Baseline Reporting – Social and Economic Factors ...... 45 4.1 Population and Human Health ...... 45 4.2 Access and Recreation ...... 50 4.3 Economic Activity...... 53 4.4 Flooding and the Economy ...... 56 4.5 Land Use and the Economy ...... 57 4.6 Material Assets – Critical Infrastructure ...... 60 5. Baseline Reporting – Environmental Factors ...... 63 5.1 Biodiversity ...... 63 5.2 Water ...... 68 5.3 Soils and Geology ...... 76 5.4 Landscape and Visual Amenity ...... 80 5.5 Cultural Heritage and Archaeology ...... 84

ii Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

5.6 Air Quality ...... 88 5.7 Climate Change ...... 91 5.8 Resource Use and Waste ...... 93 6. Sustainability Appraisal Framework...... 100 6.1 Introduction ...... 100 6.2 Identification of Objectives ...... 100 6.3 The Sustainability Appraisal Framework ...... 102 6.4 Compatibility Testing ...... 109 7. Next Steps ...... 111 7.1 Scheme Timeline...... 111 7.2 Update to SA Framework ...... 111 7.3 Preliminary SA Report ...... 111 7.4 Interim SA Report ...... 111 8. References ...... 113 Appendix A Data Used ...... 131 Appendix B1: Upper-Tier Authorities and Single-Tier Authorities (excluding London Boroughs) Spatial Plans ...... 133 Appendix B2: Lower-Tier Spatial Plans ...... 154 Appendix B3: GLA and Single-Tier London Borough Authorities ...... 179 Appendix B4: Strategic Economic Plans ...... 194 Appendix C1: Population Statistics ...... 197 Appendix C2: Economic Statistics ...... 205 Appendix D: Waterbodies and Status ...... 210 Appendix E: Regional Environmental Opportunities ...... 215

iii Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table of Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning ALC Agricultural land Classification ALS Abstraction Licensing Strategy AONB Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty AQMA Air Quality Management Area BAP Biodiversity Action Plan CCRA Climate Change Risk Assessment CFMP Catchment Flood Management Plan

CO 2 Carbon dioxide Defra Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs DrWPA Drinking Water Protection Area EA Environment Agency EFI Environmental Flow Indicator ELM Environmental Land Management FCERM National Flood and Coastal Erosion Risk Management Strategy FCRM Flood and Coastal Risk Management FRMP Flood Risk Management Plan FRMS Flood Risk Management Strateg y FSOA Flood Storage Opportunity Area GES Good Ecological Status GHG Green house gas GLA Greater London Authority GVA Gross Value Added HER Historic Environment Record HRA Habitats Regulation Assessment IDB Internal Drainage Board IMD Indices of Multiple Deprivation IoD Indices of Deprivation LEP Local Enterprise Partnership LFRMS Local Flood Risk Management Strategy LLFA Lead Local Flood Authorit y LNR Local Nature Reserve LRMS Pollution Prevention and Control LTP3 Local Transport Plan 3 LTP4 Local Transport Plan 4 LTP Local Transport Plan Mt Million tonnes

MtCO 2e Million tonnes carbon dioxide equivalent NCA National Character Area NFM Natural Flood Management NIDP National Infrastructure Delivery Plan

NO 2 Nitrogen dioxide NPPF National Planning Policy Framework OCC Oxfordshire County Council ONS Office for National Statistics PHE Public Health England

PM 5 and PM 10 Particulate matter (the subscript denotes different size fractions) PPC Pollution Prevention and Control PPS12 Planning Policy Statement 12 PRoW Public right of way RBD River Basin District RBMP River Basin Management Plan RPG Registered Parks and Gardens RTS Reading Transport Strategy SA Sustainability Appraisal SAC Special Areas of Conservation SAFFA Salmon and Freshwater Fisheries Act SCS Sustainable Community Strategy SDG (United Nations) Sustainable Development Goals SEA Strategic Environmental Assessment SEP Strategic Economic Plan SPA Special Protection Area SSSI Site of Special Scientific Interest iv

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Abbreviation Meaning SWLEP Swindon and Wiltshire Local Enterprise Partnership TIFF Total Income from Farming TVFS Thames Valley Flood Scheme UKCIP UK Climate Impacts Programme WER Water Environment Regulations WFD Water Framework Directive WHS World Heritage Site WRMP Water Resources Management Plan WRZ Water Resource Zone

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

1. Introduction

1.1 Overview

Over the years the Environment Agency along with partners have invested heavily in developing new flood schemes throughout the Thames Valley, to support those most at risk.

These schemes reduce the risk of flooding for many of those living, working in and visiting the area. However, there are locations where it has not been possible to develop a local flood scheme including cases where it’s not technically feasible, or where it wouldn’t provide sufficient value for money. Many communities continue to remain at risk of flooding and vulnerable to the impacts of climate change.

By planning now for the future, the Thames Valley Flood Scheme (TVFS or ‘the Scheme’) is adopting a catchment- wide approach to mitigate the increasing flood risk that climate change will bring. The Scheme will complement existing and planned local flood alleviation schemes. It aims to provide an increased level of climate resilience across the Thames Valley and significantly reduce flood risk over a very large geographical area.

Figure 1.1: Thames Valley Flood Scheme Catchment

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

The Environment Agency has a number of ambitions for the Scheme which will be reviewed as the Scheme progresses.

Flood risk management ambitions include:

• Improve flood resilience to over 20,000 properties. • Benefit communities and businesses that have previously suffered river flooding where defences have not been built and are not planned. • Improve the climate change resilience of communities that benefit from existing and planned flood risk management schemes into the future.

Sustainability ambitions include:

• Create new publicly accessible recreational asset(s) of regional significance. • Create new habitat(s) of regional significance delivering net gain for biodiversity and natural capital. • Provide a measurable positive contribution to sustainable development, demonstrating the Environment Agency’s contribution towards international, national and local goals.

In delivery, the Environment Agency also aims to: • Ensure the project is economically viable, affordable and deliverable. • Deliver the project in partnership. • Explore opportunities to work with others to reduce flood risk from surface water, groundwater and sewers. • Emit 80% less construction carbon in comparison to previously constructed flood alleviation schemes and be a net zero contributor from 2030 onwards. • Help communities understand the need for climate resilience measures to reduce the growing flood risk; and • Encourage diversity and reduce inequality in the Thames Valley.

A Scheme of this scale can only succeed if the Environment Agency works in partnership and with the support of local communities. A Strategic Partner Advisory Group has been established to provide insight and expertise in shaping the project ambitions and working towards a catchment approach to managing flood risk.

The current timeline for the Scheme is shown on Figure 1.2.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 1.2: Thames Valley Flood Scheme Timeline

1.2 Flood Risk in the Thames Valley Catchment

The Environment Agency, along with partners have invested heavily into developing new flood schemes throughout the Thames Valley. These include larger schemes at Oxford and on the lower part of the River Thames from Staines to Teddington, through to smaller schemes in towns such as Marlow on Thames and Godalming on the River Wey.

The Environment Agency has built flood defences such as the Lower Mole scheme and Maidenhead, Windsor and Eton Flood Alleviation scheme to divert the flow of water away from properties. Temporary flood barriers are also used to reduce flood risk where appropriate. These have been designed to reduce the immediate threat of river flooding to these communities.

Despite this work to reduce the likelihood and impact of flooding now, the risk of flooding will continue to increase due to climate change, bringing more frequent and severe floods. The impact of these is already being seen.

There are also a number of locations across the Thames Valley where it has not been possible to provide local flood schemes, because it has not been technically feasible, or it has not provided sufficient value for money.

Previous strategies and plans such as the Thames Catchment Flood Management Plan, Oxford Strategy and Lower Thames Strategy have identified the need for implementing a catchment wide approach to mitigate the future flood risk that climate change will bring. The TVFS is therefore being progressed with the aim of developing a catchment wide approach to reducing flood risk, building climate resilience and supporting communities where it has not been possible to provide a local flood scheme.

Further information on the history and consequences of flooding are provided on the TVFS webpage (see Section 1.5 for web links).

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

1.3 Overview of Potential Catchment Approaches

The Scheme is considering several different approaches to reduce flood risk on a catchment scale, as shown on Figure 1.3 and described further in Table 1.1. More details are provided on the TVFS webpage (see Section 1.5 for web links). • Property level resilience • Offline flood Storage • River deepening and widening • Online flood storage • Flood relief channel • Joint water resource and flood storage • Washland or washes • Runoff attenuation features • Removable or temporary flood barriers • Improve urban drainage • Build or raise permanent flood barriers • Changes in soil and crop management • Wetlands • Aquifer storage and recovery • Water transfer • River restoration • Land management combination • Woodland planting

Figure 1.3: A River Catchment Approach to Managing Flood Risk

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table 1.1: Catchment approaches

Approach Reference on Description Figure 1.3

Offline flood Storage 1 Water is diverted from the river in times of a flood. The water is stored in a separate area, which may be part of the floodplain and then released back to the river or to another watercourse when the flooding has passed.

Online flood storage 14 Water is temporarily stored within the rivers channel and floodplain, usually behind built structure to hold back the water, like a dam.

Joint water resource and 2 Large scale water storage that that is designed to store water for use in homes as well as flood storage storing water during a flood to reduce flooding.

Runoff attenuation 3 A man-made change to the landscape that stops or slows water in its flow path and feature collects it in a pond or ditch. This has many benefits, as well as reducing flood risk it helps to clean water before it enters streams or rivers.

Improve urban drainage 4 Sustainable drainage solutions (such as rain gardens and attenuation storage). It is possible to slow or reduce the quantity and improve the quality of surface runoff.

Changes in soil and crop 5 Can reduce flooding by slowing and storing water, encouraging it to drain into the soil management rather than flowing over it and straight into a stream or river. Measures include: • Conservation tillage, where planting, developing and harvesting plants is done with minimal disturbance to the soil. • Sowing crops early. • Planting cover crops. • Reducing the number of farm animals in one area. • Planting more hedge rows. • Leaving a strip of land around the farmers field that is left wild.

Aquifer storage and 6 Storing water underground during wet periods. This water can then be used at another recovery time, usually during dry periods.

River restoration 7 Restores the natural shape to a river. This can be done by putting back meanders or bends, removing narrow points and restoring natural physical processes. By making these changes it slows the flow of water along the river and so can reduce the level speed of flood water.

Woodland planting 8 Over a large area can stop, slow, store and filter water. This can help reduce the size of flooding when it occurs and can reduce how often flooding occurs.

Property level resilience 9 Also widely known as Property Level Protection (PLP), provides property owners with practical and cost-effective steps to reduce flood risk, through the use of bespoke products. There are many different products available including flood gates, water resistant mortar, tiles instead of carpets and raising electrics up above a potential water line.

River deepening and 10 Flood risk can be reduced by increasing the space in the river for water to flow through, widening either by widening or deepening the river or stream. This allows the river to hold more water before flooding.

Flood relief channel 11 When river levels are high water can be diverted to flow through a flood relief channel instead of through a community area. The water then rejoins the main river further downstream.

Washland or washes 12 Areas of land next to rivers which are deliberately flooded at times when river levels are high, to avoid flooding in residential or important farmland.

Removable or temporary 13 Designed to act as a barrier to flood water, keeping it away from communities. These flood barriers flood barriers are only put in place when flooding is expected and are removed as soon as the risk of flooding is gone. Some have fixings that are in place all the time, others just need a flat area of land to be put up on.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Approach Reference on Description Figure 1.3

Build or raise permanent 17 Barriers such as floodwalls and embankments can act as a barrier between rivers and flood barriers communities, reducing the chance of water flooding properties and roads.

Wetlands 15 Wetlands such as fens, marsh, swamp and reed beds can be developed anywhere that is naturally wet or damp all year round. They can be created in river floodplains to store water and reduce or slow drainage into the river.

Water transfer 16 Involves moving water from an area where there is too much water to another area. This is often done using pipes or channels.

Land management N/A A combination of land management approaches including Runoff Attenuation Features, combinations woodland planting and wetland creation.

1.4 Sustainability Appraisal including Strategic Environmental Assessment

1.4.1 The Environmental Assessment of (Plans and Programmes Regulations 2004 (The SEA Regulations’)

The SEA Regulations (SI 2004 no.1633) require (Regulation 5 (2) (a)) that the responsible authority shall carry out an SEA for plans/programmes which are prepared for: agriculture, forestry, fisheries, energy, industry, transport, waste/ water management, telecommunications, tourism, town and country planning or land use. The purpose of the Scheme is to develop approaches, and where appropriate specific measures, for the management of the residual flood risk within the River Thames catchment. As such, it is a water management plan, prepared by the body responsible for such matters (‘the responsible authority’, in this case the Environment Agency). Therefore, SEA is a legal requirement.

1.4.2 The SEA Scoping Requirement

Where an environmental assessment is required under the SEA Regulations, an environmental report must be prepared. Details of the types of information required to be included in the report are provided in the Regulations, but the scope and level of detail of information in the report must be determined only after consultation with ‘the consultation bodies’. These are statutory consultees in the SEA process and are named as the Environment Agency, Natural England and Historic England. The means through which they are consulted is by the production of a Scoping Report. This report meets the requirements for scoping as set out in the SEA Regulations. Further details on other consultation stages planned for the SEA of the Scheme are provided in Section 1.5.

1.4.3 Sustainability Appraisal and SEA

The Environment Agency has a statutory duty to carry out its work in such a way so as to contribute to achieving the objective of sustainable development (Environment Act 1995). In order for the Environment Agency to fulfil this duty for this Scheme, the SEA will be delivered as part of a Sustainability Appraisal (SA), which will incorporate the legislative requirements of the SEA Regulations and include a wider set of topics to cover all relevant aspects of sustainable development. Through applying a wider set of criteria and the use of positive objectives for sustainable development in the assessment process as discussed in Sections 2 and 6 , the SA can inform decision- making through the Scheme’s development from a long list of approaches through to implementation to ensure it makes a positive contribution to sustainable development.

1.4.4 Report Structure

Full details of the SA process and how it meets the requirements of the SEA Regulations is provided in Section 2.4, Table 2.1. This Scoping Report is structured as follows:

• Section 1: Introduction. • Section 2 : Methodology to be adopted for the SA, with details on determination of significance of effects.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

• Section 3: Review of Plans and Programmes, Legislation and Policy, a key activity at the scoping stage, which has informed development of the draft SA Framework. • Section 4 : Social and Economic Factors Baseline section, which discusses social and economic themes that are relevant to the SA Framework and will inform future appraisal stages. • Section 5 : Environmental Baseline section, which discusses relevant environmental themes that are relevant to the SA Framework and will inform future appraisal stages. • Section 6 : Draft SA objectives and the SA Framework which will be refined following consultation responses and will be used to appraise the Scheme approaches in subsequent stages. As a starting point, the Scheme ambitions have been tested for their compatibility with the draft SA objectives; this is provided in Section 6.4. • Section 7 : Next steps.

1.5 Consultation

The Environment Agency is committed to engaging with stakeholders throughout the process of developing the Scheme and has set out three key periods during which proposals will be consulted as shown in Table 1.2 (and also on Figure 1.2).

Table 1.2: Consultation Programme

Consultation Proposed purpose of consultation Accompanying SA report

Consultation • Present flood risk across the Thames Valley SA Scoping Report May 2021 • Present the need for a catchment wide scheme/measures • Present the potential approaches to managing flood risk • Present SA scoping/framework

Engagement • Engage on potential areas where approaches may be possible Preliminary SA Report 2022 • Present any initial appraisal that has been carried out

Consultation • Consult on approaches and locations being considered for short listing Interim SA Report 2023 • Present any detailed appraisal, ecology surveys, updated hydrology, modelling and testing of approaches, and initial economics that has been carried out

As set out above, the SEA Regulations require the Environment Agency to consult the ‘consultation bodies’ on the scope and level of details to be included in the SEA and allow up to five weeks for a response, should they wish to do so. The planned consultation on the Scheme will exceed the minimum SEA requirements and is programmed for 12 weeks. It is open to everyone who has an interest in the Thames Valley Flood Scheme to respond, not just ‘the consultation bodies’ as defined by the SEA Regulations. Responders will include statutory bodies and other key stakeholders/partners, including but not limited to Local Planning Authority teams (planning and flood risk), and other relevant bodies, such as Non-Governmental Organisations (NGOs) and local communities.

The consultation in May 2021 is online, with hard copy material available on request. There will be promotion through social media, local media, websites, and direct communication.

During the consultation this year, Stakeholders are invited to comment on a number of questions (see Thames Valley Flood Scheme webpage), some of which are related to this SA Scoping Report.

Comments are welcome on the issues identified in this SA Scoping Report, the proposed SA objectives, and the draft SA Framework. Feedback is welcomed to identify any baseline or issues missing from the SA Scoping Report which will then consider for inclusion in the updated SA Framework.

Links to the Thames Valley Flood Scheme web pages are shown in Table 1.3.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table 1.3: Links to the Thames Valley Flood Scheme web pages

Title Web link

Welcome https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/tvfs-home

Why do we need the scheme? https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/tvfs-why

Project ambitions and working together https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/tvfs-ambitions

What is the Thames Valley Flood Scheme? https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/tvfs-approaches

Strategic Environmental Assessment https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/sea

Timeline https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/tvfs-timeline

Other consultations and engagement https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/tvfs-engagement

Frequently Asked Questions https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/tvfs-faq

Consultation Questions https://consult.environment-agency.gov.uk/thames/tvfs-home

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

2. Methodology

2.1 Study Area

The catchment for the Scheme covers the entire length of the River Thames upstream of London to its source in Gloucestershire, and all the rivers that flow into it (as discussed in Section 1.1 and shown on Figure 1.1). This defines the main study area for the SA; an additional 5km buffer is also included to account for any approaches that might be proposed on the edge of the catchment and which may affect receptors beyond the catchment boundary.

2.2 Establishing the SA Baseline

Initial, high level, baseline studies have been caried out to help identify receptors and features which could potentially be affected by Scheme approaches, as well as opportunities for the Scheme to contribute towards sustainable development in the Study Area. This then enables SA objectives and the SA framework to be developed for use in the assessment of the Scheme.

The SEA Regulations require the description of the likely significant effects on the environment, including short, medium and long-term effects, permanent and temporary effects, positive and negative effects, and secondary, cumulative and synergistic effects and lists aspects of the environment which should be considered. The SA topics listed below cover all of these aspects; where terminology is slightly different the SEA term is provided in brackets. Further details on the assessment of effects are provided in Section 2.6.

• Social and Economic Factors o Population and Human Health: o Population; o Equality; and o Health (including flood risk and health). o Access and Recreation: o Accessibility; and o Recreational Resources; o Economic Activity: o Economic Sectors; o Employment; and o Tourism. o Flooding and the Economy; o Land Use and the Economy; and o Material Assets – critical infrastructure: o Energy; o Transport; o Health; and o Water.

• Environmental Factors o Biodiversity (including fauna and flora); o Water; o Soils and Geology; o Landscape and Visual Amenity; o Cultural Heritage and Archaeology (including architectural heritage); o Air Quality; o Climate Change; and

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

o Resource Use and Waste.

The interrelationship between these topics is also required to be described and will form part of future SA reporting.

2.3 Information Used

2.3.1 Data Sources

The assessment of baseline conditions has been carried out through desktop studies. The data sources used to inform the baseline assessments are listed in Appendix A.

No field surveys have been carried out for this stage in the SA process.

Key data sources used to build an understanding of the social, economic and environmental baseline presented in this Scoping Report are listed below. These comprise publicly available data from online sources and information from the Environment Agency and partners, including mapped information (see below) from most local authorities within the Study Area.

Additional data sources will be reviewed and incorporated where relevant as the Scheme progresses (for example a data source identified during Consultation 1 or field surveys once specific locations of approaches are known) and at an appropriate level of detail.

Mapped Information

To help determine the baseline situation in the Study Area, a bespoke GIS (Geographical Information System) based ‘Project Mapper’ has been created which includes a large amount of data that can be presented spatially and can also be analysed through export to spreadsheets (for example). Types of information provided by Project Mapper include:

• Designated and protected sites for biodiversity, water, heritage and landscape. • Social deprivation. • Land use/cover. • Waterbodies and their status. • Geology and soil types. • Landscape Character Areas. • Air Quality Management Areas.

A full list of the data sources used in Project Mapper is provided in Appendix A.

Other Sources

Some information is not currently available in a GIS format and for this, specific organisations’ websites were used to garner data and information. These include (but are not limited to):

• Office for National Statistics (ONS): population statistics. • National Online Manpower Information System (NOMIS): employment statistics. • Environment Agency Catchment Data Explorer: waterbody data. • Water Companies corporate websites: water supply information. • British Geological Survey – onshore Geoindex: geological mapping. • Hey and Hind (2014) available from https://library.thehumanjourney.net/2597/

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

2.3.2 Plans, Programmes, Legislation and Policies

A number of plans, programmes, legislation and policies were also reviewed for baseline information or other information relevant to the Scheme as follows:

• National legislation. • Environment Agency plans and programmes. • National plans and programmes (UK-wide or England only, as appropriate). • Other plans and programmes. • Local authority spatial.

Section 3 of this report provides details of these.

2.3.3 Limitations

There are limitations associated with desktop surveys and the use of published reports for the garnering of information. Reports often include data which was current at least a year before publication, online datasets are also not absolutely current owing to the need for QA following collation and some datasets are not collected every year: the Census, for example is only every 10 years and is being updated this year, resulting in Census data being used for the SA being 10 years out of date; the new data will not be available until Summer 2022.

2.4 The SA Process

Figure 2.1 illustrates in a schematic diagram the Scheme, the SA process, and its interaction with the consultation phases.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 2.1: Scheme and SA Processes

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

2.4.1 Scheme Stages

The Scheme is at an early stage in its development, during which the focus is on identifying the need for flood risk management measures in this Study Area and the development of a long list of approaches for managing the risk. Following this process and associated consultation, potential areas where approaches may be possible will be identified and then specific approaches and locations will be short listed. Following further consultation, a preferred set of solutions and a programme for their delivery will be developed.

2.4.2 SA Stages

The stages of the SA cover all of the stages required under the SEA Regulations. The stages, and how they meet the requirements of the SEA Regulations, are summarised in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1: SA/SEA Stages and Requirements of the SEA Regulations

SA/SEA Stage and Tasks SEA Regulatory Requirements Met (Schedule 2) Report/Scheme stage where this is included

Stage A: Scoping – setting the context, establishing a baseline, identifying objectives and proposing scope

Identifying other policies, An outline of the contents and main objectives of the This Scoping Report (Section 3) provides plans and programmes plan or programme, and of its relationship with other summaries of other relevant Policies, Plans relevant plans and programmes. and Programmes.

Collecting baseline The relevant aspects of the current state of the This Scoping Report (Sections 4 and 5) information environment and the likely evolution thereof without describes the baseline conditions and implementation of the plan or programme. identifies future trends and strategic issues The environmental characteristics of areas likely to be across the Study Area for a wide range of significantly affected. topics.

Identifying sustainability Any existing environmental problems which are Based on the baseline setting and analysis of issues relevant to the plan or programme, especially those relevant plans, policies and programmes, key relating to any areas of a particular environmental issues and opportunities are identified to importance, such as areas designated under the develop specific SA objectives to be developed Conservation of Habitats and Species Regulations for economic, environmental and social 2017. themes that are relevant to the Scheme. Draft The environmental protection objectives, established SA objectives are presented in Section 6 of this at international or UK level, which are relevant to the Scoping Report. plan or programme and the way those objectives and An ‘appraisal matrix’, known in the SA process any environmental considerations have been taken into as the ‘SA Framework’ will be used to guide the account during its preparation. assessment. The SA Framework provides a common structure across topics through which Developing SA objectives Not directly included in the regulations but provide the issues and opportunities can be identified and means by which likely significant effects can be described, in terms of their nature (positive, identified. negative, or neutral), permanence and reversibility, spatial scale, duration and magnitude. This also ensures the assessments meet the requirements of the SEA Regulations. A draft SA Framework is included in Section 6 of this report.

Consulting on the scope of Regulation 12 (5): When deciding on the scope and This Scoping Report will be consulted upon the SA level of detail of the information that must be included alongside approaches in Consultation 1. in the report, the responsible authority shall consult The SA objectives and SA Framework will be the consultation bodies. updated following this consultation and will be kept under review following subsequent updates to baseline data and engagement/consultation exercises.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

SA/SEA Stage and Tasks SEA Regulatory Requirements Met (Schedule 2) Report/Scheme stage where this is included

Stage B: Developing and refining alternatives and assessing effects

Assess the performance of Not directly included in the regulations but provides an This Scoping Report (Section 6) includes an the Scheme objectives early indication of potential effects and informs the initial ‘compatibility assessment’ of the against the SA objectives development of alternatives. Scheme’s ambitions and the draft SA objectives.

Developing strategic Regulation 12 (2) The report shall identify, describe This Scoping Report (Section 1) identifies an alternatives (approaches) and evaluate the likely significant effects on the initial catchment-wide list of approaches. environment of— A more refined set of approaches will be (b) reasonable alternatives taking into account the presented alongside an assessment of them in objectives and the geographical scope of the plan or the Preliminary SA Report, at the next programme. engagement stage. Schedule 2: an outline of the reasons for selecting the A final set of more detailed approaches will be alternatives dealt with, and a description of how the presented alongside an assessment of them in assessment was undertaken including any difficulties the Interim SA Report, at the third engagement (such as technical deficiencies or lack of know-how) stage. encountered in compiling the required information.

Predicting the effects of the Schedule 2: an outline of the reasons for selecting the Assessment of approaches to be presented in Scheme or programme alternatives dealt with, and a description of how the Preliminary, Interim and Final SA Reports. including alternatives assessment was undertaken including any difficulties Assessment of effects of preferred approaches (approaches) (such as technical deficiencies or lack of know-how) to be presented in Final SA Report. encountered in compiling the required information. The likely significant effects on the environment, including short, medium and long-term effects, permanent and temporary effects, positive and negative effects, and secondary, cumulative and synergistic effects.

Mitigating adverse effects The measures envisaged to prevent, reduce and as fully Assessment of effects of preferred approaches as possible offset any significant adverse effects on the and mitigation measures required to avoid or environment of implementing the plan or programme. minimise adverse effects will be presented in the Final SA Report.

Proposing measures to 17 (1) The responsible authority shall monitor the This Scoping Report includes preliminary monitor the effects of the significant environmental effects of the indicators which may be used to monitor the Scheme implementation of each plan or programme with the Scheme. purpose of identifying unforeseen adverse effects at an These will be refined as the Scheme progresses early stage and being able to undertake appropriate and a final set of indicators and monitoring remedial action. regime will be proposed and consulted upon in the Final SA Report.

Stage C: Preparing the Sustainability Report

Prepare the report Regulation 12 (1) Where an environmental assessment The Final SA Report is required by any provision of Part 2 of these Regulations, the responsible authority shall prepare, or secure the preparation of, an environmental report

Stage D: Consulting on the draft Scheme and Sustainability Report

Consulting the public and 13 (1) Every draft plan or programme for which an The draft Scheme and the Final SA Report Consultation Bodies on the environmental report has been prepared in accordance draft Scheme and Final SA with regulation 12 and its accompanying Report environmental report (“the relevant documents”) shall be made available for the purposes of consultation

Post-adoption statement 16 (1) As soon as reasonably practicable after the An SA post-adoption statement adoption of a plan or programme for which an environmental assessment has been carried out under

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

SA/SEA Stage and Tasks SEA Regulatory Requirements Met (Schedule 2) Report/Scheme stage where this is included these Regulations, the responsible authority shall (make a statement) containing information on: (a) how environmental considerations have been integrated into the plan or programme; (b) how the environmental report has been taken into account; (d) how the results of any consultations entered into under regulation 14(4) have been taken into account; (e) the reasons for choosing the plan or programme as adopted, in the light of the other reasonable alternatives dealt with; and (f) the measures that are to be taken to monitor the significant environmental effects of the implementation of the plan or programme

Stage E: Monitoring

Develop the approach to 17 (1) The responsible authority shall monitor the This Scoping Report (Section 6) includes monitoring significant environmental effects of the preliminary indicators which may be used to implementation of each plan or programme with the monitor the Scheme. purpose of identifying unforeseen adverse effects at an These will be refined as the Scheme progresses early stage and being able to undertake appropriate and a final set of indicators and monitoring remedial action. regime will be proposed and consulted upon in the Final SA Report.

Monitor the performance of 17 (1) The responsible authority shall monitor the Monitoring reports for the Scheme and the Scheme significant environmental effects of the induvial projects as these are developed and implementation of each plan or programme with the implemented. purpose of identifying unforeseen adverse effects at an early stage and being able to undertake appropriate remedial action.

2.5 Iterative Assessment

Despite having sequential stages, the SA is not a wholly linear process; it is iterative. This means that within and between stages and in the development of the Scheme, there are feedback loops to facilitate refinement of assessment procedures, alternatives being developed and the choices relating to the preferred approaches once selected.

2.6 Describing Effects and Their Significance

2.6.1 Establishing the SA Framework

The SA will be an expert judgement-based assessment, supported by appropriate evidence and will use experience gained by conducting SA and SEA of other flood risk management proposals and from conducting SA of Local Plans. The assessment will utilise bespoke mapping software to identify areas of potential opportunity as well as adverse effects. Up-to-date, catchment-wide social, economic and environmental data will be used to inform the impact assessment. The spatial scale to which this data is captured depends to a certain extent on the topic and also relates to the spatial scale of the approaches being considered. It will become more locally specific as approaches are refined to a more local geographical scale as the Scheme develops in later stages.

Once the SA Framework is confirmed through consultation, the potential effects of the Scheme will be described in terms of their nature (positive or negative), permanence and reversibility, spatial scale and duration and a level of significance will be determined (ranging from neutral to major). Due to the strategic nature of the assessment, and the multiple variables to consider, there will always be some uncertainty in the assessment.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

It is important to recognise that the baseline in the Study Area is evolving and will continue to evolve during the Scheme development, and after the adoption of the Scheme, given the changing flood risk over time and the long- time period of the Scheme. For example, land use and land management change, influenced by national policy and economic drivers impacting on the scale of nature’s recovery and the focus of agricultural activity, will result in a changing dynamic in relation to the resource of important habitats and the distribution of species. The possible trends in the baseline are presented in Sections 4 and 5 of this report.

2.6.2 Cumulative, secondary and synergistic effects

It is a requirement of the SEA Regulations that cumulative, secondary and synergistic effects are described.

• Cumulative effects arise, for instance, where number of plans or strategies may individually have neutral or minor impacts but in combination could result in moderate or even major impacts on a receptor (positive or adverse). • Secondary or indirect effects are effects that are not a direct result of the Scheme but occur away from the original effect or as a result of simple or complex pathways. For example, hydrological changes will affect the ecology of a nearby wetland, which may have a further indirect effect on breeding bird populations. • Synergistic effects interact to produce a total effect greater than the sum of the individual effects. Synergistic effects often happen as habitats, resources or human communities get close to capacity. For instance: a wildlife habitat can become progressively fragmented with limited effects on a species until the last fragmentation makes the areas too small to support the species at all; a positive synergistic effect would be where creation of a small number of linkages in the green infrastructure network could greatly increase the uptake in active modes of transport.

These types of effects will be considered throughout the SA process, but will become more focused at later stages of the Scheme at the Preferred Scheme stage. There are significant levels of uncertainty associated with cumulative effects assessments, as they are largely based on subjective extrapolations, as recognised in the ODPM SEA Guidance.

2.7 Natural Capital

The SA Process will be informed by other assessments including anticipated compliance (or not) with relevant legislation and guidance (including the Conservation of Habitats and Species Regulations 2017 and the Water Environment Regulations 2017).

It will also be informed and underpinned by a Natural Capital Assessment, which is itself informed by an ecosystem’s services assessment. Natural Capital is ‘the sum of our ecosystems, species, freshwater, land, soils, minerals, our air and our seas’ (Defra, 2018). Nature provides direct and indirect benefits to people individually and to wider society. Some of these benefits are less tangible than others but they exist none the less and are important. Applying natural capital approaches ensures that the benefits nature brings are not overlooked and can be protected and enhanced. Whilst nature has intrinsic value, it benefits us in many ways. For example, natural capital assets provide us with food, clean air and water, fuel, protection from hazards, recreation, physical and mental health benefits and much more.

In 2016 it was estimated that the ‘partial value’ of natural capital in the UK was near to £1 trillion (UK Natural Capital Accounts, ONS, 2019). The monetary accounts are interpreted as a ‘partial’ or ‘minimum value’ of the services provided by the natural environment, because a number of ecosystem services, such as flood protection from natural resources, are not currently measured, and conservative assumptions are typically adopted where there is uncertainty (ONS, 2019). An example of a natural capital asset could be woodland. The ecosystem services that might be associated with woodland include carbon storage, cooling and shading and timber for example. Developing a natural capital baseline allows for consideration of how Scheme approaches may impact on natural capital, supporting more informed decision making and better consideration of environmental concerns. This in turn helps identify opportunities for protection and enhancement, with the potential to identify ‘co-benefits’ for both the environment and flood risk management.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

When assessing the benefits and values associated with natural capital and ecosystem services, a logic chain approach (as developed by Natural England) can be used as shown in Figure 2.2.

Figure 2.2: Logic Chain Approach

The logic chain approach captures the following information regarding natural capital:

• Information on natural capital asset quantity, quality and location. • The ecosystem services likely to be provided by assets (as a function of quantity, quality and location). • The benefits and beneficiaries associated with the ecosystem services provided. • The value of the benefits to society.

The Natural Capital Assessment will be carried out at a later stage of the Scheme’s development when there are more locally specific potential solutions identified and will help to demonstrate the level of benefits associated with each and how such benefits could be maximised. The methodology for this assessment is currently being developed. As it is developed further, its relationship with the SA process, and with individual topics contributing to the SA, will be more clearly defined. However, it is anticipated that future SA reports (most likely at the Interim SA Report Stage) will include details of the natural capital assets within the Study Area and the relative benefits associated with different potential solutions.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3. Review of Plans and Programmes, Legislation and Policy

3.1 Introduction

The SEA Regulations stipulate in Schedule 2 that the Environmental Report (produced at the end of the assessment process) includes a description of the relationship of the proposed plan or programme (i.e. the Scheme) with other relevant plans and programmes.

This section therefore identifies and provides summary information for the range of plans and programmes which relate to the Study Area and are considered relevant to the Scheme, explains how they are relevant and then sets out how this will be taken into account in the SA.

For the purposes of the SA, legislation relevant to the Scheme has also been included. As a minimum, the Scheme must comply with all applicable legislation; a review at this stage of what is likely to be applicable helps guide the process through which alternatives are compared, for example, through understanding the legal requirements relating to protected areas. The SA process, however, allows us to take this further: through the development of related SA objectives for use in the appraisal, there are opportunities to develop the Scheme in a way in which it goes beyond the minimum legal requirements in a positive way.

Similarly, the Environment Agency’s own policies and plans and programmes are reviewed. In addition to being directly relevant to an Environment Agency scheme, as a non-departmental public body Environment Agency policy and plans and programmes are a material consideration in the development of any new plan relating to its areas of responsibility.

In addition, plans and programmes at a national level are also reviewed where it is deemed, they can affect, influence or must be considered in the development of the Scheme.

The Study Area is a large area, comprising the entire non-tidal Thames catchment. With this in mind, local authority plans are directly relevant to the Scheme, particularly local development plans, minerals and waste plans and flood risk management plans. There are a number of local authorities within the Study Area, organised into a hierarchy of ‘tiers’, each tier with its own range and level of responsibilities. All local authorities within the Study Area have been identified (See Section 3.6) and where relevant, objectives from their plans highlighted in Appendix B.

However, given the size of the Study Area and the strategic nature of the alternatives being considered at this stage of the Scheme development, only particular plans and programmes have been considered in the development of the SA objectives. This is outlined further in Sections 3.6.

In summary, the plans, programmes, legislation, and policies reviewed in this section are organised as follows:

3.2 National Legislation

3.2.1 EU (Withdrawal Act) 2018

Several of the national pieces of legislation described in this section originated as EU legislation and were transposed into UK law. Following the withdrawal of the UK from the EU, the ‘parent’ EU Directives are no longer relevant and have not been considered in this process. The EU (Withdrawal) Act 2018 enshrines such legislation in domestic law.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3.2.2 The Health and Social Care Act (2012) (England)

This Act focuses on addressing changes necessary to safeguard the NHS, including a new focus on public health (prevention rather than cure) and a key legislative change related to reducing health inequalities. The causes of health inequalities are complex and diverse. The Act placed a duty on all health bodies to have due regard to reducing inequalities between people in England. It is seen as complementary legislation to the Equality Act 2010.

The current situation with respect to health in the Study Area is described in Section 4.1; the impacts on health from flooding are also described. Other topics are also of relevance such as access and recreation, employment and clean air which all contribute to health and wellbeing. Objectives relating to all of these are included in the draft SA objectives and in ensuring the Scheme contributes positively to them, healthy outcomes are more likely. Inequalities are also addressed under a separate SA objective; the commitment to engagement with local communities throughout the development of the Scheme will also help by encouraging people to take part in the identification of priorities and in the decision-making process.

3.2.1 The Equality Act (2010)

The Equality Act 2010 provides a legal framework to protect the rights of individuals and advance equality of opportunity for all. The Act has two main purposes – to harmonise discrimination law, and to strengthen the law to support progress on equality. The ‘Equality Duty’, as outlined in the Act, applies across the UK to the public bodies listed in Schedule 19 (as amended), which includes the Environment Agency, and to any other organisation when it is carrying out a public function. An Equality Impact Assessment (EQIA), is no longer required under the Equality Act 2010 but has been traditionally used to ensure the elimination of discrimination.

An SA objective has been drafted to help build equality into the Scheme from the outset.

3.2.2 The Social Value Act (2012)

This Act requires public sector commissioners to consider economic, social and environmental wellbeing. The NHS considers this a supporting act to the Health and Social Care Act (2012) as it states that:

Creating social value has clear connections with efforts to reduce health inequalities through action on the social determinants of health – for example, by improving employment and housing.

Defining social value with reference to the social determinants of health can help to reduce local inequalities, improve the health and wellbeing of local people and in the longer term reduce the demand on health services and other services .

SA of the Scheme allows a great breadth of issues relating to people to be included. As the Scheme develops site- specific proposals, relevant social value outcomes will be identified and assessed. A range of objectives is therefore included in Section 6 relating to positive outcomes for people and these will be central to the assessment of alternative solutions for the Scheme.

3.2.3 Countryside and Rights of Way Act (2000)

The Countryside and Rights of Way Act strengths the protection of nature conservation assets, and also affords protection to public rights of way.

Existing conditions with respect to access, public rights of way and recreation are considered in Section 4.2 of this report. Protection of existing access to the countryside and its importance to recreation has been built into the SA objectives (See Section 6).

3.2.4 Environment Bill 2019-2021 (UK Government, 2019)

The Environment Bill was produced in response to the UK’s exit from the EU. Although not yet ‘enacted’, it is a significant piece of future legislation for the environment and as such is summarised here. 24

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

The Bill provides a legal framework for environmental governance which commits to the contribution of sustainable development. It plots a course to:

• Establish a pioneering new system of green governance. • Improve air quality. • Restore and enhance nature. • Improve waste management and resource efficiency. • Improve surface water, ground water and wastewater management.

It also proposes to put the 25 Year Environment Plan (See Section 3.4) on a statutory footing.

The priority areas set out above have the potential to be affected (positively or adversely) by the Scheme; the SA objectives reflect this and all five priority areas have an objective which will be used in the SA process to guide the Scheme towards a positive contribution to the targets being developed for these priority areas.

3.2.5 The Environment Act (1995)

Section 4 of the Environment Act sets out the principal aim and objective of the Environment Agency to:

• Protect the environment as a whole; and • Contribute towards sustainable development.

The expansion of the required SEA for the Scheme into a Sustainability Appraisal has been done to ensure these principal aims are met for this Scheme. See Sections 1 and 2 for further details.

Section 6 of the Act sets out general provisions for the Environment Agency with respect to water and requires:

• The conservation and enhancement of the natural beauty and amenity of inland and coastal waters and of land associated with such waters. • The conservation of flora and fauna which are dependent on an aquatic environment. • The use of such waters and land for recreational purposes.

Section 7 of the Act sets out the general environmental and recreational duties on the Environment Agency whilst carrying out its functions:

• To further the conservation and enhancement of natural beauty and the conservation of flora and fauna and geological or physiographical features of special interest. • To have regard to the desirability of protecting and conserving buildings, sites and objects of archaeological, architectural, engineering or historic interest. • To take into account any effect which the proposals would have on the beauty or amenity of any rural or urban area or on any such flora, fauna, features, buildings, sites or objects. • To have regard to any effect which the proposals would have on the economic and social well-being of local communities in rural areas.

All of these areas of consideration are included in the SA baseline conditions and the draft SA objectives (See Section 6) and the ambitions outlined will be built into the development of the Scheme.

3.2.6 The Water Environment (Water Framework Directive) (England and Wales) Regulations (WER) 2017

The purpose of the Water Environment Regulations (WER) is to deliver long-term protection of rivers, estuaries, coastal areas, groundwater and wetlands, to achieve the best possible environment for people and wildlife. The aims are to improve water quality, protect against diffuse pollution, improve habitats, and drive sustainable use of water resources. There is a requirement for all inland and coastal waters to achieve (or have a plan to work towards)

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

at least ‘Good' condition and this will be achieved through the establishment of environmental objectives and ecological targets for surface waters.

Compliance with the provisions of the legislation needs to be taken into account in the planning of all new activities in the water environment, and in particular projects such as flood risk management with potential physical effects on waterbodies should not result in a decrease in the quality of any water body, nor prevent any water body from achieving Good condition.

There is also a requirement in the WER to ensure that other legislative requirements relating to water are met and areas subject to these other requirements are known as ‘Protected Areas’. Protected Areas include:

• Drinking Water Protection Areas, which aim to preserve the quality and integrity of surface water and groundwater resources. • Bathing Waters, most of which are coastal, but some are inland. • Nitrate Vulnerable Zones, which are vulnerable to pollution (nutrient enrichment) from agricultural and other sources. • Sensitive areas under the Urban Wastewater Treatment Regulations 1994, which are identified as vulnerable to pollution (nutrient enrichment) from sewage.

The objectives of the WER and the requirement to ensure there is no deterioration in status for any waterbody are considered further in Section 5.2 and built into the SA objectives (Section 6) so that in the development of the Scheme these are considered from the outset and ‘designed in’ to the approaches identified as the Scheme progresses.

3.2.7 The Conservation of Habitats and Species Regulations (2017)

Known as ‘The Habitats Regulations’, these Regulations consolidate and update the Conservation of Habitats and Species Regulations 2010 that transposed EU Directives on the conservation of natural habitats and of wild fauna (including birds) and flora. These regulations continue to provide for the designation and protection of internationally important sites (Special Areas of Conservation (SACs) and Special Protection Areas (SPAs)) and species. The regulations require competent authorities to carry out an assessment to determine if a plan or project is likely to significantly affect a designated site. There are a number of such sites within the Study Area. As a result, the Habitats Regulations Assessment process will begin once the possible locations of viable approaches have been identified and screening will be carried out to determine whether the next level of detail, known as Appropriate Assessment, will be required.

Baseline biodiversity conditions, including the identification of SACs and SPAs within the Study Area are described in Section 5.1 of this report. Protection and enhancement of these and other designated sites is included in the SA objectives (See Section 6).

3.2.8 The Wildlife and Countryside Act (1981) (as amended) and Natural Environment and Rural Communities Act 2006

The Wildlife and Countryside Act confers protection on certain species of birds and wild animals and makes provision for the designation of land as a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI). In England, assent from Natural England for operations by the Environment Agency is required before any works which might adversely affect a SSSI are undertaken. The Act also place duties on public bodies to further the conservation and enhancement of SSSIs, both in carrying out operations and in exercising decision-making functions. The Act also allows for the protection of wildlife (birds, other animals and plants) listed in Schedules 1, 5 and 8, and prevents the spread of non-native species listed in Schedule 9.

The ‘NERC Act’ makes some amendments to the Wildlife and Countryside Act (1981) and implements key aspects of the government’s Rural Strategy published in July 2004. It established Natural England as responsible for managing England’s natural environment, working in partnership with others such as the Environment Agency and local authorities. It places a duty to conserve biodiversity on public authorities in England. 26

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Baseline biodiversity conditions, including the identification of SSSIs within the Study Area, are described in Section 5.1 of this report. Protection and enhancement of biodiversity is included in the SA objectives (See Section 6).

3.2.9 Legislation to Protect Fish

Salmon and Freshwater Fisheries Act (SAFFA) (1975) and The Eels (England and Wales Regulations 2009)

This Act requires due regard to be given to any effects a proposal would have on fish or fisheries. Amongst other things, this Act makes it an offence to disturb any spawn or spawning fish or any bed, bank or shallow on which any spawn or spawning fish may be.

The Eels (England and Wales) Regulations 2009 set out a number of measures to protect eel populations. Those most relevant to the Scheme relate to unimpeded passage along rivers, ensuring that no new in-river structures could impede their movement and that planed works to existing structures improve eel passage where necessary.

The SA will ensure adequate measures are incorporated for the protection of fish, within both the lakes and the rivers in the Study Area. Particular consideration will be given to the possible spread of native or non-native species as a result of the Scheme, and if any new river structures are to be proposed these will include the provision for encouraging or not inhibiting fish passage. There could also be opportunities to improve fish passage on other structures in the Study Area that are not directly affected.

Baseline biodiversity conditions, including the identification of important aquatic fauna within the Study Area are described in Section 5.1 of this report. Protection and enhancement of biodiversity is included in the SA objectives (See Section 6).

3.2.10 Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act 1979

The Act defines sites that warrant protection due to their being of national importance as 'ancient monuments'. These can be either Scheduled Monuments or " any other monument which in the opinion of the Secretary of State is of public interest by reason of the historic, architectural, traditional, artistic or archaeological interest attaching to it”.

Current conditions within the Study Area with respect to cultural heritage and archaeology are described in Section 5.5. The requirement to maintain and enhance heritage assets is included within the SA objectives (See Section 6) and so will be an integral part of the Scheme development.

3.2.11 Climate Change Act 2008

The Climate Change Act created a new approach to reduce the production of greenhouse gas emissions in the UK, by:

• Setting ambitious, legally binding targets of reducing greenhouse gas emissions, previously by 80 percent by 2050, but more recently cutting greenhouse gas emission by 78% between 1990 and 2035 (as per the updates made by the Sixth Carbon Budget produced in 2020). • Taking powers to help meet those targets. • Strengthening the institutional framework. • Enhancing the UK’s ability to adapt to the impact of climate change. • Establishing clear and regular accountability to the UK Parliament and to the devolved legislatures.

Section 5.7 describes the UK’s current performance with respect to the emission of greenhouse gases and the achievement of national targets. A draft SA objective to reduce greenhouse gas emissions is included in Section 6. Assessment of the Scheme approaches will consider this objective, as well as the potential embodied carbon of each approach being assessed, once specific locations are known.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3.3 Environment Agency Plans and Policies

3.3.1 EA2025 Creating a Better Place (2020)

This is a five-year plan setting out the priorities for the Environment Agency within that time. It sets out three long term goals: • A nation resilient to climate change. • Healthy air, land and water. • Green growth and a sustainable future. Under these goals are a series of aims for achievement within five years, including creating more climate resilient places and infrastructure which are prepared for flooding and drought; achieving cleaner air, better water quality and the protection of nature and land; and encouraging more sustainable business models and circular economies. The plan also sets a longer-term target for the Environment Agency: to be net zero carbon by 2030.

All of the goals and aims within this plan are captured in the draft SA objectives to some degree and the use of these in the assessment of alternatives as the Scheme is developed will ensure that the preferred approach makes a positive contribution to the plan goals.

3.3.2 Meeting our Future Water Needs: A National Framework for Water Resources (2020)

The National Framework explores England’s long-term water needs setting out the scale of action needed to ensure resilient water supplies are available to meet the needs of all users in the future and a greater level of ambition for restoring, protecting and improving the environment that is the source of all supplies. The framework identifies that the South East (which has large overlap with the Study Area) faces the greatest pressures on public water supplies. It recognises that if surplus water (where supplies exceed demand) can be made available, the region will still need to develop options to supply more water, equivalent to all the new water resource options and transfers selected in company Water Resource Management Plans (WRMPs). This is as well as achieving ambitious efficiency reductions.

The framework states that “ if the South East can’t access the surplus water, then demand in the region will need to be reduced further or further resources developed. Water Resources South East needs to track progress on demand management particularly closely because, if savings are less than expected, it could develop a large shortfall which may reduce resilience, limit progress on environmental improvements or lead to more frequent use of drought measures ”.

The priorities of the framework are to ensure resilient water supplies are available to the South East, and beyond, by providing the national blueprint for future water resource planning. The framework seeks to do this through enabling collaboration, developing modelling, developing new supply infrastructure, supporting reductions in water demand and developing long term environmental improvement.

Section 5.2 of this report sets out the baseline for some of the more significant water resources in the Study Area and confirms the issues identified for the south east in general. An SA objective for the protection of water resources is included; the objective to adapt to climate change is also relevant here. Through the application of these and the wider set of SA objectives, the development of the Scheme will be guided to ensure water resources are protected and enhanced where possible.

3.3.3 National Flood and Coastal Erosion Risk Management Strategy (FCERM) for England (2020)

The Flood and Water Management Act 2010, Section 7, requires flood and coastal erosion risk management authorities to aim to contribute towards the achievement of sustainable development when exercising their flood and coastal erosion risk management functions. The strategy details actions which can be taken to manage flood risk and mitigate impacts on communities and a key theme throughout is building resilient places, people and infrastructure. To mitigate risks the FCERM identified that government will need to work with partners to: bolster resilience to flooding and coastal change across the nation, both now and in the face of climate change; make the

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

right investment and planning decisions to secure sustainable growth and environmental improvements, as well as resilient infrastructure avoiding inappropriate development in areas of flood and coastal erosion risk; ensure local people understand their risk of flooding and coastal change, and know their responsibilities and how to take action; provide support to people and businesses when required, providing world class research and innovation of flood and coastal risk management to better protect current and future generations; and help support communities with managing the long-term mental health impacts from flooding and coastal change.

Existing flood risk in the Study Area is described in Section 1 of this report where the need for the Scheme is presented. Additional information on flood risk is included Section 5.2, particularly in relation to future trends. The Scheme’s three ambitions to reduce flood risk would need to be met by the preferred approach, and the additional sustainability ambitions and the wider set of SA objectives will work collectively to guide the process to identify Scheme approaches that will deliver sustainable flood risk management.

3.3.4 Thames River Basin Management Plan (RBMP) (2015)

The purpose of the RBMP is to provide a framework for protecting and enhancing the benefits provided by the water environment in compliance with the Water Environment Regulations (WER). To achieve this, and because water and land resources are closely linked, it also informs decisions on land-use planning. The RBMP outlines the environmental objectives detailed in the WER, which all public bodies must have regard to when making decisions that could affect the quality of the water environment. These objectives include; preventing deterioration; protecting area compliance and objectives; achieving good status for all water bodies or, for heavily modified water bodies and artificial water bodies, good ecological potential and good surface water chemical status; reverse any significant and sustained upward trends in pollutant concentrations in groundwater; and progressive reduction of pollution of groundwater. The RMBP details how these objectives can be achieved, across defined time periods. The SA will develop objectives in relation to water body protection and improvement and the Scheme will be assessed against these objectives.

The current RBMP is being reviewed and updated and will be informed through the River Basin Planning: Challenges and Choices (2021) consultation.

Section 5.2 of this report provides the baseline situation for waterbodies in the Study Area and sets out how the catchment is managed to deliver the goals of the RBMP. It recognises the importance of the different elements of waterbodies and the pressures they are under. The draft SA objectives include the need to protect and enhance (where possible) the status of waterbodies and to protect water resources. In achieving these objectives, the Scheme contributes to other objectives also, such as biodiversity. Equally the achievement of other SA objectives such as protecting soil quality, minimising resource use and taking into account the impacts of climate change, help to achieve the objectives for water. The SA provides a process through which these positive relationships can be maximised.

3.3.5 Thames Flood Risk Management Plan (2015)

A Flood Risk Management Plan (FRMP) helps to manage flooding from rivers, the sea, surface water, groundwater and reservoirs. The Thames FRMP sets out the characteristics of the area covered by this plan and the existing flood risk management already adopted for the area. The FRMP also identifies objectives and measures to manage flood risk for the whole Thames River Basin District. The objectives focus on social, economic and environmental factors and the measures include the prevention of flood risk, preparing for flood risk, protecting from flood risk and the recovery and risk of flood risk.

The Study Area is located within several of the identified Management Catchment Areas, namely: Gloucestershire and the Vale; Cotswolds; Cherwell and Ray; Thame and Chiltern South; Kennett and Trib; Loddon and Trib; Maidenhead to Sunbury; Wey and Trib; Mole; and Colne.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

sustainability ambitions and the wider set of SA objectives will work collectively to guide the process to identify Scheme approaches that will deliver sustainable flood risk management. A review of the FRMP local measures will be carried out as the Scheme progresses.

3.3.6 Thames Environment Design Handbook (National Rivers Authority (NRA), 1992)

The Thames Environment Design Handbook is currently being revised by the Environment Agency. This NRA version is primarily concerned with the River Thames from Teddington Lock upstream to Lechlade, identifying that this “124 miles of navigable river passes through rural and urban landscapes of great variety and interest and each year attracts in excess of a million visitors. These visitors have increasing expectations of how the river infrastructure is managed, especially at the most accessible and impressive built environments associated with the locks and views”. The handbook addresses management and design issues, including aesthetic quality (landscape and visual quality) and functional navigational problems such as bank erosion to ensure environmental protection. It is currently being updated by the Environment Agency to also include detailed references concerning sustainability and carbon.

Any environmental design guidance in the updated handbook that is also relevant to flood risk management approaches will be captured in the related strategic assessments (e.g. for landscape and for waterbodies) and thus will be integrated into the development of the Scheme through application of the SA process.

3.4 Nationals Plans, Programmes and Strategies

3.4.1 Agenda 2030: The UK Government’s approach to delivering the Global Goals for Sustainable Development - at home and around the world (Department for International Development, 2017)

The 17 Global Goals for Sustainable Development (SDGs) will shape the world’s approach to growth and sustainable development until 2030. The UK Government is committed to delivering the Goals both at home and around the world. The SDGs include goals that aim for social, economic and environmental sustainability including ending poverty, zero hunger, adopting peace and justice, good health, quality education, clean water and sanitation and affordable and clean energy. The SDGs also aim to provide decent work and economic growth, build resilient industry, innovation and infrastructure, reduce inequality and make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable. The Agenda outlines goals to enhance the environment by: tackling climate change; ensuring responsible production and consumption; conserving and sustainably using the ‘water’ environment; protecting, restoring and promoting sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems, including sustainably managing forests, combating desertification, reversing land degradation and halting biodiversity loss.

The requirement to carry out SEA has been expanded to SA to ensure the Scheme makes a positive contribution to sustainable development. Some of the SDGs, relevant to the Scheme have been considered in the drafting of the SA objectives to ensure alignment where appropriate.

3.4.2 Public Health England (PHE) Strategy 2020-25 (PHE 2019)

This strategy outlines PHE priorities up to 2025 to both protect people and help people live longer in good health. It identifies a number of opportunities relating to people’s health:

• Making the economic case for prevention. • Optimising behavioural science. • Realising the potential of new technologies. • Harnessing progress in science and research. • Creating healthy communities.

A key driver underpinning all of these is the aim of reducing health inequalities.

Note this document was published prior to the COVID-19 pandemic and so does not include any references to that or public health measures associated with it.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3.4.3 Civil Society Strategy: Building a Future that Works for Everyone (HM Government, 2017)

This Strategy sets out how the UK Government will work with and support civil society in the years to come, so that together the UK can become a country that works for everyone. To help communities thrive, five foundations of social value were identified including people, places, the social sector, the private sector, and the public sector. This strategy outlines the difficulties associated with funding in the private, public and voluntary sectors, tackling the power of technology and ensuring collaboration. It is an aim of the government to build relationships with charitable organisations, invest in the public and private sector, and reduce poverty, obesity, mental ill-health, youth disengagement, reoffending, homelessness, isolation, and loneliness, and the challenges of community integration.

The importance of understanding social value in the development of the Scheme has been recognised at the outset and the approach taken reflects this, such as the expansion of SEA into SA so as to include a wider set of social parameters in the assessment process and provide meaningful engagement with communities.

3.4.4 Build Back Better: our plan for growth (2021)

Following the COVID-19 pandemic a new strategy for economic recovery and growth has been produced. ‘Build Back Better: our plan for growth’ sets out the government’s plans to support growth through significant investment. The Plan includes three core pillars for growth:

• Infrastructure. • Skills. • Innovation.

This growth is intended to:

• Level up the whole of the UK. • Support the transition to net zero carbon emissions. • Support the vision for Global Britain.

Section 4.4 considers the economic situation in the Study Area and Section 4.4 looks specifically at how flooding can impact upon the economy. Section 6 includes SA objectives for these topics also. The impact of COVID-19 on the economy and other aspects of the Study Area have not yet been quantified, however it is acknowledged that there may be issues and opportunities associated with it for the Study Area, for example, important tourism locations have not been able to function; conversely, there is significant employment in health-related companies including those producing vaccines. Further consideration will be given to the impacts of the pandemic on the Study Area and how it may impact the solutions being developed for the Scheme as it progresses to later stages.

3.4.5 National Planning Policy Framework (Ministry of Housing, Communities and Local Government, 2019)

The National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF) sets out the Government’s planning policies for England and how these should be applied. It provides a framework within which locally prepared plans for housing and other development can be produced. It sets out that the purpose of the planning system is to deliver sustainable development and it identifies three strategic objectives for society, the economy, and the environment which locally prepared plans must help deliver. So that sustainable development is pursued in a positive way, at the heart of the NPPF is a ‘ presumption in favour of sustainable development’.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

The NPPF sets out a number of key aspects of sustainable development that locally prepared plans must target and sets ambitions for these. All of these are of some relevance to the Scheme, however of particular relevance are:

• Building a strong, competitive economy. • Promoting healthy and safe communities. • Making effective use of land. • Protecting Green Belt Land. • Meeting the challenge of climate change, flooding and coastal change. • Conserving and enhancing the natural environment. • Facilitating the sustainable use of minerals.

The topics included in this SA scoping report strongly reflect those in the NPPF and these key areas are also included in the draft SA objectives. The specific requirements of the NPPF are also reflected in the locally-prepared plans that have been reviewed (See Section 3.6) and their strategic objectives have been taken into account in the development of the SA objectives and criteria for use in the SA. This will help to ensure that the Scheme meets the requirements of national and local planning policies and the ambitions for sustainable development.

3.4.6 National Infrastructure Delivery Plan (NIDP) 2016-2021

The NIDP (Infrastructure and Projects Authority, 2016) brings together the government’s plans for economic infrastructure with those to support delivery of housing and social infrastructure. It identifies the issues concerning existing infrastructure and the need to invest in such infrastructure to promote wider economic benefits. The NIDP identifies that flooding can have a devastating effect on communities, causing significant damage to homes and businesses. It can cause severe disruption to energy, transport, water and communications networks and have a major effect on local economies. The government has identified the requirement of funding from public and local partners in order to improve flood and coastal risk management. The programme of flood and coastal defence improvements is built up of schemes developed and promoted by the Environment Agency and Lead Local Flood Authorities, in collaboration with communities.

The purpose of the Scheme is to identify solutions for reducing the risk of flooding in the Study Area; it is not included within the current NIDP which identifies funding up to 2021 only, however it will set out solutions to manage the flooding issues outlined in the NIDP. The SA process ensures that these solutions will be not only effective but also sustainable. There are several SA objectives of relevance to this.

3.4.7 Oxford Cambridge Arc Spatial Development Framework Policy Paper 2021

At Budget 2020, the government committed to developing, with local partners, a Spatial Framework for the Oxford-Cambridge Arc – the area that spans the five ceremonial counties of Oxfordshire, Northamptonshire, Buckinghamshire, Bedfordshire and Cambridgeshire.

The Plan will focus on the strategic opportunities for growth and environmental improvement that cross local administrative boundaries and require more joined-up thinking across the area – such as strategic approaches to support cleaner air and biodiversity net gain, or a more integrated approach to planning for new transport infrastructure alongside new development. In doing this, it aims to set a framework that supports better, more sustainable planning and growth at the local level.

The policy paper includes objectives for key areas such as sustainable economic growth, integrated management of the environment, transport and infrastructure and housing.

The Spatial Framework itself is planned for 2022 and will therefore be considered at later stages of the Scheme’s development. In the meantime, the objectives within the policy paper have been considered in the development of the SA objectives.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3.4.8 Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (Defra) 25 Year Environment Plan (HM Government, 2018)

The 25 Year Environment Plan sets out government action to help the natural world regain and retain good health. It has ten goals across six policy areas, relating to:

• Clean air. • Clean and plentiful water. • Thriving plants and wildlife. • A reduced risk of harm from environmental hazards such as flooding and drought. • Using resources from nature more sustainably and efficiently. • Enhanced beauty, heritage and engagement with the natural environment. • Mitigating and adapting to climate change. • Minimising waste. • Managing exposure to chemicals. • Enhancing biosecurity.

The plan commits the government to championing sustainable development, to lead in environmental science and to innovate to achieve clean growth and increase resource efficiency to provide benefits to both our environment and economy. In its ‘Using and Managing Land Sustainably’ policy area, it highlights flood risk and how new approaches can help to manage it. In addition to the planned range of flood risk management schemes being managed and developed by the Environment Agency it identifies three further approaches to help reduce future flood risks:

• Using more natural flood management solutions where appropriate. • Increasing the uptake of sustainable drainage systems, especially in new developments. • Improving the resilience of properties at risk of flooding and the time it takes them to recover should flooding occur.

The potential approaches to managing flood risk being considered at this stage of the Scheme’s development include natural flood management solutions and improving resilience. The draft SA objectives include all of the goals of relevance to the Scheme and through the SA process will ensure that the Scheme contributes positively to these goals.

3.4.9 Conservation 21: Natural England’s conservation strategy for the 21st Century (HM Government, 2016)

Conservation 21 sets out how Natural England will work to protect England’s nature and landscapes for people to enjoy and for the services they provide in support of Defra’s ambitions for the environment. The strategy is based on three guiding principles including creating resilient landscapes and seas, putting people at the heart of the environment and growing natural capital to order to achieve sustainable development. The strategy aims to “focus on a landscape scale, listening to people and taking them with us, and enhancing natural capital, we believe we can play our part in reversing the declines in biodiversity, and in 25 years, enjoy a healthier environment that delivers more for people and the economy” (p.10).

Baseline biodiversity conditions within the Study Area are described in Section 5.1 of this report, landscape is considered in Section 5.4. Protection and enhancement of biodiversity, landscapes and natural beauty are included in the SA objectives (See Section 6). The inclusion of these within the SA objectives will ensure that not only protection but enhancement of biodiversity and landscape is integrated into the development of the Scheme.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3.4.10 Biodiversity 2020: A strategy for England’s wildlife (Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs, 2011)

This strategy provides a comprehensive picture of how international commitments are being implemented. The strategy identifies potential impacts to biodiversity through climate change relating to environmental tragedies such as flooding. It sets out strategic direction for biodiversity policy for the next decade on land (including rivers and lakes) and sets out their mission which includes “to halt overall biodiversity loss, support healthy well- functioning ecosystems and establish coherent ecological networks, with more and better places for nature for the benefit of wildlife and people” (p.12).

Baseline biodiversity conditions within the Study Area are described in Section 5.1 of this report. Protection and enhancement of biodiversity is included in the SA objectives (See Section 6) and will be a central theme in the selection of alternative solutions to take forward.

3.4.11 Surface Water Management Action Plan (2018)

The surface water management action plan sets out the steps the government is taking, with the Environment Agency, and others, to manage the risk of surface water flooding i.e. when rainfall exceeds available drainage capacity. It covers a number of actions to both improve the understanding of the risks and strengthen delivery. These include:

• Improving risk assessment and communication by identifying the risks to people using the National Risk Assessment, better surface water risk mapping and data sharing, future surface water scenarios and better communication of storm forecasts. • Making sure infrastructure is resilient by ensuring those responsible for key infrastructure – water, transport, energy and telecommunications – guarantee their networks are resilient to surface water risks. • Clarifying responsibilities for surface water management to ensure effective surface water management at the right locations and in the right sectors. • Joining up planning for surface water management by ensuring those responsible for managing surface water (Lead Local Flood Authorities (LLFAs), water and sewerage companies, highways authorities and others) work together if they are to tackle the risks effectively. • Building local authority capacity of the LLFAs, who are in the key leadership role on surface water. It is essential that they have the right skills and resources to perform this role.

As noted in Section 1.1, although it is not one of the Scheme’s ambitions it is a key delivery aim to explore opportunities to work with others to reduce flood risk from surface water and drainage sewers. The SA objectives relating to flood risk will guide the Scheme development so as to contribute positively to the aims of this plan where possible.

3.4.12 National Flood Resilience Review (2016)

This review was undertaken in the aftermath of a series of significant and damaging flood events to determine whether existing approaches to identifying flood risk and solutions to manage it were still appropriate. In particular, the review considers the better management of rainfall in the natural environment. It argues that, as water is a precious resource that at many times and in many places is in increasingly short supply. There are obvious benefits to managing water in a way that reduces both flood risk and water stress, and that delivers wider environmental benefits, by slowing the flow of water from the land into our rivers and smoothing the flow of the rivers themselves.

The Government’s future 25 year plan for the environment will aim to achieve these effects by managing whole river catchments intelligently, developing sophisticated modelling to work out what can be done in each part of the catchment to minimise flooding.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

The holistic management of water to address both supply and flooding is a strategic issue for the Study Area, which suffers from both a shortage of water and flood events at different times of the year and in different locations. The need to reduce flood risk is an explicit objective of both the SA and the Scheme; furthermore the wider SA objectives, against which the alternative approaches to managing flood risk will be assessed, allow a more holistic approach to determining the most appropriate ‘whole river catchment’ solution.

3.4.13 Clean Air Strategy 2019 (HM Government, 2019)

This strategy is a key part of delivering the 25 Year Environment Plan. Air pollution has direct impacts on the natural environment and people’s health. Poor air quality is one of the greatest environmental risks to public health in the UK. Clean air will directly benefit biodiversity as well as creating a better environment for everyone to live, work and thrive in. The strategy commits to a new target for the reduction of damaging deposition of reactive forms of nitrogen and reviews what longer term targets should be to further tackle the environmental impacts of air pollution.

The baseline situation with respect to air quality in the Study Area is described in Section 5.6 of this report. In parts of the Study Area low air quality is an issue and by including an objective for clean air in the draft SA objectives this provides an opportunity for the Scheme to contribute positively to the aims of this strategy where possible.

3.4.14 Climate Change Risk Assessment 2017 (HM Government, 2017)

The UK Government is required under the 2008 Climate Change Act to publish a UK-wide Climate Change Risk Assessment every five years. The Act stipulates that the Government must assess “the risks for the United Kingdom from the current and predicted impacts of climate change ”. The priority risks in the 2017 Act include:

• Flooding and coastal change risks to communities, businesses and infrastructure. • Risks to health, well-being and productivity from high temperatures. • Risk of shortages in the public water supply, and for agriculture, energy generation and industry. • Risks to natural capital, including terrestrial, coastal, marine and freshwater ecosystems, soils and biodiversity. • Risks to domestic and international food production and trade. • New and emerging pests and diseases, and invasive non-native species, people, plants and animals.

The impacts of and adaptation to climate change are described in Section 5.7 of this report. The predicted increases in flood risk arising from climate change are a central consideration in the development of the Scheme. The draft SA objectives include an objective for adaptation and the alternative approaches being considered will be tested in terms of their performance against it. Impacts on the environment, economy, and society as a result of climate change are also a consideration in any assessment process and require an holistic approach to take them into account. Future anticipated trends are described in this report; these will be developed further in later stages of the Scheme and will consider future climate change impacts across the range of topics in more detail.

3.4.15 The UK Low Carbon Transition Plan (HM Government, 2009)

This White Paper sets out the UK’s transition plan for becoming a low carbon country by cutting emissions, maintaining secure energy supplies, maximising economic opportunities and protecting the most vulnerable. The five-point plan includes:

• Transforming the power sector. • Transforming homes and communities. • Transforming workplaces and jobs. • Transforming transport. • Transforming farming and managing land and waste sustainably.

Greenhouse gas emissions are considered in Section 5.7 of this report and reducing emissions is also an SA objective. The Scheme approaches will be tested against this objective and an understanding of the carbon and

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

other greenhouse gas emissions of each, and also of their ability to sequester (absorb) carbon, will be important in the assessment process.

3.4.16 UK Resources and Waste Strategy 2018

This strategy sets out how the UK will preserve its stock of material resources by minimising waste, promoting resource efficiency and moving towards a circular economy. Whilst at the same time minimising the damage caused to the natural environment by reducing and managing waste safely and carefully, and by tackling waste crime.

The key areas of focus within the strategy are as follows:

• Sustainable production: invoking ‘polluter pays’ principle, introducing a tax on plastic packaging; setting minimum requirements through eco-design; development of a Chemicals Strategy; and business ‘resource efficiency clusters’. • Helping consumers take more considered actions: incentives, better information, banning plastic products where alternatives exist; address barriers to reuse and remanufacturing. • Resource recovery and waste management: improve recycling rates; address barriers to use of secondary materials; implementation of waste hierarchy. • Tackling waste crime: reform of existing regulations, create a Joint Unit for Waste Crime; tougher penalties for crimes; increase awareness of regulations. • Cutting down on food waste: food redistribution; annual reporting of food surplus and waste; food surplus and waste targets; new food surplus and waste hierarchy.

Resources and waste are considered in Section 5.8 of this report. The importance of reducing resource use and minimising waste will be integrated into the development of the Scheme through the inclusion of these issues in the SA objectives.

3.5 Other Plans

3.5.1 Water Resources Management Plan 2020- 2100 (Thames Water, 2019)

There are several water supply companies serving different parts of the Study Area, however Thames Water is the largest of these and so its plan is focused upon within this report and used to provide an indication for the catchment. The Water Resources Management Plan (WRMP) sets out how Thames Water will provide a secure and sustainable water supply for their customers, whilst protecting the environment and ensuring economic growth. The challenges faced in achieving a sufficient water supply include a growing population, a changing climate, and an environment in need.

The Scheme will encourage protection of the existing and planned water supply for the Study Area and beyond. An SA objective for the protection of water resources is included and will guide development of the Scheme to ensure water resources are protected and enhanced where possible.

3.5.2 Eel Management Plan – Thames River Basin District (Defra, 2010)

This plan describes the current status of eel populations, assesses compliance with the targets for the return of adult eels to the sea to spawn and details management measures to increase this silver eel ‘escapement’. This will contribute to the recovery of the stock of European eel.

Baseline biodiversity conditions within the Study Area are described in Section 5.1 of this report. Protection and enhancement of biodiversity is included in the SA objectives (See Section 6). The maintenance of safe passage for migratory eels (or provision where none currently exists, and works are being undertaken to an in-water structure) is a regulatory requirement.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3.6 Selected Local Authority Plans

3.6.1 Introduction

The catchment for the Scheme covers the entire length of the River Thames upstream of London (specifically the tidal weir at Teddington) to its source in Gloucestershire, and all the rivers that flow into it and as such includes a variety of different County, Unitary and District, Borough and City authorities. The Study Area is also located partially within the Greater London Authority (GLA) administrative area. The GLA administrative area includes London Boroughs, each classed as a Unitary authority. However, the GLA itself also provides London-wide government and shares responsibility for certain services, including strategic planning.

As set out in Section 3.1, given the size of the Study Area and the strategic nature of the approaches currently being considered, only certain local authority plans have been used to inform the development of the SA objectives. These include the plans produced by: • Counties. • Unitary Authorities (excluding those within the GLA administrative area).

Those plans produced by the GLA, Unitary Authorities - London Boroughs and Districts, Boroughs and Cities have not been used to inform the development of the SA objectives at this stage. These objectives will be used to inform the SA when locally specific approaches are identified.

3.6.2 Local Authority Hierarchy

Within the Study Area, including the 5km buffer, the Counties and the GLA area are part of a two-tier approach to local government, with Districts, Boroughs and Cities below, whilst the Unitary Authorities are single-tier authority. For the purposes of this SA the local authorities within the Study Area will be referred to as follows: • Greater London Authority (GLA). • Counties – ‘Upper-Tier’ Authorities. • Unitaries (excluding London Boroughs) – ‘Single-Tier Authorities. • Unitaries (within the GLA area) - ‘Single-Tier London Borough Authorities’. • Districts, Boroughs and Cities – ‘Lower-Tier’ Authorities. These authorities are identified below and shown on Figures 3.1 and 3.2.

In some cases, the Study Area, including the 5km buffer, only partially falls within the identified authorities, for example Swindon Borough Council. Where this occurs, the authority is still identified as being located within the Study Area and their relevant plans will be considered in the assessment.

Furthermore, as the Study Area, including the 5km buffer, does not cover the full extent of a number of Counties then not all of the lower-tier Authorities within these will be in the Study Area. The excluded Authorities have been identified below.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 3.1: Upper-Tier and Single-Tier Authorities in the Study Area

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 3.2: Lower-Tier Authorities in the Study Area

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3.6.3 Authorities included in the Plans Review

Key objectives from a range of plans from the below local authorities are presented in Appendix B. As identified above due to the strategic nature of the Scheme those plans produced by the GLA, Unitary Authorities - London Boroughs and Districts, Boroughs and Cities have not been used to inform the development of the SA objectives at this stage. These objectives will be used to inform the SA when locally specific approaches are identified.

Furthermore, detailed policies have not been considered for the development of the SA objectives at this stage, again, due to the strategic nature of the Scheme. These policies will be considered in the next stage of the Scheme when locally specific approaches are identified. Upper-Tier Authorities

Counties located wholly, or partially, within the Study Area: • Gloucestershire County Council. • Hampshire County Council. • Hertfordshire County Council. • Oxfordshire County Council. • Surrey County Council. • West Sussex County Council. • Warwickshire County Council.

Single-Tier Authorities Unitaries (excluding London Boroughs) located wholly, or partially, within the Study Area: • Bracknell Forest Council. • Buckinghamshire Council. • Central Bedfordshire Council. • Luton Borough Council. • Reading Borough Council. • Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead Council. • Slough Borough Council. • Swindon Borough Council. • West Berkshire Council. • West Northamptonshire Council. • Wiltshire Council. • Wokingham Borough Council.

GLA As noted above, the plans for the GLA have not been considered for the development of the SA objectives at this stage due to the strategic nature of the Scheme, however the key objectives of their strategic London Plan (2021) are presented in Appendix B3. Detailed policies have not been considered at this stage of the Scheme; however these will be included at later stages of the SA when locally specific approaches are being considered. Single-Tier London Borough Authorities As noted above, the plans for the identified single-tier London Borough authorities have not been considered for the development of the SA objectives at this stage due to the strategic nature of the Scheme, however the key objectives of their plans are presented in Appendix B3. Detailed policies have not been considered at this stage of the Scheme, however these will be included at later stages of the SA when locally specific approaches are being considered. • Barnet London Borough Council. • Brent London Borough Council.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

• Croydon London Borough. • Ealing London Borough Council. • Enfield London Borough Council. • Harrow London Borough Council. • Hillingdon London Borough Council. • Hounslow London Borough Council. • Kingston Upon Thames London Borough Council. • Merton London Borough Council. • Richmond Upon Thames London Borough Council. • Sutton London Borough Council. • Wandsworth London Borough Council.

Lower-Tier Authorities As noted above, the plans for these Districts, Boroughs and City authorities have not been considered for the development of the SA objectives at this stage, however the key objectives of their plans are presented in Appendix B2. Detailed policies have not been considered at this stage of the Scheme, however and further details and policies from this plan these will be included at later stages of the SA when locally specific approaches are being considered. The list below identifies the Districts, Boroughs and Cities alongside their associated Counties where wholly, or partially, located within the Study Area (see Figure 3.2). • Gloucestershire County Council o Cheltenham Borough Council. o Stroud District Council. o Cotswold District Council. o Tewkesbury Borough Council • Hampshire County Council o Basingstoke and Deane District Council. o East Hampshire District Council. o Hart District Council. o Rushmoor Borough Council. o Test Valley District Council o Winchester City Council. • Hertfordshire County Council o Dacorum Borough Council. o East Herts District Council. o Hertsmere Borough Council. o North Herts District Council. o Saint Albans City and District Council. o Three Rivers District Council. o Watford Borough Council. o Welwyn Hatfield District Council. • Oxfordshire County Council o Cherwell District Council. o Oxford City Council. o South Oxfordshire District Council. o West Oxfordshire District Council. o Vale of White Horse District Council. • Surrey County Council o Elmbridge Borough Council. o Epsom and Ewell Borough Council. o Guildford Borough Council.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

o Mole Valley District Council. o Reigate and Banstead Borough Council. o Runnymede Borough Council. o Spelthorne Borough Council. o Tandridge District Council. o Surrey Heath Borough Council o Waverley Borough Council. o Woking Borough Council. • West Sussex County Council o Chichester District Council. o Crawley Borough Council. o Horsham District Council. o Mid Sussex District Council • Warwickshire County Council o Stratford-On-Avon District Council. Some Counties overlapping the Study Area include several Districts, Boroughs and Cities that themselves lie outside of the Study Area and therefore are not considered further, as follows: • Forest of Dean District Council, Gloucestershire. • Gloucester City Council, Gloucestershire. • New Forest District Council, Hampshire. • Havant Borough Council, Hampshire. • Gosport District Council, Hampshire. • Eastleigh District, Hampshire. • Fareham District Council, Hampshire. • Stevenage Borough Council, Hertfordshire. • Borough of Broxbourne Council, Hertfordshire. • North Warwickshire District and Borough Council, Warwickshire. • Nuneaton and Bedworth Borough Council, Warwickshire. • Rugby Borough Council, Warwickshire. • Warwick District Council, Warwickshire. • Adur District and Worthing Borough Council, West Sussex. • Arun District Council, West Sussex. • The remaining 19 London Boroughs not identified above.

3.7 Plans Considered in the Review

3.7.1 Local Development Plans

Legislation states planning decisions must be taken in line with the development plan unless material considerations indicate otherwise. Plans set out a vision and a framework for the future development of the area, addressing needs and opportunities in relation to housing, the economy, community facilities and infrastructure – as well as a basis for conserving and enhancing the natural and historic environment, mitigating and adapting to climate change, and achieving well designed places. Section 19(1B) - (1E) of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 sets out that each local planning authority must identify their strategic priorities and have policies to address these in their development plan documents. Due to the responsibilities of the local authorities and the services they provide only single-tier Authorities and lower-tier Authorities will produce Local Development Plans.

Furthermore, in some single-tier and lower-tier authority areas ‘emerging’ local plans are being developed. For the purposes of this Scoping Report and due to the scale of the Study Area, only those that are currently still adopted and used to assess development in the area will be considered. When locally specific approaches are identified, these emerging plans and their policies will be considered. 42

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

3.7.2 Flood Risk Management Strategies (FRMS)

An FRMS set out coordinated efforts to tackle flooding and set the direction of future flood risk management, helping to target investment and coordinate actions across public bodies. Each strategy explains what causes flooding in the area, the impacts flooding causes and outlines objectives to help manage flood risk. This information is used as a basis for better decision-making across flood risk management organisations. FRMS are produced by Single-Tier Authorities and Upper-Tier Authorities (Lower-Tier Authorities will use the FRMS produced by their County Council). The SA will establish objectives to manage flood risk using the information gathered from the flood risk management plans.

3.7.3 Waste and Minerals Plans and Allocations

Waste plans and minerals plans (usually prepared jointly) are considered ‘Development Plans’ as defined in Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004. They set out proposals and policies for Mineral Safeguarding Areas (MSAs), future waste or minerals development, and restoration of existing sites. The plans will allocate new minerals sites within the Study Area. They will also allocate existing gravel pits for filling with waste or restoration to agricultural or other uses. Waste and minerals plans and allocations are produced by Single-Tier Authorities and Upper-Tier Authorities. The SA will establish objectives to manage waste and minerals using the information gathered from these plans.

In addition, planning for waste and minerals for the London Borough Authorities is dealt with within their Local Development Plans with consideration of the London Plan 2021. Where relevant sites allocated for minerals development is outlined in Appendix B3 under the Local Development Plan review. London Boroughs have also prepared joint regional Waste Plans which are identified in Appendix B3.

Where the Minerals Planning Authorities only partially overlap the Study Area only those allocations within the Study Area will be applicable.

3.8 Other Plans of Relevance and Considered in the Review

3.8.1 Strategic Economic Plans (SEP)

Each SEP sets out current economic challenges faced by the local authority and the objectives to be adopted in ensuring the economy is growing strongly, creating jobs and delivering major economic opportunities for the future. The SA will consider the objectives set out within the SEP as relevant to the Study Area. The policies outlined in the SEP will help aid the objectives established in the SA to help consider more localised issues and growth requirements in later stages of the SA. The SEP relevant to the Study Area are included in Appendix B4.

3.9 Plans Not Considered in the Review

At this stage of the Scheme development and with the high-level nature of the SA objectives there are a number of plans and strategies which have not been outlined and considered in appendices B1-B4. These plans and strategies will however be considered, where applicable, in later stages when locally specific approaches are identified. These plans and strategies include:

• Local Transport Plans (LTP); • Biodiversity Action Plans (BAP); and • Climate Change Strategies.

3.10 Conclusion

As identified in this section and in accordance with the SEA Regulations a review of the necessary plans and programmes has been initiated, including a review of relevant regulations and legislation.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

As the Study Area is very large, covering the entire length of the River Thames upstream of London to its source in Gloucestershire and all the rivers that flow into it, not all plans and programmes identified above have shaped the SA objectives. Those which have include national plans, programmes and strategies, Environment Agency plans and policies, selected other plans and selected local authority plans (including those from the Upper-Tier Authorities and Single-Tier Authorities (excluding London Boroughs)). A focused approach will consider relevant local plans and policies when locally specific approaches are identified, to help shape the SA objectives further.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

4. Baseline Reporting – Social and Economic Factors

4.1 Population and Human Health

4.1.1 Introduction

The Scheme ambitions target reduced flood risk and establishment of regionally important public access (and habitat) so specifically related socio-economic factors are given the greatest emphasis, which would either be directly affected by the Scheme or have direct implications for the Scheme development.

There are also indirect effects of the Scheme. For example, reduced flood risk will also bring benefits around improved health and economy locally, and the SA will ensure that the approaches are targeting the areas where greatest improvements might be made, so again these aspects are given some emphasis.

Many other socio-economic considerations need to be considered as part of SA and SEA but largely to ensure that the Scheme does not have adverse impact on them (and ideally that the preferred approaches have the greatest overall positive contributions, but across all sustainability factors). This includes, for example, rural land use, critical infrastructure and the wider economy. These will therefore mostly be specific to each approach and its location and are given less consideration here. They will become more relevant in later stages.

4.1.2 Current Baseline

Population

The Study Area covers a wide area and therefore only baseline data for the Counties and Unitaries (excluding London Boroughs) has been considered here. The GLA area, along with its Unitary Authorities only slightly overlap the Study Area and as such has also not been included in the social and economic baseline. This is to avoid overstating population statistics. Baseline data will be updated when locally specific approaches are identified to represent local authorities where applicable, including districts, boroughs and cities.

Table C1.1 in Appendix C1 shows the population within the Study Area using 2019 Mid-year Population Estimates (Office for National Statistics (ONS), 2020) and 2011 Census Data for the Percentage Urban and Rural Population (ONS, 2011). Table C1.1 in Appendix C1 shows that the Study Area has a mixture of people living in rural and urban areas, however mainly urban. The highest population total for the County Authorities is Hampshire County Council, whilst the lowest is Warwickshire County Council (ONS, 2020). The highest population total for the Unitary authorities (excluding London Boroughs) is Buckinghamshire whilst the lowest is Bracknell Forest (ONS, 2020).

Equality

Equalities effects must be considered in appraisal by governmental and departmental public bodies, as required by the Public Sector Equality Duty. This obligation was created under the Equality Act 2010. It requires public sector bodies to “have due regard to advancing equality.” Consideration of equality issues must influence the decisions reached by public bodies. Decision makers should therefore be informed of the potential effects of intervention on groups or individuals with characteristics identified by the Act. The Public Sector Equality Duty covers protected characteristics as follows: age, disability, gender reassignment, pregnancy and maternity, race, religion or belief, sex and sexual orientation.

Of particular importance to the Scheme are age, disability and ethnicity (in particular language) as these have material implications for the approaches taken to flood risk management. In addition, social deprivation is also considered as this may also affect people’s ability to respond to, and engage with, flood risk management measures and initiatives.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Age

The 2019 ONS data was also reviewed to determine demography within the Study Area. Table C1.3 in Appendix C1 shows that age distribution is broadly similar across the local authorities, although Slough and Reading are shown to have a younger population in comparison to the rest of the authorities (ONS, 2020). However, across the authority’s average percentage demography of persons under 19 is 24%, persons between 19-44 is 32%, persons between 45-69 is 31% and persons 70 is 13%, respectively.

In 2019, the region in England with the highest population was the South East, with approximately 9.18 million, higher than that of London which had an approximate population of 8.96 million in 2019. The South West region held the fourth lowest population (5.62 million) out of the nine regions in England (Statista, Population of England in 2019, by region).

It is important to note that the Study Area only partially overlaps the South West and South East Regions and therefore the statistics and statements can only be considered indicative of possible baseline conditions for the Scheme.

Ethnicity

Across the whole Study area, the vast majority of usual residents classify themselves as being White (91%) (ONS 2011 Census). See Table C1.2 in Appendix C1. The largest proportion of ethnic minorities in the Study Area are Asian/Asian British at 5%. This pattern is largely repeated at county or unitary authority level with one notable exception: Slough is 46% White; 40% Asian/Asian British; and 9% Black/Caribbean/Black British. Reading has the next lowest level of residents classifying themselves as White at 75%; Asian/Asian British are 14% and 7% are Black/Caribbean/Black British. Wiltshire has the highest White population at 97%.

Disability

Across the whole Study Area, the vast majority of usual residents classify themselves as ‘not limited’ in carrying out day-to-day activities. See Appendix C.1 Table C1.7. The highest percentage of those who consider themselves with health problems and ‘limited a lot‘ in carrying out day-to-day activities are located within West Sussex (6.9%) (highest County authority) and Luton Borough Council (6.6%) (highest Unitary authority). The lowest percentage of those who consider themselves with health problems and ‘limited a lot ‘on carrying out day-to-day activities are located within Oxfordshire and Surrey (5.4%) (lowest County authorities) and Wokingham (4.2%) (lowest Unitary authority).

Social deprivation

Indices of Deprivation (IoD) is the official measure of deprivation in England and is a useful measure to help identify aspects of deprivation and social vulnerability in local areas (Ministry of Housing, Communities & Local Government, 2019). The IoD 2019 consists of seven individual themes, or domains (with weightings in brackets):

• Income (22.5%). • Employment (22.5%). • Health Deprivation and Disability (13.5%). • Education (13.5%). • Skills and Training (13.5%). • Crime (9.3%). • Barriers to Housing and Services (9.3%). • Living Environment (9.3%).

All neighbourhoods in England are ranked according to their level of deprivation relative to that of other areas. Analysis across individual domains help to better understand local level performance; however, the Indices of Multiple Deprivation (IMD) (all seven domains/themes) is considered a good measure to represent an overarching opinion of a particular area. IMD combines measures from the seven IoD themes resulting in an overall measure 46

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

of Deprivation. Figure 4.1 presents the IMD map of the Study Area, where IMD decile 1 is the most deprived and IMD decile 10 is the least deprived across the seven domains.

Figure 4.1: Index of Multiple Deprivation across the Study Area

Figure 4.1 shows that the level of deprivation across the Study Area is generally low. Most of the lower layer super output areas are in decile 6 or higher. The most deprived areas (decile 1) are located within the urban areas of the Study Area particularly in Reading, Oxford, Swindon and Slough.

Health

General Health

The 2011 ONS data was also reviewed to determine general health within the Study Area. A high proportion of residents in the Study Area report having ‘Very Good Health’ of ‘Good’ health (84%) (See Table C1.6 in Appendix C1). Surrey County Council has recorded the highest percentage of their population to be in Very Good Health (52%) compared to the other authorities identified in the Study Area. Luton Borough Council has the highest recorded percentage of the population to be considered to have ‘Very Bad Health’ (1.2%).

Life Expectancy was also reviewed to determine the average age that people are expected to live too. Using ONS data (2017-2019) the average life expectancy age for males in the whole Study Area is 81 years old and for females 82. The highest life expectancy age for males is 81 for Bracknell Forest, Buckinghamshire, Hampshire, Oxfordshire, Central Bedfordshire, West Berkshire and the Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead. For females the highest life expectancy age is 85 for Bracknell Forest, Buckinghamshire, Surrey, West Berkshire and Wokingham. The lowest life expectancy age for males is 79 for Luton and for females is 82 for Reading, Slough, Luton and Northamptonshire.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Impacts of COVID-19 on health within the Study Area are not yet known; further details may be available at later stages of the Scheme development. For this stage, health impacts are not considered; however the economic impacts of the pandemic are highlighted in Section 4.3, to set the context within which the Scheme is being developed.

Flood Risk and Health

Living with flooding, and the fear of flooding, can cause adverse health effects in the short and long-term. In addition to the risk to life, physical injuries and restriction to health services, recent studies by the Public Health England (PHE) noted impacts of flooding and flood related disruption on mental health and wellbeing (PHE, 2017). This includes high levels of probable depression, anxiety, and Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) amongst those who had floodwater in their homes. It also identified elevated stress levels in those whose homes were not flooded but whose lives were otherwise disrupted. Amongst those whose homes were flooded several factors, which may reflect severity of flooding, were associated with a higher risk of poor mental health outcomes including the following:

• Presence and depth of floodwater. • Evacuation and length of evacuation (i.e. less than or more than 24 hours). • Disruption to or loss of vital services (such as utilities and social care and health services).

In the 2014 flood event approximately 1,000 homes on the River Thames were evacuated, with thousands more at risk from flooding. Over 350 rescues from floodwater were required during this event. An evacuee centre was set up in Thorpe Park theme park, Chertsey, to help accommodate those who could not return to their homes.

4.1.3 Future Trends

Population

The ONS predicts a population increase in the UK by 3.0 million (4.5%) from a previous estimated 66.4 million in 2018 to 69.4 million in 2028, with growth a result from more births than deaths. The UK population is projected to pass 70 million by 2031 (ONS, 2019).

Table C1.4 in Appendix C1 outlines the predicted population growth from 2019 to 2030 for the authorities covered in the Current Baseline sections above. Table C1.5 in Appendix C1 shows that Warwickshire County Council has the highest increase in population (9.0%) and West Berkshire Council has the lowest (0.4%).

ONS (2020) predicts a rise of up to 21% in households in the Study Area to the year 2028. The predictions vary across the Study Area, with the more northerly authorities being predicted to have greater increases than those to the south of the Study Area. Table C1.4 in Appendix C1 outlines the predicted household data changes from 2018 to 2028 for the authorities within the Study Area.

A Parliamentary Briefing (January 2021) estimates that new homes are required across England at a rate of 345,000 per year to meet current and predicted future demand. There are a number of approaches to addressing this need, including building more homes in the right place and at a faster pace than currently, increasing affordability, speeding up the planning process and considering how to deliver the necessary infrastructure to support additional homes.

Equality

Although persons 70 and over are within the lowest percentage of the demography of the Study Area, it is this group that is also considered to have the highest predicted growth rate compared to other age ranges across the whole of the United Kingdom (See Table 4.1).

According to the Government Office for Science and the Foresight Project publication ‘The Future of an Ageing Population’, by 2040, nearly one in seven people is projected to be aged over 75 (ONS, 2019). This population

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

growth rate is a result of two long-term trends: falling fertility and mortality rates. Historically both factors have driven life expectancy, however the dominant factor is now considered to be long-term falling mortality rates and this trend is expected to continue.

Of note, the ONS (Subnational population projections, supplementary analysis) reports the South West region as having the highest proportion of people age 65+ (21.1%) and also predicts the South West region to have the highest proportion of people age 65+ (23.8%) in the whole of England by 2024. The South East is also reported as above the average proportion of people age 65+ in England in 2014 and 2024, 18.6% and 21%, respectively.

Table 4.1: UK Population projections (% growth rate of change between years is based on ONS 2018-based population projection predictions) (ONS, 2019)

Age Range 2021 2026 2031

19 and under 1% 2% 0%

20-44 1% 1% 2%

45-69 1% 3% 4%

70 and over 6% 13% 21%

All ages 2% 4% 5%

An analysis of future trends in the percentages and distribution of ethnic minorities within the Study Area are not presented at a national level. If existing trends continue, however, it is likely that the more urban areas and communities will continue to attract ethnic minorities, especially where those communities already exist. Increases in these populations are likely to grow in line with general population growth trends. The spatial correlation between social deprivation and levels of ethnic minorities in the Study Area is also an important consideration; as the areas with higher ethnic minorities close to London become more expensive this may lead to a movement of people from such communities to areas within the Study Area.

Disabilities

An analysis of future trends in the percentages and distribution of disabilities within the Study Area are not presented. If existing trends continue, however, with persons over 70 having the highest predicted growth rate, this could potentially mean that those who will class themselves as having ‘poor health’ and a disability may increase as older age is also correlated with increased health conditions.

Social deprivation

Existing conditions in the Study Area show a low level of unemployment (see Section 4.3) and a relatively low level of deprivation considering other types of indicators. The Institute for Fiscal Studies (IFS) (2017) looked at poverty in relation to income and the South East of England has the lowest rate of relative and absolute poverty in the UK currently and that is predicted to remain the case; relative poverty rates are predicted to rise in this region as in all parts of the UK, however absolute poverty rates are predicted to fall. Relative poverty rates compare income to the UK median; the absolute poverty line is where incomes are less than 60% of median income.

The fall in employment rates and, in some cases income for those still in work, across the UK because of the COVID- 19 pandemic is likely to have a knock-on impact on poverty rates. However, the fact that most employment in the Study Area is in the health sector and technology may reduce the impacts of this and the indirect effects on poverty and health.

Health

General health in the population within the Study Area is currently good or very good for most; this does not seem to change in areas of higher ethnic minorities, ageing populations, or deprivation. There is no evidence to suggest this will change in the future.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Today, the national flood forecasting, warning and informing arrangements coupled with digital capabilities are at their highest level ever. When the Environment Agency responds to flooding, it work in partnership with local authorities, the fire service, police, army and water companies providing a joined-up response using the combined knowledge and expertise of all partners.

4.1.4 Strategic Issues

Key considerations for the SA from this analysis of the population and health baseline is that the Study Area is largely rural but has some significant urban and semi-urban areas within it and its proximity to London means that population and property number increases are likely to be closer to those of London than elsewhere in the UK. Population and property numbers will be a critical concern in the SA; when combined with the effects on health from flood risk and the impacts on the economy from flooding as a result of impacts on property (see Section 4.4) these projections have significant implications for the Scheme.

The predicted increases in households will be reflected in an increased need for more housing, especially in the north of the Study Area where household numbers could increase by up to 21%. Local planning authorities allocate land for housing (see Section 4.6) and this could have implications for the potential approaches being considered for the Scheme. Specific allocated sites will be considered in the SA as the Scheme progresses to future stages and there are location-specific approaches to consider.

The trend in the population getting older has some implications for the Scheme and in particular in relation to flood risk and health and will be taken into account in considerations of impacts on health in the SA.

The potential for increased numbers of ethnic minorities within the Study Area will be taken into account in consideration of alternatives for the Scheme. Different approaches are sometimes needed for communities of different culture and languages as some populations may be harder to reach in terms of communications.

Social deprivation is not a significant issue generally in the Study Area but there are pockets of deprived areas which may currently be suffering unequally in terms of flood risk. In addition, deprived communities may be less resilient to flooding and harder to reach in terms of communications. The impacts on, and benefits to, deprived communities will be considered in the SA.

Health inequalities is an important issue across the UK, however at the Study Area level these do not appear to be an issue.

Many communities continue to remain at risk of flooding and vulnerable to the impacts of climate change. However, by planning now for the future, the Scheme is adopting a catchment-wide approach to mitigate the increasing flood risk that climate change will bring.

4.2 Access and Recreation

4.2.1 Current Baseline Overview

There are close links between access to community infrastructure, greenspaces, heritage assets, historic landscapes and local economic growth, community cohesion, leisure and recreation. The emphasis is on areas associated with rivers and floodplains as this is where the Scheme could have the greatest influence. It is in this context that this section discusses various access and recreation aspects in the Study Area. Recreation and access to its many forms is an important factor in attracting tourism visitors to an area. Section 4.3 provides further details on the tourism economy of the Study Area.

The Study Area is considered to be one of great natural beauty and significant royal history. The Natural England profile for the Thames Valley National Character Area (NCA), for example, describes how the River Thames provides a unifying feature through a very diverse landscape of urban and suburban settlements, infrastructure

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

networks, fragmented agricultural land, historic parks, commons, woodland, reservoirs and extensive minerals workings (Natural England, 2012). Further details on NCAs within the Study Area are provided in Section 5.4.

Access

There is a vast network of Public Rights of Way across the Study Area and all of the Upper-Tier and Unitary authorities have PRoW Management Plans in place to ensure their continued accessibility, maintenance and improvement where necessary. Recreational Facilities - General

There are many recreational facilities and destinations within the Study Area such as nature reserves, country parks, millennium greens, national trails and rural villages where outdoor pursuits regularly take place, such as walking, cycling, bird-watching, horse-riding, boating and angling. There are also various museums, theatres, galleries, other historic buildings, aquarium, and holiday parks within the Study Area. The Study Area is large and diverse and offers a variety of recreation opportunities both locally and nationally and including the Thames Valley itself, which is an attraction to visitors for its natural beauty, water-based recreation and walking routes (see Figure 4.2).

Given the focus of the SA with respect to the Scheme development, outdoor recreational areas have been specifically identified in this baseline as these are most likely to be affected by it. (with key features shown on Figure 4.2):

• National Trails: o Thames Path National Trail, which is 344km in length, and travels from its source in Cotswold to the centre of London; o Ridgeway National Trail, which is 139km in length and starts in Overton Hill in Avebury and ends in Ivinghoe Beacon; o North Downs Way National Trail, which is 256km in length and travels from Farnham to Dover on the English coast; and o Cotswold Way National Trail, which is 164km in length, skirts the north-western boundary of the Study Area following the Cotswold Escarpment around Cheltenham.

• World Heritage Sites: o World Heritage Site Blenheim Palace; and o World Heritage Site Avebury. • Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB): o Chilterns AONB; o North Wessex Downs AONB; o Cotswolds AONB; o Surrey Hills AONB; and o High Weald AONB.

• Nature Reserves, Parks, Gardens and Other Recreation Facilities: o Beale Wildlife Park; o Langley Country Park o Windsor Castle; o Frogmore House; o The Royal Windsor Racecourse; o Cotswolds Water Park; o Farnham Heath Reserve; o Wildlife reserves (e.g. County Wildlife Trusts, RSPB); o Woodland Trust sites and other woodland initiatives and organisations; and

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

o National Trust properties.

Figure 4.2: Key recreational features

In terms of recreational activities (as opposed to destinations) there is a variety across the Study Area. Boating and rowing on the Thames in some stretches is especially significant and the River Thames is a well-known coarse fishery. Buckinghamshire, Oxfordshire and Surrey are most notably known for the coarse fishery amenity value with West Berkshire known for its trout fishing on the Kennet and Lambourn. Navigation

Powered recreational navigation is continuous on the River Thames from its tidal limit upriver to Lechlade. The water pounding system of locks and weirs is fundamental to safe navigation. The other navigable rivers in the Study Area are the Wey and the Kennet (Kennet and Avon Canal).

There are also disused canal sections associated with some of the rivers, but for which there are plans or aspirations to restore navigation. These include the Thames and Severn Canal (Cotswold Canals Trust) linked to the upper Thames, and the Wey and Arun Junction Canal (Wey and Arun Canal Trust) along Cranleigh Waters.

4.2.2 Future Trends

The current trend of more people accessing greenspaces to exercise during lockdown is likely to continue as future national and regional guidance on managing COVID-19 risks evolves. Additionally, the increased purchase and use of bikes, and increased local recreational walking that occurred during the COVD pandemic mean that more people now have knowledge of what is ‘on their doorstep’ and are more likely to continue visiting these areas.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

The potential for increases in domestic tourism (see Section 4.3) as a result of the pandemic will likely see increased pressure on access and recreational resources in the Study Area, especially in pre-existing tourist areas such as the Cotswolds and the Chilterns.

4.2.3 Strategic Issues

The key issues for Access and Recreation with respect to the Scheme relate to the need to ensure there is no impact or loss of any recreational resource; with increased pressures from other variables, such as increased visitor numbers as populations increase and domestic tourism becomes more popular the impacts would be felt more keenly. There is potential to enhance recreational resources in the Study Area, including the potential for a regional recreational asset to be provided in partnership as part of the Scheme. These considerations will form part of the SA. Areas under consideration for this might also house sensitive environmental features, such as nature conservation sites which will need to be taken account of. The SA process will help with this. Current networks of footpaths, bridleways and trails already connect many important recreational destinations. Access to these will need to be maintained or enhanced.

Green and Blue Infrastructure in the Study Area is introduced in Section 5.4 Landscape and Visual Amenity. This will become a more significant part of the SA as the Scheme develops as it has significant potential, ranging from leisure, nature-watching to flood management. SA objectives relating to this will ensure it is integrated into the Scheme as it is developed. Access to open space for leisure and exercise is important for people’s health and wellbeing. Section 4.1 includes information on the baseline and strategic issues for health in the Study Area. People’s health and life expectancy within the Study Area is generally good. Continued access to open spaces supports the continuation of that trend.

At later stages of the Scheme development, when more locally specific solutions are being considered, equality of access to open spaces will also be reviewed. This will also feed into wider work on equalities as the SA and Scheme progress through later stages.

4.3 Economic Activity

4.3.1 Current Baseline

Key Economic Sectors

The Government identifies key economic sectors under the following categories:

• Primary: Raw Materials. • Secondary: Finished Goods. • Tertiary: Services. • Quaternary: Education, Public Sector and Research and Development. (Department for Business Innovation and Skills, 2012)

The key economic sector in the Study Area is the tertiary sector (including repair of motor vehicles and motorcycles) for all counties and local authorities; excluding Oxfordshire, where education, which falls under the quaternary sector is the key economic sector. A number of other economic sectors are considered to be particularly important within the Study Area as seen in Appendix C.

Employment

Employment figures for the Study Area have been reviewed for the Upper-Tier authorities (See Section 3.6 for more details on these). Specifically, employment rate and employment by industry have been reviewed.

Employment rates vary across the authorities; however, in all areas more than 78% of the working age population is in employment. Table C2.1 in Appendix C2 shows the highest rate of employment is located in Bracknell Forest

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

(84.1%), and the lowest is in Wiltshire (78.8%). All areas are also greater than the total employment percent in Great Britain (75.8%) (ONS, 2019b).

Unemployment largely ranges between 1.1% and 3.7% across the Study Area, which is a lower unemployment level than the average for Great Britain (4%). Hertfordshire is the only authority to have a higher than the GB average unemployment rate at 5%.

Table C2.2 and C2.3 in Appendix C2 shows the breakdown of employment across the broad industry sectors for each authority. The top five or six industries in each authority were reviewed and a few common patterns emerged. Professional, scientific, and technical services are in the top five for almost all authorities, as is retail. Education and health are the next most popular across all authorities. Other industries such as information and communication, accommodation and food services and manufacturing were in the top five or six of several authorities.

In contrast, and even though the vast majority of land use in the Study Area is agricultural (see Section 4.5), none of the authorities had agriculture, forestry and fishing in their top five or six. In fact employment in this industry accounted for less than 1% of all employment in all authorities except Wiltshire, where it was 1.4%.

Agriculture and the Rural Economy

Whilst not a key economic sector across the whole Study Area, land use in the Study Area is so dominated by agricultural land (See section 4.5) it was considered prudent to provide a focus on that in this report. Agriculture is likely to be the most significant contributor to the rural economy (although other sectors such as Tourism are also important).

Defra aggregate agricultural accounts for the South West and South East (including London) regions were reviewed to get an indication of the state of the agricultural economy in the Study Area. Total Income from Farming (TIFF) for England was £3,995 million in 2019 (Defra, 2019). This was an increase of £534 million (15%) compared with 2018. The South West and the South East contributed 3 rd (16%) and 4 th (13%) highest TIFF for England, respectively.

The key drivers of agricultural income include the volume of production, commodity prices and the cost of inputs. In 2019, predominant farm types were crop production and livestock in both regions. This reflects the predominant land uses in the Study Area, arable and pasture. Notably, the South East region is the highest production market for fruit in England. The South West region holds the highest production market for vegetables and horticultural products (specifically plants and flowers) and livestock in England.

Tourism

Tourism is not the biggest employer or contributor to the local economy within the Study Area, however it has been identified as being particularly relevant to the Scheme; the nature of the approaches set out in Section 1.3 means they are more likely to impact, or benefit, tourism compared to other economic sectors. Agriculture is also an important sector in terms of potential impacts upon it; this is addressed in Section 4.5.

In addition to individual tourism attractions and destinations (see Section 4.2) there are large areas of the Study Area which are tourism ‘hotspots’ most summers: the Cotswolds, Oxford and the Chilterns. In 2015 tourism in the Cotswolds, for example, attracted £328,794,000 visitor spend; and employed approximately 6,585 people which accounts for 15% of employment in the area (Cotswold District Council, 2015). In Oxfordshire, a similar study in 2019 valued tourism at £2.5billion (Experience Oxfordshire, 2019).

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

4.3.2 Future Trends

Employment

In September 2020, the Institute for Chartered Accountants England & Wales (ICAEW) (2020) published statistics from Oxford economic on employment prospects across the UK by sector and region.

The sectoral analysis showed a growth (year on year) in sectors such as human health (the largest); public administration; electricity gas; and professional, scientific and technical (although very small for the latter). A decline is observed for manufacturing; construction; accommodation; and the arts and entertainment sector (the largest decline). These figures are significantly impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic, hence ‘social consumption’ sectors have seen large declines in demand. As set out in Section 4.2, the Study Area has a number of significant tourism areas and venues and these will have been impacted. The suggested future trends in tourism may allow some of the losses to be recovered and employment in these sectors to resume.

It is predicted that most businesses will continue to operate below capacity for a long period of time. The losses from 2020/2021 are likely to be reflected in a need to cut costs in the short to medium term in the industries which have declined.

For the ‘prospering’ sectors, there will be a reduction in employment in areas such as health as demand for those services begins to reduce back to more ‘normal’ levels, however the prediction is for in the medium term the health and office-based sectors will see strong gains. This is important in the Study Area as the largest employment category is the health sector.

The Oxford-Cambridge Arc also identifies the ability for the government to create thousands of jobs and drive investment in the area. It currently supports over two million jobs, adds over £110 billion to the economy every year and houses one of the fastest growing economies in England. The results from this plan, due to be published in 2022 will be taken into consideration if the Scheme is still in development at that time.

Agriculture and the Rural Economy

In the South East, 2019 saw the highest total income from farming since 2011, steadily climbing since 2016 which saw a significant low. Conversely the situation in the South West is more changeable, 2016 also saw a significant low, but the years post 2016 have increased since then but not steadily. In 2019 the TIFF (per ha GBP) in the South East (469) was above the England average (438), while the South West was below (360) (Defra, 2019). It is important to note, total agricultural income is a volatile trend which fluctuates due to a number of different factors including weather, exchange rates, commodity stock etc.

If these trends continue, considering the large swathes of agricultural land in the Study Area, agriculture could become even more important to the rural economy. In England generally agricultural land use has been shrinking (see Section 4.5.3) and is predicted to decline further as a result of housing needs, and change of uses for natural capital.

Tourism

Visit England published a report in 2017 which looked at future trends in tourism. It considered a variety of factors which can impact upon tourism such as economic turbulence, globalisation, connectivity (geographical proximity), uncertainty and demographics.

The report considers tourism at a variety of stages of the process of a person thinking about, booking, and taking their holiday. For immediate travel, consideration in the future will need to be given to social networks, people ‘maximising behaviour’ i.e. getting as much experience for as little cost as possible; and the need for travellers to reduce or remove risk. The latter is particularly relevant currently; the need to build flexibility into travelling without onerous additional costs to the consumer is likely to be an important for the travel industry to minimise concerns. This applies to local holidays in England as much as to international destinations.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Climate change and the uncertainty arising from the COVID pandemic may also be contributing factors to changes in tourism as they could change the attractiveness and accessibility of alternative overseas destinations and could lead to an increase in home-country tourism. There are a large number of ‘holiday homes’ in the Study Area, in particular in the Cotswolds, and these will become increasingly important assets for personal use and rental. Rural pursuits, such as fishing and outdoor activities in the Study Area are likely to become more popular also.

4.3.3 Strategic Issues

The most significant employment sectors in the Study Area include some likely to have gained and others likely to have lost during the COVID-19 pandemic; many people will have benefited from continued full employment in professional and scientific services, and perhaps gained new employment in the health and pharmaceutical services; in contrast employment associated with accommodation and food services, which has historically employed close to 10% of people across the Study Area, will have suffered losses, some of which may be permanent where businesses have closed down or staff moved into other sectors.

Agriculture is not a significant employer by number of people in the Study Area and does not contribute greatly to the total local economy. However, it is a critical employer at a local level and growing food locally, rather than needing to import from elsewhere has a number of sustainability benefits as well as contributing to national food security. The SA includes an objective to protect the rural economy. The importance of agriculture to the rural economy will be considered as part of the SA, as part of a wider objective to support the rural economy.

The SA will take into consideration the need to protect tourism and other ‘social consumption’ sectors to support their economic recovery. An eventual increase in tourism in the area because of increased populations and increased domestic tourism will also be taken into account.

4.4 Flooding and the Economy

4.4.1 Current Baseline

The Flood and Coastal Erosion Management and Research Programme is a collaborative programme including the Environment Agency, the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs, the Welsh Government and Natural Resources Wales.

It is currently undertaking research to ‘Count the Cost of Flooding’. Estimates based on earlier research in 2007, 2013/14 and 2015/16 following major flood events put the cost of the 2015/16 at approximately £1.6 billion to the economy. Flooding in 2019/20 was estimated to cost £78 million and would have been £2.1 billion without the flood defences which were in place.

The large events are easier to calculate in terms of cost than smaller, more frequent events known as ‘nuisance flooding’. The new research will include for these events also.

According to the Association of British Insurers (ABI Online news article March 2020) insurance pay outs to help customers recover from flooding associated with Storms Ciara and Dennis are likely to be greater than £214 million. This includes claims from 3,350 domestic properties with an average cost of repair at £32,000; claims from 1500 commercial properties amounting to £85 million; and 3,500 motor claims totalling £11 million. These figures are UK wide, however a number of locations within the Study Area experienced flooding during these storm events, as is described in Section 4.1 and it is reasonable to assume a large number of claims were made for damage to property and living away from home.

In addition to the cost of repairs, the government statistics consider the damage to the wider economy in terms of disruption to trade, employment centres and community facilities.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

4.4.2 Future Trends

Under all climate change scenarios (see Section 5.7) it is predicted that storm events will become more frequent and severe, flood events will also become more frequent and severe as rainfall increases at certain times of the year.

Population projections for the Study Area and the predictions of growth in the number of properties, particularly in more urban areas, mean that impacts on the economy will increase. This may even affect the viability of some town centres.

4.4.3 Strategic Issues

The potential for increased impacts from flooding on the economy under future population and climate projections will be an important consideration in the SA.

4.5 Land Use and the Economy

4.5.1 Land Use Classification

Corine land use classification data from 2018 has been used to determine the pattern of land use across the Study Area. Land use is classified to three levels of detail, and the level of land use across the Study Area at each level is shown in Tables 4.2 to 4.4.

Table 4.2: Level 1 Land Use in the Study Area

Level 1 Code Land Use Area (Hectares) % Land Use

1 Artificial Surfaces 312903 3.60

2 Agricultural areas 8226763 94.78

3 Forest and semi-natural areas 132583 1.53

4 Wetlands 218 0.00

5 Water bodies 7501 0.09

Total 8679968 100.00

Table 4.2 indicates the characterisation of Level 1, general, land use, and shows that in the Study Area the vast majority (almost 95%) is classified as agricultural. Of the remaining 5%, most (3.6%) is classified as artificial. Further details on these uses are provided in Tables 4.3 and 4.4.

Table 4.3: Level 2 Land Use in the Study Area

Level 2 Code Land Use Area_Ha % Land Use

11 Urban fabric 224541 2.59

12 Industrial, commercial and transport units 26996 0.31

13 Mine, dump and construction sites 5260 0.06

14 Artificial, non-agricultural vegetated areas 56106 0.65

21 Arable land 7623905 87.83

22 Permanent crops 583 0.01

23 Pastures 594699 6.85

24 Heterogenous agricultural areas 7576 0.09

31 Forests 122540 1.41

32 Scrub and/or herbaceous vegetation and associations 9990 0.12

33 Open spaces with little or no vegetation 53 0.00

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Level 2 Code Land Use Area_Ha % Land Use

41 Inland wetland 218 0.00

51 Inland waters 7501 0.09

Total 8679968 100.00

Table 4.3, a slightly more detailed analysis of land use in the Study Area, shows that within agricultural land use, arable land is the largest component and accounts for approximately 88% of all land use with pasture the next highest at approximately 7%. ‘Urban fabric’ dominates the artificial land use but still only accounts for approximately 2.5% of the Study Area.

Table 4.4: Level 3 Land Use in the Study Area

Level 3 Code Land Use Area_Ha % Land Use

111 Continuous Urban Fabric 2729 0.03

112 Discontinuous Urban Fabric 221812 2.56

121 Industrial or Commercial Units 18347 0.21

122 Road and rail networks and associated land 1501 0.02

123 Port areas 80 0.00

124 Airports 7068 0.08

131 Mineral extraction sites 3174 0.04

132 Dump sites 588 0.01

133 Construction sites 1498 0.02

141 Green urban areas 9769 0.11

142 Sport and leisure facilities 46337 0.53

211 Non-irrigated arable land 7623905 87.83

222 Fruit trees and berry plantations 583 0.01

231 Pastures 594699 6.85

242 Complex cultivation patterns 519 0.01

243 Land principally occupied by agriculture 7057 0.08

311 Broad-leaved forest 76356 0.88

312 Coniferous forest 15923 0.18

313 Mixed forest 30260 0.35

321 Natural grasslands 2022 0.02

322 Moors and heathland 6801 0.08

324 Transitional woodland scrub 1168 0.01

333 Sparsely vegetated areas 53 0.00

411 Inland marshes 192 0.00

412 Peat bogs 26 0.00

512 Water bodies 7501 0.09

Total 8679968 100.00

Table 4.4 provides the most detailed level of land use classification. The arable land within the Study Area is all classed as ‘non- irrigated arable land’. Pastures are not separated into any sub-classifications at Level 3 so remains the same. In terms of the urban fabric, this is dominated by ‘discontinuous urban fabric’, which within the Study Area would most commonly include edge of town or village areas; more densely populated urban centres such as Reading or Oxford would be ‘continuous urban fabric’ (only 0.03% of the total Study Area).

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

The pattern of land use within the Study Area indicates that agricultural land use is the most significant for consideration within the SA. A more detailed assessment of agricultural land and the associated rural economy is therefore included within this section.

The analysis of land use also helps to provide further details on the issues and opportunities across the Study Area and these are picked up further in the sections which deal with these specifically: Minerals extraction is considered in Section 4.6 and 5.8; transport corridors and hubs are described in Section 4.6; access and recreation is covered in Section 4.2; and natural areas are covered in Section 5 sub-sections on the relevant environmental topics.

4.5.2 Agricultural Land use

As is clear from the Corine data, the Study Area contains a significant amount of agricultural classified lands. They are of varying grades as shown on Figure 4.3.

Figure 4.3: Agricultural land

Agricultural Land Classification (ALC) Grade 3 farmland is the most prominent grade for all county and local authorities in the Study Area, Grade 3 reflects good to moderate quality land (See Table 4.5).

Table 4.5: ALC Grades across the Study Area

ALC Grade %

Grade 1 0.66

Grade 2 13.49

Grade 3 68.40

Grade 4 17.09

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

ALC Grade %

Grade 5 0.36

Total 100.00

Table C2.3 of Appendix C2 shows how this is broken down across Upper-Tier authorities (see Section 3.6 for details of these) in the Study Area. Wiltshire has the greatest amount of good to moderate, very good or excellent agricultural land (90.1%), closely followed by Gloucestershire (87.9%). Bracknell Forest has the least amount of Grade 3 agricultural land or above (20.9%) and has the largest amount of non-agricultural land (37.8%) and urban land (23.6%).

4.5.3 Future Trends

Research by Savills (2019) cites a decline in agricultural land in the UK of approximately 26,000ha per year over the past 20 years. Reasons for this include transport infrastructure, building, woodland expansion, non-agricultural use (golf courses, minerals) and some has been lost to the sea. The research predicts that by 2050, agricultural production area could shrink by 30% and that the areas being ‘released’ are most likely to be for new opportunities arising from ‘natural capital’ such as trees, environmental adaptation and renewable energy. In addition, by 2050 0.3 million ha could be needed for housing and infrastructure.

This is likely to be reflected within the Study Area, in particular with the increased demand for land for houses.

Across the Study Area local planning authorities allocate land for a variety of uses, such as employment, housing, transport links, strategic infrastructure, minerals and waste. These allocations will become more relevant in future stages of the Scheme and its SA, as location specific approaches become identified.

4.5.4 Strategic Issues

The vast majority of land within the Study Area (about 95%) is arable or pastureland and it is therefore likely that many of the approaches set out in Section 1.3 could have an impact upon it. The importance of agricultural land to the rural economy and its contribution to a sustainable, secure supply of food locally and at a national level (see Section 4.3) will be taken into account in the SA.

Allocated land will be considered as part of the SA process at a later stage in the Scheme development, when there are more location specific approaches under consideration.

4.6 Material Assets – Critical Infrastructure

4.6.1 Current Baseline

An assessment of the effects of a plan or programme on ‘material assets’ is a requirement of the SEA Regulations; however, the term is not defined in the legislation. For the purposes of this SA, the focus is on ‘man-made’ assets which are not covered elsewhere within the SA and specifically focuses on critical infrastructure.

The UK’s national infrastructure is defined by government as: “ those facilities, systems, sites and networks necessary for the functioning of the country and the delivery of the essential services upon which daily life in the UK depends” (CPNI, 2021). This is defined in the UK as including the following sectors: Chemicals, Civil Nuclear, Communications, Defence, Emergency Services, Energy, Finance, Food, Government, Health, Space, Transport and Water. Several sectors have defined ‘sub-sectors’; Emergency Services for example can be split into Police, Ambulance, Fire Services and Coast Guard. Of these, based on the presence of highly significant and/or widely occurring infrastructure in the Study Area as well as the nature of the Scheme, the sectors considered most relevant to the Scheme are: • Energy. • Food. • Health.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

• Transport. • Water.

Both energy and water have specific site infrastructure (power stations, substations, water treatment plants etc) and utility connections between sites, populations or industry (overhead power lines, water supply pipes, sewers etc).

Note that the most relevant aspect of the food sector to this Scheme is its production; this is covered in Section 5.5 Land use.

Energy

There are ten power stations within the Study Area, numerous substations of varying voltages and a network of overhead and underground electricity cables (transmission lines). There is also a network of gas mains crossing the Study Area and, more locally, oil pipelines delivering fuel to the two international airports within the Study Area: Heathrow and Gatwick. There is limited renewable energy supply within the Study Area, with what is present being dominated by energy from waste facilities. However, a number of ‘solar energy’ farms do exist on agricultural land and at the time of writing there are live planning applications for others.

Health

There are more than thirty hospitals within the Study Area, associated with urban areas (market towns and larger), as well as a multitude of local health centres, surgeries and drop-in health centres that serve both urban and rural populations

Transport

The Study Area extends generally westward from London and as such contain a number of significant transport routes in and out of the city, both rail and road. There are a number of significant roads cross the Study Area connecting major cities to London and vice versa, including the M40, M25, M4 and M3. The M40 connects London via Oxford to Birmingham. The M25 is known as the London Orbital Motorway which encircles Greater London and overlaps the eastern side of the Study Area. The M25 is considered to be both one of the most important roads in the UK and also one of the busiest. The M4 connects London through south central England to South Wales. The M3 connects London to Hampshire in South East England. Similarly, a number of principal National Rail routes cross the Study Area.

There are two international public airports within the Study Area: Heathrow and Gatwick (plus the private international Farnborough Airport). Heathrow passenger numbers are usually between 5 and 7million per month; in 2021 this has been reduced to approximately 0.5 million per month as a result of the ban on international travel during the COVID-19 lockdown in England, and future numbers will also be affected by international travel policies of many other nations.

There are numerous rail services within the Study Area. Reading is a nationally important hub, serving (pre-COVID- 19 pandemic) some 20 million passengers per year, making it the second busiest hub in the country (after Birmingham New Street) outside of London. It connects London through to the west and south west and provides a key link between the southern and midlands networks. Rail services between London and Birmingham also travel through the Study Area.

Water

The River Thames system and associated groundwaters provides a major water resource, supporting significant abstractions for public water supply, and to a lesser extend industry and agriculture. There are many water and wastewater treatment assets within the Study Area, including large reservoirs such as at Staines and others immediately west of Heathrow airport. In addition, there is a network of water supply pipes and sewers; the sewerage system includes those carrying wastewater only, surface water only and combined wastewater and 61

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

surface water; the latter being more common in urban areas. A more detailed study of the baseline critical infrastructure in the Study Area will take place at later stages of the Scheme’s development, when location specific approaches are being considered.

4.6.2 Future Trends

The increasing population of the Study Area will increase pressure on all critical infrastructure within the Study Area and there is likely to be a need for additional or expanded assets such as transport hubs and links, healthcare provision and water/wastewater infrastructure.

There are no significant infrastructure energy projects planned currently for the Study Area.

In terms of transport, local upgrades are already planned; however, the most significant future transport project in the Study Area is HS2, the highspeed railway from London to Birmingham. It crosses the north eastern part of the Study Area through Amersham and Aylesbury.

There are proposals to extend Heathrow Airport; consent for this was recently overturned. If it goes ahead as planned, there is also a plan to provide a new rail link to it from the west.

Water resource availability may change as a result of climate change, with possible effects including a greater seasonal ‘imbalance’ with wetter winter periods and drier summer periods. Periods of drought are more likely to arise than in the past. Affinity and Thames Water are proposing a joint ‘South East Regional Reservoir’ in Oxfordshire, to be constructed and operational by the 2030s in order to meet predicted growth in demand. Additionally, the Oxford-Cambridge Arc which identifies the ability for the government to create thousands of jobs and drive investment in the area is likely to lead to a variety of new assets in the Study Area. The results from this plan, due to be published in 2022 will be taken into consideration if the Scheme is still in development at that time.

4.6.3 Strategic Issues The location of the Study Area, extending generally westward from London, and the level of critical infrastructure currently in, and proposed for, the Study Area, are important considerations in the development of the Scheme. The Scheme ambitions to reduce flood risk to people and property across the Study Area includes protection of critical infrastructure assets. Additionally, the Scheme should not prevent the development of new infrastructure which may be required. The SA objectives include draft criteria relating to this.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

5. Baseline Reporting – Environmental Factors

5.1 Biodiversity

5.1.1 Current Baseline

Overview The Study Area is defined by the non-tidal hydrological catchment of the River Thames, and as such covers an extensive area that incorporates numerous considerations with regards to biodiversity. The quality and quantity of habitat considered important for its biodiversity value is reflected in the number of sites designated for nature conservation including:

• 5 Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONBs). • 2 Ramsar Sites. • 26 Special Areas of Conservation (SACs). • 4 Special Protection Areas (SPAs). • 19 National Nature Reserves (NNRs). • 489 Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSIs). • 248 Local Nature Reserves (LNRs). • 6353 ancient woodlands.

Statutory designated sites and ancient woodland are shown in Figure 5.1. Priority habitats are not included in Figure 5.1 as the features would be too small to display at such a scale.

The above designated sites are described further below, together with ancient woodland, and the main priority habitats 1 associated with rivers systems within the Study Area. The ecological status of waterbodies is considered in Section 5.2.

1 Habitats of principal importance for the conservation of biodiversity, listed in accordance with Section 41 of the Natural Environment and Rural Communities Act 2006

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 5.1: Key biodiversity designations

Statutory Designated Sites

AONBs AONBs are (often large) areas of countryside designated to conserve and enhance the natural beauty of a landscape, rather than being areas designated for their biodiversity value, and are afforded similar protection as UK national parks. However, reference to AONBs is included in this section as biodiversity may contribute in part to the ‘natural beauty’ of the landscape and therefore trends can often be seen between the location of an AONB and the concentration of sites designated for biodiversity. The Chilterns AONB and North Wessex Downs AONB connect to make the largest collective area of AONB, cutting north-east through the Study Area from Marlborough in the west across to Aylesbury and Hemel Hempstead at the north-east of the Study Area. The Cotswolds AONB covers much of the north-west edge of the Study Area around Cirencester and Moreton in Marsh, whilst the Surrey Hills AONB and High Weald AONB cover a smaller but still significant portion of the south-east corner of the Study Area.

Ramsar Sites The two Ramsar sites within the Study Area are the Thursley & Ockley Bog Ramsar site, east of Thursley and within the Surrey Hills AONB, and the South West London Waterbodies Ramsar site, which incorporates a series of reservoirs and decommissioned gravel pits around Staines. Thursley & Ockley Bog is designated as a wetland of international importance based on its diversity and a range of features present. It is a valley mire complex within an area of heathland where drainage is impeded, resulting in the formation of a deep layer of peat having built up from the remains of bog-moss ( Sphagnum spp.), which forms a large portion of the vegetation present. Several areas of open water also contribute to the site diversity, ranging from acidic boggy pools to large ponds. The overall site supports multiple rare wetland invertebrates, six native reptile species (including the two rare reptile species: smooth snakes ( Coronella austriaca ) and sand lizards ( Lacerta agilis ), which are afforded greater levels of legal

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

protection than the four common species), and nationally important breeding populations of European nightjar (Caprimulgus europaeus ) and woodlark ( Lullula arborea ). The South West London Waterbodies Ramsar site is designated as a wetland of international importance based on the internationally important numbers of gadwall (Mareca strepera ) and shoveler ( Anas clypeata ) that the site supports.

SACs Whilst SAC sites can be found in most parts of the Study Area, the majority by both number and size can be described as overlapping with the Chilterns, North Wessex Downs or Surrey Hills AONBs. Other noteworthy clusters of SACs include several around Bordon and Alton to the south-east of the Study Area and a loose ‘line’ of large SACs that run north to south from High Wycombe down to Farnham, which include such sites as the Windsor Forest and Great Park SAC and the Thursley, Ash, Pirbright & Chobham SAC.

SPAs Whilst there are fewer SPAs than SACs within the Study Area, this is largely due to named SPAs often incorporating a number of smaller ‘sites’ into one collective SPA. Many of the SPAs within the Study Area overlap directly with other designations, such as the South West London Waterbodies SPA (which is also a Ramsar site) or the Thames Basin Heaths (which incorporates the Thursley, Hankley & Frensham Commons SSSI). Within the Study Area, all SPA sites are found towards the south of the Study Area, in the counties of Greater London, Berkshire, Surrey and Hampshire. The majority of SPAs are found either side of the M3, between Bracknell to the north and Farnham to the south, as well as several large SPAs south of Farnham, many of which overlap with the Surrey Hills AONB.

NNRs The 19 NNRs present within the Study Area are relatively evenly distributed, with no obvious trends in their physical distribution. However, North Meadow Cricklade NNR and Chimney Meadows NNR stand out due to their locations on floodplains.

SSSIs There are significantly more SSSIs than any other statutory designation within the Study Area. SSSI sites occur throughout, with significant ‘hotspots’ evident in some areas. There are a number of SSSIs in the area surrounding Oxford, as well as along the Chiltern escarpment from Watlington to Little Gaddesden. There are a significant number of SSSIs, including several larger sites, south of Slough and around much of Farnborough and Alton. Many of these SSSIs overlap directly with other designations, with SSSI designation being a pre-requisite to the SAC or SPA designation. Such examples include the Windsor Forest and Great Park SSSI (which is also an SAC) or the Colony Bog and Bagshot Heath SSSI (which is a part of the wider Thursley, Hankley & Frensham Commons SAC and Thames Basin Heaths SPA). Another region with a higher density of SSSIs is the region south of Farnham and near the River Wey to the south-west of the Study Area. Much of this area overlaps with the higher density of SPAs and SACs in the same region.

LNRs

Of the 248 LNR sites designated within the Study Area, a greater density are present in the south-east third of the catchment. The south-eastern edges of the Chilterns AONB and North Downs AONB forms a loose ‘line’, south- east of which there is a significantly higher density of LNRs than north-west of the line in the rest of the catchment. LNRs are often designated by local authorities for specific benefit to local communities and so may not always relate to an area of especially significant ecological value.

Non-statutory Designated Sites

The Study Area also includes numerous non-statutory nature conservation sites, i.e. Local Wildlife Sites (LWS), which are protected by local planning policies and are often of equal ecological value to SSSIs.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Ancient Woodland Approximately 6000 areas of ancient woodland were identified within the Study Area. As a habitat, it is considered one of the most important present in the UK and is protected under the National Planning Policy Framework 2019. Ancient woodland takes hundreds of years to establish and is defined as irreplaceable habitat, with a loose definition being any area that’s been continuously wooded since at least 1600. They are considered important for their assemblage of wildlife (which often includes rare and specialist species), soils, recreational value and cultural, historic and landscape value. Areas of ancient woodland are largely discreet due to historical fragmentation and as a result there are thousands of sites mapped as ancient woodland throughout the Study Area. The greatest concentration of areas of ancient woodland largely fall within or in proximity to the Chilterns AONB and the Surrey Hills AONB.

Priority Habitats

Chalk Rivers and Streams

Chalk rivers and streams are a priority habitat, characterised by their source emerging from aquifers within the chalk and very clear, pure water that is rich in minerals and holds a relatively constant temperature year-round. There are more than 200 chalk rivers globally, approximately 85% of which are found in the UK in southern and eastern England.

Chalk rivers and streams are confined to areas underlain by Chalk bedrock and are therefore confined to the southern part of the Study Area. Within the Study Area there are multiple chalk rivers and streams, including: those which drain the dip slope of the Chilterns such as the Wye, Chess, Misbourne and Colne; the upper sections of the River Loddon and tributaries such as the River Whitewater and River Hart in the Basingstoke and Hook area; the North Wey from Alton to Farnham; a long section of the River Kennet from its source north of Avebury to downstream of Newbury, including tributaries such as the Lambourn (the only SAC chalk river in the Study Area); the River Pang, which enters the Thames at Pangbourne; and a number of smaller chalk streams.

Coastal and Floodplain Grazing Marsh Coastal and floodplain grazing marsh is a priority habitat found in river floodplains along slow-flowing sections of rivers. Within the Study Area sections of floodplain grazing marsh are present along the major rivers and streams, with the greatest concentrations being found along the banks of the River Thames and the River Windrush west of Oxford, at Otmoor north-east of Oxford along the River Ray, along the River Kennet west of Reading and along the River Loddon and River Blackwater south-west of Wokingham.

Lowland Meadow

Lowland meadow is a rare priority habitat strongly associated with floodplains, comprising species-rich unimproved neutral grasslands. The distribution of this rare habitat in the River Thames catchment is associated with watercourses but is far scarcer than floodplain grazing marsh due to historic changes in land-use and management. The main concentration of lowland meadow is found along the banks of the watercourses surrounding Oxford, including the River Thames to the west and the River Ray and its tributaries to the east, and some areas of this habitat lie within the Oxford Meadows SAC. The other main concentration of lowland meadow in the Study Area is associated with a collection of waterbodies present around Ashton Keynes and the Cotswold Water Park, many of which are nationally or internationally important.

Lowland Fen

Lowland fen is a further priority habitat associated with rivers and freshwater wetlands. Many areas of this habitat within the Study Area are located in headwaters of tributaries of the Thames and are therefore often small and isolated. The greatest concentrations of lowland fen within the Study Area are present in Surrey, most notably in Chobham Common, Westend Common, along a stretch of the River Wey immediately south of Guildford as well as further southwest around Thursley Common and Hankley Common. These lowland fens comprise valley mire

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

systems within heathland areas. A further concentration of this habitat comprises the collection of alkaline fen systems around Oxford, including sites within the Cothill Fen SAC.

Aquatic Fauna

All rivers in the Study Area support coarse and/or game fisheries comprising a variety of species, as well as aquatic invertebrate and macrophyte populations. The status of these populations is reflected in each water body’s ecological quality classification made in accordance with the Water Environment Regulations (see Section 3.2). In addition, a number of fish and aquatic invertebrate species of conservation concern and international importance are present, including: Atlantic salmon, brown trout, bullhead, European eel and river lamprey; and fine-lined pea mussel, depressed river mussel and (now very restricted) white-clawed crayfish. Their distribution reflects diverse aspects of river quality in particular physical habitat condition, nutrient/chemical contamination and naturalness of flow, as well as dominant geological conditions. Notable rivers for one or more of these species include the Thames itself, the Wey and Mole in the east of the Study Area, the Loddon and Kennet in the south / west and the Windrush and Cherwell in the north / west, but this is not an exhaustive list.

European eel and Atlantic salmon need to move from the seas to suitable river reaches for spawning and development, respectively, as a critical part of their life cycle. Brown trout and sea trout are the names given to river-bound and the migratory sub-populations of the same species, sometimes collectively called ‘wild trout’. The distribution of eels in the Study Area has been monitored since the 1960s and this data suggests that there is a general limit to eel migration around 60 km from the tidal limit. Thus, eels are found in the lower reaches of the Thames and the tributaries of this reach, but are progressively rare in the main river and tributaries above Goring (between Reading and Oxford). The cumulative effects of obstructions to upstream migration are likely to be a key contributory factor in this. A broadly similar situation is seen with Atlantic salmon, although records do show further penetration along the Thames, at least to Oxford, after which migration is compromised due to obstructions such as weirs and locks; the contemporary salmon run in the Thames catchment is extremely limited. There are good stocks of wild trout in a number of the rivers in the Study Area such as the Wey and Tillingbourne, the Upper Colne and Chess, the Kennet and the Windrush and other Cotswold streams.

Semi-aquatic riverine species of particular note due to their sensitivity to riparian activities and habitat damage include the otter and the water vole, the former now widespread in the Scheme area following a recovery from historic decline and extinction in the Thames catchment, the latter more localised and subject to much active conservation action.

5.1.2 Future Trends

There are a number of existing and future pressures that may have adverse effects on biodiversity in the Study Area:

• Changes in seasonal patterns of rainfall and temperature due to climate change are likely to put pressure on the many important habitats for freshwater biodiversity within the Study Area, affecting the quality and quantity of their water supply. • Population growth and economic development in southern England are likely to compete with land for biodiversity and nature conservation throughout the Study Area. • Due to population growth and climate change, domestic, agricultural and industrial demand for water resources may increase, putting further pressure on biodiversity associated with freshwater ecosystems. • The spread of invasive non-native species through the Study Area is likely to continue, with freshwater ecosystems particularly at threat from invasion. • Tree diseases are likely to become an increasing threat to biodiversity as non-native pathogens such as Acute oak decline (caused by environmental stresses rather than a specific pathogen), ash dieback (Hymenoscyphus fraxineus) and chestnut blight (Cryphonectria parasitica) become more prevalent in native tree populations. • Future changes in the populations and distribution of fish and aquatic species of conservation concern will depend on changes in local conditions, and in particular the competing effects of water body improvement (in

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

line with the objectives of the Water Environment Regulations) and increasing pressures on rivers resulting from, amongst other things, population increase, land use and climate change.

Some positive trends may be predicted:

• There are numerous local and national organisations and projects within the Study Area aiming to restore and expand habitats and species, including restoration of statutory designated sites as well as the wider countryside. • Habitats and species may be restored and expanded through delivery of the objectives of the 25 Year Environment Plan and other local and national environmental policies, and requirements of legislation.

5.1.3 Strategic Issues

The Study Area is of considerable importance for nature conservation, comprising many international, national and local statutory designated sites as well as non-statutory sites, and habitats and species, some of which are rare or threatened.

Ancient woodland is considered an irreplaceable habitat and is protected by the NPPF. There are many areas of ancient woodland which will not be covered by any statutory or non-statutory sites due to the fragmented nature of this habitat type and so will be considered at all stages of the Scheme development and the SA. However, there are potential opportunities for the Scheme to link and buffer otherwise isolated habitats and sites of conservation value.

Other habitats of national importance include chalk rivers, lowland meadow and lowland fen, and the different facets of the scheme has the potential to augment, restore and re-connect these valuable habitats and contribute to the objectives of the developing nature recovery network for England and to integrate with the range of locally- derived priorities identified within the Local Nature Recovery Strategies which will be mandated as part of the forthcoming Environment Act.

5.2 Water

5.2.1 Current Baseline

Overview

The Water Environment Regulations (WER) (see Section 3.2.6) set out a framework for the protection of both surface and groundwaters. It encompasses a system for managing water protection through the establishment of River Basin Districts (RBD) and the identification and characterisation of specific waterbodies within those, each of which is classified according to a number of indicators of status. A key objective is for all waterbodies to attain High (the best) or Good status. The waterbodies are defined as ‘surface’ waterbodies or ‘ground’ waterbodies. Surface waterbodies include rivers (of all sizes), lakes and ponds and artificial or ‘heavily modified’ waterbodies such as reservoirs and canals. Estuarine rivers are classified as ‘transitional’ waterbodies; coastal areas are defined as ‘coastal waterbodies. Groundwater bodies are defined areas of groundwater.

As discussed in Section 1.1 and shown on Figure 1.1, the catchment for the Scheme covers the entire length of the River Thames upstream of London (specifically Teddington weir) to its source in Gloucestershire, and all the rivers that flow into it.

Water Management

The Thames RBD is managed through a series of management catchments. Within each management catchment, there are a number of operational catchments. The operational catchments are centred around sections of significant rivers and their tributaries and generally comprise a number of waterbodies.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

The management catchments and their respective operational catchments, along with summary data regarding the status of waterbodies in those areas, are detailed in Appendix D.

For surface water, there are ten management catchments and 19 operational catchments within the Study Area; together these include 315 surface waterbodies. There is also one management catchment for groundwater, which encompasses 47 groundwater bodies. Table 5.1 presents an overview of the catchments and a brief description of their location.

Table 5.1: Catchments Within the Study Area

Management Operational Location Catchment Catchment

Gloucestershire and Upper Thames South west of Cirencester at Kemble (source) to Lechlade in the Cotswolds the Vale

Ock From Uffingdon and Wantage, through Marcham and from Wolvercote through South Hinksey and Oxford in the north, to Abingdon on Thames and Dorchester Cotswolds Evenlode West of Oxford, flowing southeasterly from Moreton-in-the-Marsh through Kingham, Charlbury and Woodstock to Cassington.

Windrush Stow on the Wold through Witney to Eynsham

Cherwell and Ray Cherwell from headwaters of the river at Charwelton in Northamptonshire to its confluence with the River Thames at New Hinksey

Oxon Ray From north of Quainton through Bicester to Islip where it joins the Cherwell

Thames and Chiltern Chilterns South East Ilsley, Wallingford, High Wycombe and north Reading South

Thame From Aylesbury through Thame to Dorchester

Kennet and Trib Kennet From Avebury, through Marlborough and Newbury to southwest Reading

Loddon and Trib Loddon From Basingstoke, Aldershot and Farnborough north to Wokingham to the east of Reading.

Maidenhead and Thames Lower From Bracknell through Maidenhead to Windsor and Kingston up Thames Sunbury Wey and trib Wey From Bordon, Guildford and Haslemere, through Dorking and Woking to Weybridge

Mole Mole Lower and From Horley and Reigate, Newdigate through Dorking, Leatherhead and Esher to Hampton Rythe Court Park Mole Upper trib From Crawley in the south to Horely and the M25 south of Caterham in the north, through Redhill to Salfords. Colne Colne From Amersham, Hemel Hempstead and Harpenden through Watford and Rickmansworth to Slough and then Staines

Surface Waterbodies

The classification of ecological status for freshwater surface waterbodies is determined through consideration of the performance of the waterbodies in terms of specific quality elements Biological elements are the primary elements with respect to classification and include composition and abundance of aquatic flora, benthic invertebrate fauna and fish (including the age structure for fish). The biological elements are supported by 69

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

hydromorphological (including hydrology and morphological conditions) and physio-chemical elements (including general conditions e.g. nutrients and the presence of specific pollutants). Waterbodies which are characterised as artificial or heavily modified are assigned an ecological potential , rather than ecological status, which reflects that they cannot realistically ever reach a fully natural condition. For the purposes of this report any reference to ecological status also means ecological potential.

Of the 315 waterbodies in the Study Area, none are classified as being of High ecological status; only 5% are assigned Good ecological status. The majority (63%) are of Moderate ecological status; a significant proportion (28%) are Poor and 4% are Bad. See Figure 5.2.

Waterbodies are also assigned a chemical status, which is dependent upon them meeting certain Environmental Quality Standards (EQS). If the EQS is achieved, the waterbodies are classified as being Good. If not, the waterbody is classified as failing to achieve Good. All of the waterbodies in the Study Area were classified as failing to achieve Good.

Figure 5.2: Surface Waterbody Status

The reasons for these waterbodies failing to achieve High or Good status vary slightly depending on the urban or rural nature of the catchment, however most are being affected by pollution from wastewater and physical modifications. Pollution from rural areas and towns and cities are also important factors relevant to the catchment. These pressures result in direct impacts on waterbody habitats, their chemistry and their hydromorphological processes (meaning flow and physical features). They can also result in other impacts such as an increase in flood risk and present risks to internationally and nationally designated habitats and species, sometimes several kilometres downstream, depending on the magnitude of the pressure and size of the waterbody.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Groundwater Bodies

There are 58 groundwater bodies wholly or partly in the Study Area. Groundwater bodies are classified in terms of a quantitative status, which includes groundwater levels; and their chemical status.

In terms of quantitative status, 42 were assigned Good status, the remainder Poor. In terms of chemical status, only 26 were assigned Good status, the remainder Poor. Details of the groundwater bodies and their classification is provided in Appendix D, Table D1.2.

Figure 5.3: Groundwater Body Status

Water Protected Areas

As part of the WER compliance assessment, it is also necessary to consider the potential implications of the Scheme on WER Protected Areas. There are a number of these within the Study Area, as shown in Table 5.2, although not all of the Special Protection Areas and Special Areas of Conservation will be water-related and the WER does not apply to those that are not. Details of the legislation and policies underpinning (drinking) water resources are provided below.

Table 5.2: WER Protected Areas

WER Protected Area Number within Study Area Drinking Water Protection Area 17 Drinking Water Safeguard Zone 281 Bathing Waters 1 Special Protection Areas 14 Special Areas of Conservation 35

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

WER Protected Area Number within Study Area Nitrate Vulnerable Zones 457 Sensitive Areas under the Urban Wastewater Treatment Regulations 34

Water Resources

The River Thames is a major water resource, supporting significant abstractions for public water supply, and to a lesser extent industry and agriculture. The river is also one of the most important environmental features in the region and is highly valued for its navigational and recreational uses. All these competing demands on the River Thames water resource system have their own flow and level requirements.

The Environment Agency’s Thames Abstraction Licensing Strategy (ALS) (2019) sets out the approach to managing new and existing abstraction and impoundment along the Thames. This approach ensures that RBMP objectives for water resources are met and deterioration within the catchment is avoided.

The Thames area has a bespoke licensing strategy which modifies water resource availability. The bespoke strategy protects the rights of existing abstractors, ensures the Lower Thames can reach Good Ecological Potential and facilitates future water resource utilisation. In particular it applies more stringent conditions to the largest abstractions.

The Environment Agency has determined that water is not available under certain flow conditions in waterbodies in which abstraction is contributing to flows falling below the Environmental Flow Indicator (EFI). Flows should meet the EFI to help support a healthy ecology in our rivers. Good ecological status can be achieved when recent actual flows are meeting the EFI and supporting a healthy ecology in water.

The ALS illustrates on maps the water resource availability of the Thames from its source to Teddington before and after the bespoke strategy has been applied. It is important to note that the Thames ALS area encompasses the River Thames and immediate tributaries; larger tributaries within the Study Area have their own ALS and will be considered in the SA as the Scheme develops further. The ALS is for use by prospective applicants for abstraction licensing and also helps the Environment Agency manage existing users.

Availability for surface waters is calculated at four different flows, Q95 (the flow of a river which is exceeded on average for 95% of the time i.e. low flow), Q70, Q50, and Q30.

• At Q30: water is available in all areas except in Reading where it is not available. • At Q50: water is restricted and available everywhere except Reading where it is not available. • At Q70: water is not available anywhere. • At Q95: water is not available anywhere.

Under these flow conditions, water resources are likely to be available for at least 50% of the time in an average year.

Domestic and commercial demand for water in the Study Area is met by five water companies: Affinity Water; SES Water; South East Water; Southern Water and Thames Water. Their water supply network extends across the Study Area. Their Water Resource Management Plans provides information on water use. The one for Thames Water, for example, set out that in 2016/17 domestic customers accounted for 53% of water use in a year, of which less than half is by metered properties; non-household use accounts for 18%; and leakage 28%. Minor components make up the remaining 2% of water use.

Flood Risk

In the whole Thames RBD, there are:

• 227,000 people at high risk of surface water flooding (more than 1 in 30 (3.3%) chance of being flood in any year); and

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

• Over 107,000 people at high risk of flooding from rivers and the sea (more than 1 in 30 (3.3%) chance of being flood in any year).

Flood zones have been identified which show, spatially, the areas at highest and lowest risk of flooding – categorized by ‘zones, as shown in Table 5.3.

Table 5.3: Flood Zones Categorization

Flood Zone Definition Zone 1 Low Land having a less than 1 in 1,000 annual probability of river or sea flooding. (Shown as ‘clear’ on the Flood Probability Map – all land outside Zones 2 and 3) Zone 2 Medium Land having between a 1 in 100 and 1 in 1,000 annual probability of river flooding; or land having between a Probability 1 in 200 and 1 in 1,000 annual probability of sea flooding. (Land shown in light blue on the Flood Map) Zone 3a High Land having a 1 in 100 or greater annual probability of river flooding; or Land having a 1 in 200 or greater Probability annual probability of sea flooding.(Land shown in dark blue on the Flood Map) Zone 3b The This zone comprises land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood. Local planning authorities Functional should identify in their Strategic Flood Risk Assessments areas of functional floodplain and its boundaries Floodplain accordingly, in agreement with the Environment Agency. (Not separately distinguished from Zone 3a on the Flood Map)

The area of land within the Study Area identified as being in Flood Zones 2 and 3 is shown on Figure 5.3.

Figure 5.3: Flood Zones 2 and 3

Detailed assessment of flood risk in the Study Area is presented (by management catchment) in the Thames Flood Risk Management Plan (2015-2021). An overview of each catchment is provided in Table 5.4 to set the context for the Scheme.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table 5.4: Flood Risk by Management Catchment

Management Overview of Flood Risk Catchment

Gloucestershire Rivers are the primary source of flood risk in the catchment. However, there is some risk of flooding from other sources and the Vale including surface water and groundwater. The majority of land within the catchment is rural, however, there are also significant urban centres including Oxford, Abingdon, Swindon and Cirencester. Cotswolds In the Cotswolds catchment the primary flood risk is from rivers, however surface water flooding is also a risk in some areas. The majority of land within the catchment is rural; however, there are a number of towns including Witney, Burford, Bourton-on-the-Water and Woodstock.

Cherwell and The primary flood risk in the Cherwell and Ray catchment is from rivers, however some areas are at risk from other Ray sources, including surface water. The majority of land within the catchment is rural, but there are a few significant urban centres including Banbury and Bicester. There are currently flood defences in Banbury which reduce flood risk to the town. Thame and The Thame and South Chilterns is mainly at risk of flooding from rivers, however, some areas are also at risk from Chiltern South surface water and groundwater flooding. Existing defences in Aylesbury reduce the risk of flooding to the community.

Kennet and The primary flood risk in the Kennet and tributaries catchment is from rivers however other sources include surface Trib water and groundwater. The majority of land within the catchment is rural, however, there are also significant urban centres including Marlborough, Newbury, Theale and Reading. Loddon and The primary flood risk in the Loddon and tributaries catchment is from rivers, however the upstream end of the Trib catchment is also at risk from surface water and groundwater flooding. There is a flood storage area on the Cove Brook in Farnborough which reduces the risk of flooding to the town. Maidenhead The primary source of flood risk in the Maidenhead to Sunbury catchment is the rivers. Some areas are also at risk from and Sunbury surface water and groundwater. The majority of land within the catchment is urban, with only a small percentage of agricultural land. The Maidenhead, Windsor and Eton Flood Alleviation Scheme protect parts of these towns and surrounding areas from flooding. Wey and Trib The rivers are the main source of flood risk in the Wey and tributaries catchment; however other sources include surface water and groundwater. Flood defences on the Hoe Stream protect the local community from the risk of flooding. Mole Generally, the Mole catchment is susceptible to rapid flooding from thunderstorms, but there are four distinctive areas with very different floodplain characteristics. Upper Mole (from south of Crawley to Horley): A large part of the Upper Mole catchment is semi-rural but it is characterised by newer and expanding urban areas often towards the headwaters of river catchments, such as Crawley and Horley. Gatwick Airport is situated in the Upper Mole and is at risk of flooding. Middle Mole (from Horley to Cobham): The Middle Mole contains mainly natural floodplain, with market towns and villages. 90% of the Middle Mole catchment is rural and it passes through Mole Gap to Reigate Escarpment Special Area of Conservation which is also a Site of Special Scientific Interest. Lower Mole (from Cobham to Thames confluence): The Lower Mole is characterised by areas of urban development with river flood defences. Almost the entire length of the watercourse has been modified with raised defences, flood relief channel and control structures The Rythe: This small river flows through a partly wooded catchment with a number of towns along its course. There are no major flood defences. There are urban areas already at risk of flooding from multiple sources such as fluvial, surface water and sewer. Colne In the Colne catchment there is a risk of flooding from rivers, surface water and ground water. The primary source of risk varies across the catchment: In the upper reaches of the catchment there are a number of communities at risk from flooding from rivers. Within the urban areas there is also a risk from surface water flooding. In the lower reaches and along the eastern tributary of the River Pinn the risk is from a combination of river flooding and surface water flooding. This is due to the urban nature of the area and the underlying clay geology. The River Pinn is a very fast-responding river, and therefore there is a need to manage risk differently to the more rural upper reaches. The western tributaries of the Colne are in mostly rural settings and are fed primarily from groundwater. The rivers are therefore slower to respond but are more likely to suffer prolonged flooding. There are some small communities along the tributaries of the Misbourne, Chess, Gade and Ver which are at risk from groundwater flooding. The River Ash is an independent catchment but influenced by the water levels on the Colne. River flooding is the primary risk in this area, with surface water flooding also a potential risk due to the urban nature of the watercourse.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

5.2.2 Future Trends

Surface Waterbodies

The Environment Agency has identified a series of measures to address the issues identified as needing action for waterbodies in the Thames RBD to achieve High or Good status. A selection of the measures is provided below:

• Install nutrient reduction. • Preserve and restore habitats. • Enabling fish passage. • Combined sewer overflow redesign and rebuild. • Upgrades to existing wastewater treatment plants. • Habitat management and creation. • Protect and maintain natural sediment processes. • Re-opening culverts.

The implementation of these measures and others, not yet funded or specified, would facilitate the achievement of High or Good status for many waterbodies by 2027 (as required by the WER). There are, however, significant obstacles to this, in particular funding, but also being able to achieve consensus on measures in specific locations where differing priorities may exist. The River Basin Management Planning (RBMP) process is designed to help achieve that consensus and to engage all parties in helping to deliver the WER objectives for all waterbodies.

Groundwater Bodies

The pressures on groundwater bodies are largely from pollution in rural and urban areas. In rural areas, nitrate from fertilisers has built up in groundwater over decades and is anticipated to take a long time to reduce (Thames RBMP 2015). In towns and cities, many homes and workplaces have 'misconnected' drains, meaning that dirty water often enters groundwater rather than foul sewer drains.

These pressures on groundwater bodies affects the rivers that are recharged by them and the ability to abstract from them for water supply; in a Study Area already under pressure in terms of water quality in surface water bodies and low availability of groundwater, contamination of groundwater presents a significant issue.

There are a number of Drinking Water Protection areas, Safeguarding Zones, Source Protection Areas and Nitrate Vulnerable Zones within the Study Area, where practices are restricted to attempt to reverse the trends in contamination.

Measures to protect and restore groundwater bodies include:

• Compliance by farm business with and enforcement by regulators of the raft of regulations associated with the control of pollution from farming activities. • Use of sustainable drainage systems. • Use of anti-pollution works to address misconnections. • Reducing abstractions for water supply.

Water Resources and Supply

The Environment Agency’s ALS for the Study Area illustrates that the catchment is under pressure from a water availability perspective. Under climate change scenarios (see Section 5.7) that situation is likely to worsen. Predictions include more frequent and lengthier droughts, especially in the South East of England.

The Water Companies Water Resources Management Plans set out a number of future scenarios and predictions for population and economic growth to determine the likely future requirements for water and solutions for meeting the demand, including under climate change scenarios. For most of the water companies, populations

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

and numbers of households are expected to increase, for example Thames Water predicts population growth of up to 45% and growth in the number of households of up to 75% by 2100. In some cases, this translates into large predicted increases in household consumption of water, however Affinity Water predict a decrease in demand as water metering and efficiency measures are implemented more widely and built into the design of new homes. Non household water use is not predicted to increase in general.

Flood Risk

Despite a number of measures to reduce flood risk in the river basin, residual risk remains and that is what this Scheme seeks to address.

The Thames CFMP (see Section 3.3) identified the Upper Thames, Ock, Kennet, and Loddon (among other sub- areas) as “Areas of low to moderate flood risk where we will take action with others to store water or manage runoff in locations that provide overall flood risk reduction or environmental benefits”. These sub-areas contribute approximately 50% of the overall floodplain of the Thames CFMP area. The approach was identified as being increasingly important to mitigate the impacts of climate change.

The Thames Flood Risk Management Plan (2015 to 2021) was published in March 2016. The FRMP sets out that “taking a catchment-based approach to management of the water environment will achieve the greatest combined benefits for the society, the environment and the economy ”. This is what the Scheme is setting out to achieve.

5.2.3 Strategic Issues

The Study Area encompasses a very wide catchment and the water issues within it are varied but also wholly connected. Key issues for the Scheme to consider are the existing failure of quality objectives for most surface water and groundwater bodies; scarcity of water supply coupled with increased predicted demand in some areas (and at certain times of the year); flood risk in large urban areas of the catchment with limited capacity for flood risk management in those areas; and the impact of climate change on all of those issues.

In addition to identifying measures to reduce consumption and leakage to help manage supplies, water companies also identify infrastructure investments to secure new supplies; for example, Affinity and Thames Water are proposing a joint ‘South East Regional Reservoir’ in Oxfordshire, to be constructed and operational by the 2030s in order to meet predicted growth in demand. This is one of a number of strategic water resource options currently subject to detailed assessment. This will be taken into account in the SA process and consideration of alternatives.

5.3 Soils and Geology

5.3.1 Current Baseline

Designated Geological Features None of the NNR within the Study Area have specific geological interests. There are approximately 500 SSSIs within the Study Area including a proportion that are designated due to their geological features. The locations of geological SSSIs will be considered within the baseline at a later stage.

Local Geological Sites (formerly known as RIGGS or Regionally Important Geological and Geomorphological Sites) exhibit important geological and geomorphological features and in the Study Area examples include sarsen stones, rock outcrops and geological faces in active quarries. This is a non-statutory designation and will be relevant to later stages of the Scheme when location specific approaches are being evaluated.

Non-designated Geology Soil characteristics, like permeability and infiltration rate are all related to the underlying geology and can affect the movement of water through the catchment. Within the region, as shown on Figure 5.4, the geology boundaries run in a general south-west to north-east direction, with the older bedrock being exposed to the north-west and younger to the south-east. To the north-west of the catchment is the Greater Oolite Group, a series of limestone

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

and sandstone layering’s. The middle of the catchment is dominated by the White Chalk subgroup and to the south-east of the catchment are the Lambeth and Thames groups which are both clay bedrocks with lenses of sands and gravels.

Figure 5.4: Bedrock Geology

As shown on Figure 5.5, superficial deposits are generally limited to River Terrace Deposits and Alluvium, with some Clay with Flint deposits on the Marlborough and Lambourn Downs. Therefore, the predominant soil types within the catchment can be characterised as surface water gley, brown and lithomorphic soils. Lithomorphic soils are shallow soils formed over bedrock. Brown soils are widespread at elevations below 300m and found mainly on permeable materials.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 5.5: Superficial Deposits

Areas of predominantly chalk, sandstone and limestone with lithomophic or brown soils are loosely packed and have a high infiltration rate. Rainwater can easily infiltrate into these soils and recharge the groundwater layer, which in turn will transfer into the rivers slowly, unless the soils are affected by compaction. These areas respond slowly to a rainfall event and will have a slower run off. This is also backed up by the large number of source protection zones within the chalk bedrock, indicating a high degree of water retention within the bedrock, allowing drinking water to be abstracted. However, saturated chalk areas have a reduced storage capacity and under these circumstances overland flow can lead to rapid responses to rainfall events, and elevated groundwater can also lead to flooding.

Areas with a predominance of clay soils, clay and mudstone bedrock and surface water gley soils will have a low infiltration rate due to them containing densely packed clay material. They will remain either permanently waterlogged since deposition, or seasonally waterlogged which lead to a low permeability. Clay soils are particularly prevalent to the south-east of the catchment, from Newbury eastwards to London, but are also present to the north of the catchment with the Oxford and Kimmeridge Clays present. Rainwater absorption by these soils is slow leading to quicker runoff and as a result rainfall in these areas lead quickly to flooding. There is also less opportunity to take advantage of soakaway type measures as the flow of water in impeded by the geology of the area.

Soil erosion is also a large concern for the catchment as a large part of the district is under agricultural use (see Section 4.5 for more information on agricultural land classification) which, due to intensive land management, is a significant cause of soil erosion. Intensity of rainfall, field slopes, soil type and vegetation all affect rates of soil erosion and these factors vary between the river catchments. Hillier areas such as the Cotswolds, Chilterns, North Wessex Downs and Surrey Hills have the highest potential for soil erosion. Activities like cropping, grazing and forestry remove vegetation. The result is higher erosion rates which can lead to increased sedimentation in rivers in these areas. These factors contribute to high sediment loads in rural rivers which can reduce the capacity of rivers while degrading the quality and fertility of the land as topsoil is lost.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Some areas of the catchment have been subject to large amounts of aggregate abstraction and the holes left may have been filled with waste material as part of restoration plans. There are currently almost 200 active landfill sites within the Study Area with a further 2000 historical landfill sites also present (see Section 5.8 for more information on resource use and waste). The landfill sites cover all types of waste, including inert waste, industrial waste, commercial waste, household waste, special waste and liquid and sludge. Furthermore, active landfill sites and known or potential areas of contaminated land are located across the whole Study Area and are not limited to one particular location or within one particular geology. Furthermore, there is likely to be groundwater contamination as a result of leachate from the landfill areas which may affect groundwater conditions.

5.3.2 Future Trends To cater for an increased population, conversion of open land to housing and supporting jobs is likely to continue. The impermeable areas could increase rainfall runoff rates and remove access to soil as a resource. Climate change will cause more extreme rainfall events, wetter winters and drier soils in summer. More intense rainfall on drier soils will increase rates of soil erosion.

Erosion and higher impermeability reduces the topsoil layer, which means it is unable to hold as much water. In chalk and sandstone areas, this will result in faster response to rainfall. Any subsequent flooding will occur more quickly. In some areas agri-environment schemes will continue. These schemes aim to improve biodiversity on farmland, which will result in less soil exposed to erosion through permanent or partial regeneration of deep-rooted land cover.

Many local plans have policies in place to reduce the rate of surface water leaving development sites, by holding the water back or promoting infiltration. These sustainable drainage systems (SuDS) will help to mitigate the predicted increases in runoff from development whilst offering a range of other benefits, such as creating softer more appealing town centres, reducing the urban heat-island effect and improving air quality. Existing payments for catchment sensitive farming should get strengthened too as part of the developing Environment Land Management scheme which aims to reward land managers for environmental outcomes.

Mineral extraction to support expanding urban areas will continue. Some sites will run out of minerals and close. New sites to cater for demand will open. The closed sites may be infilled with waste or utilised as part of a catchment wide flood storage network changing how water moves into and through the ground. The Cotswold Water Park is a good example of how disused pits can be converted into recreational assets that offer a whole range of benefits.

Landfill sites may be located near proposed flood risk reduction measures. These sites are likely to contain contaminated materials. There is also potential for historic uses to have contaminated the land. Localised excavations associated with schemes will remove some of this material to safer locations. Contaminated land sites may be at increased risk of flooding or coastal erosion due to climate change. Where contaminated soils are eroded, the contaminated sediment could build up in flood storage areas and impact water quality.

5.3.3 Strategic Issues

Consideration will be given to the location of active, historic and planned landfill sites (See Section 5.8) when the assessment of potential approaches has progressed to becoming location specific, in order to identify any potential impacts of both flood risk and flood risk management works on soil and water pollution.

Potential opportunities in terms of land remediation may be identified where these coincide with Scheme proposals.

A large number of groundwater bodies across the Study Area are in Poor status (See Section 5.2.1).

A strategic approach to minimising the waste and materials use in the Scheme will be taken (see Section 5.8).

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

5.4 Landscape and Visual Amenity

5.4.1 Current Baseline The landscape of the Thames Catchment has a strong composition of broad chalk and limestone uplands and ridges separated by open vales along the region’s major rivers. The upland areas act as a family of large-scale landscapes, each with its own character – the rolling hills of the North Wessex Downs, or the scarp of the Cotswolds, yet with many common threads, such as the presence of chalk grasslands, beach woods, iconic panoramic views, and a markedly overall scenic beauty, reflected in their designations as Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB). Each of the upland areas also has strong connections to heritage, with distinct archaeology and vernaculars that recognisably set them apart and give them identity at a national scale.

Water is a uniting feature, with the River Thames connecting east to west. In addition, there are locations where large water bodies form regional-scale landscape features, including at Cotswold Water Park, along the Kennet and Thames at Reading, and the series of large reservoirs between Windsor and Heathrow.

The catchment’s major population centres lie within the lowland vales, though many are noticeably nestled-up against the upland areas, with Swindon, Newbury, and Reading up against the North Wessex Downs and High Wycombe against the Chilterns. This results in the upland areas being major components of the setting to these settlements, as well as offering close-proximity, accessible green spaces for residents. Conversely, Oxford is distinct as a major population centre that sits at the centre of a large vale, at the confluence of several rivers including the Thames. Toward the east of the catchment, the settlement pattern is less dispersed, with London’s satellite towns creating clusters of developed areas along the major transport routes into the city.

The major settlements of the catchment have a strong relationship to the historic development of infrastructure in the region, forming major stops along the rivers, canals, railways, and motorways. Each of these settlements tends to have an identity that is strongly associated with those pieces of infrastructure, and a townscape that reflects this, such as Oxford with its rivers and water meadows, Swindon and its Railway Village, Reading and its canals and marinas, Windsor and its boat racing, and Slough’s physical and cultural connection to the M4 Motorway.

The historic development of the region’s infrastructure, responding settlement structure, management of the wet lowlands, and the historic farming and designed landscapes of the uplands means the landscape character baseline has a strong relationship to the cultural heritage baseline and Historic Landscape Characterisation in general (see Section 5.5). There are numerous locations within the catchment where the mere presence of archaeology, for instance, has been enough to grant the location a strong sense of place; the numerous barrows, hill forts, and white horse and other chalk monuments along the Ridgeway being a clear example. There are direct visual cues in the landscape that point to the way the land has been managed historically and led directly to the character at present, such as the extensive clearance of trees on the North Wessex Downs and their subsequent use for seasonal sheep grazing.

The National Character Areas (NCAs) (Natural England, 2014) within the Study Area are shown on Figure 5.6.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 5.6: National Character Areas

The following designations or features relating to landscape character and visual amenity, that are sensitive to change at a landscape scale or to changes in their setting, have been identified (as shown on Figure 5.7 excluding Conservation Areas):

• There are five Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) within the Study Area; Cotswolds, North Wessex Downs, Chilterns, Surrey Hills and High Weald. The spatial arrangement of these are of note being, as they are, predominantly upland areas that experience open and well-known vistas of the lowland riverine valleys and vales between. • There are numerous Conservation Areas within the catchment, commonly reflecting the historic urban development of the region. These will be incorporated into the baseline at a later stage as the Scheme is developing location specific approaches. • The South Downs National Park encroaches partially into the Study Area around the town of Bordon and sits alongside the source of the River Wey. • There are extensive areas of Green Belt around Greater London and Oxford, with a smaller area around Cheltenham. • Country Parks tend to be clustered around urban fringes of Swindon, Oxford, Reading, Maidenhead and Greater London, reflecting their role as a recreational resource. • There are four National Trails found within the Study Area: o The Thames Path has an intimate relationship with the river, following it from its source near Cirencester, through Oxford, Reading, Maidenhead, Staines and Greater London, as well as interacting with the Cotswold Water Park, the future River Thames Scheme, and the Oxford Flood Alleviation Scheme.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

o The Ridgeway runs along the continuous ridgeline formed by the Marlborough Downs, Berkshire Downs and Chilterns. It has a strong sense of place related to the ancient history of it setting and historic features and affords prominent views, including over the Vale of The White Horse. o The North Downs Way links Farnham to Dover along the Downs escarpment and offering views over the High Weald. o Cotswold Way follows the Cotswold Escarpment around Cheltenham, offering high views over Gloucestershire.

• There are two World Heritage Sites (WHS) within the Study Area. Blenheim Palace lies north-west of Oxford, abutting the Cotswolds AONB and along the River Glyme watercourse. The Stonehenge, Avebury and Associated Sites WHS sits within the North Wessex Downs AONB. See Section 5.5 for more information about this and the following cultural heritage and archaeology designations, which are also included on Figure 5.7 as they contribute to the regional landscape setting. • There are numerous Scheduled Monuments throughout (see Section 5.5). • There are seven Registered Battlefields within the Study Area (see Section 5.5). • Registered Parks and Gardens are found throughout the Study Area (see Section 5.5).

Figure 5.7: Key designations contributing to the regional landscape setting

No Ordnance Survey ‘Vantage Points’ have been identified within the Study Area at this stage. The following regional scale views/viewpoints have been identified through this desk study (shown on Figure 5.7):

• Liddington Hill, Swindon. • Uffington Castle. • Beacon Hill, Highclere. • Dunstable Downs.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

• The Cotswold Scarp. • Crooksbury Hill, Farnham. • Walbury Hill. • The protected View Cones of the Oxford Local Plan (Oxford City Council), also referred to in the Vale of White Horse District Council Local Plan 2031.

5.4.2 Future Trends Developing infrastructure projects within the catchment which may change the baseline include High Speed 2, the Smart Motorways rollout, and the Oxford to Cambridge Expressway. Further mixed-use development is expected along the Oxford Cambridge Arc (including at Bicester), at Swindon’s Eastern Villages, Maidenhead’s Nicholson Quarter, Newbury’s Eagle Quarter, Oxpens in Oxford, Reading’s Station Hill, and the redevelopment of Didcot Power Station.

Several individual flood alleviation schemes are in progress within the catchment, including the River Thames Scheme and the Oxford Flood Alleviation Scheme. The West Thames Area Landscape Vision Project 2030 is also currently in development and should be used to inform the Scheme and ensure that the desired outcomes of the two projects are aligned and meet wider outcomes.

As discussed in Section 5.2, Affinity Water and Thames Water are proposing a joint South East Regional Reservoir in Oxfordshire, to be constructed and operational by the 2030s.

Future changes to the character of the landscape may result from a variety of activities in response to the challenges of climate change. These could include, inter alia, green infrastructure strategies, such as the South East Green Infrastructure Framework , the South and Vale Green Infrastructure Strategy, and the East Hampshire District Council Green Infrastructure Strategy 2011-2028 , and future Local Nature Recovery Strategies. Change will also come from the carrying-out of AONB Management Plans, planting schemes as part of the Great Western Community Woodland, and ecological enhancements carried-out by the Wildlife Trusts. As climate change challenges the landscape, the resilience of the natural resources will be borne out by the developing landscape character. Resilient woodlands, with a diversity of species and age will continue to develop and change, whilst less resilient plantations will decline. The restoration of woodlands and peatlands for carbon capture, wetlands and river corridors for flood management, and the take-up of agroforestry techniques will enhance the naturalistic qualities of the landscape and reduce its highly managed appearance – the broader spatial scope for naturally functioning landscapes and their multifunctional use will be a noticeable change. A failure to invest in these ecosystem services will result in a lesser landscape with more intensive environmental management features.

An increase in green surfaces, spaces, tree cover, and greenspaces in urban areas will also occur as sustainable drainage, green surface metrics, greenspace access, and tree cover metrics are integrated into the local plans to respond to surface water management, urban heat islands, air quality, and access to greenspace for physical health and mental wellbeing.

The extraction of minerals in the catchment, as well as the continuing placement of waste, will make visually apparent changes to the landscape, but also opportunities for enhancement. Future trends regarding these are described in Section 5.8. As landscape is at least partially defined by the environmental features within it, reference should also be made to the future trends section of the other environmental disciplines.

Environmental opportunities have been identified from within the associated NCA Profiles (Natural England, 2014) and are summarised in Appendix E. These have been presented as descriptions of potential change and as targeted opportunities for the Scheme to enhance sense of place and landscape quality at a regional scale. Common themes identified by the NCA Profiles are:

• To enhance and expand the semi-natural habitats on the uplands, such as chalk grassland and beechwoods; • To restore functioning river corridors by connecting floodplains and create recreational resources for nearby settlements; • To protect and promote heritage features and land patterns, particularly where illustrative of our relationship to geology and water; 83

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

• To utilise waterways for enhanced ecological and human connectivity; • To encourage sustainable farming to connect fragmented habitats; and • To manage and restore Ancient Woodlands and Historic Hunting Forests, and to establish future sources of biomass fuel for energy production.

5.4.3 Strategic Issues

The predicted growth in population, properties, transport corridors and supporting economic areas present an increasing challenge to the sensitive landscapes of the Study Area, of which there are many, including five AONBs.

Utilising the Environmental Opportunities of the individual NCAs provides the opportunity to target regional-scale benefits to the quality of landscape character and vibrancy of sense of place.

The Scheme is required to tie-into Local Authority Local Plans, local green infrastructure strategies or Local Nature Recovery Strategies, wildlife conservation schemes and urban forestry. Importantly, the Scheme needs to look at how these things can be joined-up, using a sieve-mapping approach to identify the best locations for intervention. The project should utilise the many environmental inputs that reflect a natural capital approach, so that areas of need and areas of opportunity can be identified that best deliver multiple ecosystem service benefits.

Delivering sustainable catchment management within the region will present opportunities to derive the ecological, climactic, carbon and energy, and socioeconomic outcomes of green infrastructure. This will require the purposeful implementation of varied ecosystem services, and include such things as:

• Restoring the natural, self-regulating systems of biodiversity, healthy soils and geodiversity, and water (including natural flood management); • Maximising opportunities for carbon capture through woodland planting and peatland restoration; • Enhancing non-motorised access routes to desired destinations and valued landscapes, by making them safe, legible, attractive, and interesting; • Addressing inequalities in greenspace access; • Creating greenspace and semi-natural settings for learning, play, and recreation; • Integrating heritage sites and historic landscape character to encourage engagement with the landscape; • Looking for opportunities to integrate sustainable drainage and vegetation coverage in new and existing developments to manage water and temperature, as well as enhancing biodiversity and human health; • Creating new landscapes that capture the imagination and encourage cultural engagement; and • Integrating productive landscapes into greenspace-access and biodiversity strategies.

The emerging requirement for the production of Local Nature Recovery Strategies, to be mandated as part of the forthcoming Environment Act and as currently being piloted in Buckinghamshire, will provide a vehicle for identifying the strategic priorities for nature’s recovery and the wider ecosystem and human wellbeing benefits which this generates. It is important that the Scheme objectives and benefits dovetail with the various stakeholder- driven Local Nature Recovery Strategies which will be produced over the next two years.

5.5 Cultural Heritage and Archaeology

5.5.1 Current Baseline A cultural heritage asset is defined by the National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF) as “a building, monument, site, place or landscape identified as having a degree of significance meriting consideration in planning decisions, because of its heritage interest”. Cultural heritage assets include designated assets (World Heritage Sites (WHS), Scheduled Monuments, Listed Buildings, Conservation Areas, Registered Parks and Gardens (RPG), Registered Battlefields and Registered Historic Wrecks) and non-designated assets identified by the Local Planning Authority (for example: locally listed buildings, archaeological sites and monuments identified on the Historic Environment Record (HER) and historic landscapes).

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

A long history of settlement characterises the cultural heritage of the Study Area, containing designated and non- designated cultural heritage assets dating from the earliest (Palaeolithic) occupation of the area through to the modern period. The Thames River gravels are of particular importance in terms of archaeological interest due to their preferential settlement and exploitation in the past. The catchment is noted to contain some of the most important and best researched archaeological sites in England. These include a series of early Mesolithic settlements along the Kennet Valley, Avebury, the Roman towns of Silchester and Verulamium, and the Saxon and medieval city of Oxford. Among the many country estates, Blenheim Palace, the seat of the Dukes of Marlborough, is of international renown. More recently, this region has been the focus of political dissent during the Cold War, around the nuclear facilities at Greenham Common and Upper Heyford (Hey and Hind, 2014).

The River Thames has always been an important river and evidence of human exploitation and use of the river can be found along its entire length. Archaeological investigation in advance of gravel extraction at sites such as Dorchester-on-Thames has demonstrated the intensive and extensive occupation that occurred across these river terraces in the past. The Thames Gravels and overlying Holocene deposits also contain a wealth of buried evidence relating to past landscapes, climate change and human interaction with the wider environment. These are identified as deposits of paleoenvironmental and geoarchaeological interest.

Features such as former mill sites, docks, industrial sites, watermeadows and ozier beds are to be found along the length of the Thames and a number of the tributary rivers within the Study Area. Water mills are often associated with significant alterations to watercourses including the creation of channels, known as leats or races, and mill ponds. The River Thames has been, and continues to be, an important communications route. The 16 th and 17 th centuries saw the installation of locks and weirs for navigation and power. These enabled growth of the towns and cities of Oxford, Reading, Guildford and London. The current maritime trade centres of the London and Medway ports came to the fore in this period. During the 18 th century, the River Thames became one of the world’s busiest waterways. It facilitated transportation of wool, timber, foodstuffs and livestock. The water control structures supporting this form an important part of the Study Area’s cultural heritage.

Research shows an under-representation of river related features in archaeological records. A lack of study of weirs, sluices, bridge remains, and industrial features contributes to this.

NPPF Section 16, Paragraph 194, identifies WHS, Grade I and Grade II* Listed Buildings, Scheduled Monuments, Grade I and II* RPG and Battlefields as cultural heritage assets of the highest significance. Within the Study Area, the following heritage assets of the highest significance are recorded (as shown on Figure 5.8, excluding Listed Buildings which are shown on Figure 5.9):

• Two WHS comprising: Blenheim Palace; and Avebury, forming part of the wider Stonehenge and Avebury WHS (Stonehenge itself is outside the Study Area). • 878 Grade I Listed Buildings, with a notable cluster of these located within the city of Oxford, mostly covering the university colleges and associated buildings, and Windsor and Eton. • 2092 Grade II* Listed Building which are widely distributed across the Study Area. • 1399 Scheduled Monuments including significant clusters on the chalk downs of the Stonehenge landscape in the south-west of the Study Area, the Roman town of Verulamium at St Albans in the north-east, and the Roman town of Silchester (Calleva Atrebatum) in the south. However, the Scheduled Monuments are widely dispersed across the Study Area and include a broad range of monument types spanning many different periods. • 103 Grade I and Grade II* RPG. • Seven Battlefields.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 5.8: Key historic environment designations (excluding Listed Buildings – see Figure 5.9)

The remaining designated cultural heritage assets are widely distributed across the Study Area and include:

• 36729 Grade II Listed Buildings. • 141 Grade II RPG. Listing Buildings are shown on Figure 5.9.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 5.9: Listed Buildings

There are also numerous Conservation Areas recorded within the Study Area which are designated on a local basis by Local Authorities. Data regarding the number and extent of these designated cultural heritage assets are not centrally recorded. These will be incorporated into the baseline at a later stage as the Scheme is developing location specific approaches. Further consideration of Historic Landscape Characterisation data and the National Character Areas (see Section 5.4 and Figure 5.6) will also be undertaken at a later stage.

5.5.2 Future Trends The future baseline for cultural heritage is very much dependent on the actions of others to conserve and manage cultural heritage assets (both designated and non-designated). Current policies and laws are likely to continue to require the conservation and enhancement of cultural heritage assets. However, in the absence of action to maintain them or keep them in active use, the condition of cultural heritage assets will deteriorate.

Climate change will impact cultural heritage assets. Predicted climate extremes will affect both known and unknown cultural heritage assets (such as buried archaeological remains and deposits of paleoenvironmental or geological interest). Prolonged dry periods, intense storms and wetter winters will affect cultural heritage assets in different ways. Changes in groundwater, for example, may affect waterlogged archaeological and paleoenvironmental remains. A higher risk of flooding is more likely to cause damage to historic buildings, and extreme climatic variations may damage the fabric of historic buildings for example through shrink/swell or frost fracture. Increased rainfall will cause rivers to flow faster in certain times of the year. Higher erosion rates may expose archaeological features or damage designated historic buildings.

There are also opportunities arising from climate change in respect of cultural heritage (Historic England, 2016) including, but not limited to, the following: opportunity to restore lost heritage features which may aid with flood 87

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

defence and increasing biodiversity, such as hedgerows and water meadows; opportunity for learning from the past, such as historic approaches to climate change, coastal erosion and flood defence, to inform future strategies; opportunity for heritage in helping to communicate change; increased opportunities for community engagement and broadening access to heritage; and extended tourist season with opportunity for increased interest in heritage.

5.5.3 Strategic Issues

The SA will include consideration of the conservation and, where possible, enhancement of designated cultural heritage assets in line with national and local policy and relevant statutes. For example, reusing or restoring designated cultural heritage assets, that would allow for their long-term conservation or where other opportunities are identified as highlighted above.

The SA will look for opportunities for including/reusing cultural heritage assets and/or historic landscape elements when assessing approaches. For example, reusing or restoring heritage assets, such as former mill channels, watermeadow systems, ozier beds or historic field boundaries, which could contribute to and enhance NFM, biodiversity, landscape, and natural capital.

5.6 Air Quality

5.6.1 Current Baseline

Overview

Air quality is a measure of how clean or polluted the air is. Air pollution is caused by the emission of pollutants, which either directly or through chemical reactions in the atmosphere lead to negative impacts on human health and ecosystems. There are many sources of air pollution, including power stations, transport, household heating, agriculture and industrial processes.

Historically, the main air pollution problem in developed countries has typically been high levels of smoke and sulphur dioxide emitted following the combustion of sulphur-containing fossil fuels such as coal. As shown in Figure 5.10, air pollution in the UK has declined significantly over recent decades through measures to reduce pollution, levelling off more recently. These days, the major threat to clean air is now posed by traffic emissions, with motor vehicles emitting a wide variety of pollutants.

Figure 5.10: Air Pollution in the UK

Poor air quality is one of the greatest environmental risks to public health in the UK. It is known to exacerbate the impact of pre-existing health conditions, such as respiratory and cardio-vascular illnesses, especially in the elderly

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

and infants. Air contaminants can also have adverse impacts on sensitive ecological receptors, through deposition of dust which can alter photosynthetic processes and of gases which can acidify soils, affecting ecosystem health.

Key air pollutants

‘Emissions of air pollutants in the UK’ (UK Government, 2021) provides information on six key air pollutants in the UK:

• Particulate matter (PM10 and PM2.5): wide range of sources covering domestic activity (including burning wood in closed stoves and open fires), industrial activity, power generation, transport and agriculture. • Nitrogen oxides (NOx): road transport activity is the most significant source (33% of emissions of NOx in 2019, with a further 14% attributable to other forms of transport). Energy production and transformation accounted for 18% of annual emissions in 2019. • Ammonia (NH3): agriculture sector is the most significant source (88% of emissions of ammonia in 2019), primarily linked to herd sizes and the extent of fertiliser spreading. • Non-methane volatile organic compounds (NMVOCs): wide range of sources including industrial solvent use and chemical manufacture as the most significant sources of NMVOCs in 2019, with domestic use of solvents (for example household cleaning products) and the food and beverages industry (primarily from the manufacture of Scotch Whisky, bread baking, and manufacture of animal feeds) contributing 20% and 14% of annual emissions respectively. • Sulphur dioxide (SO2): the most significant source from domestic combustion (28% of emissions of SO2 in 2019), with combustion by manufacturing industries and combustion in energy production and transformation each contributing 23% of annual emissions.

Ambient concentrations for a number of these pollutants are measured continuously at a wide range of rural and urban locations throughout the UK. In the UK, Part IV of the Environment Act 1995 sets out the Local Air Quality Management process, whereby local authorities report compliance against the UK air quality objectives (AQOs) to Defra.

Air Quality Management Areas

In locations not anticipated to meet the AQOs, the Environment Act requires that an Air Quality Management Area (AQMA) be declared. Where an AQMA is declared, the local authority is obliged to produce an Air Quality Action Plan in pursuit of the achievement of the AQOs.

Within the Study Area, there are 138 AQMAs, predominantly declared as a result of exceedances of the annual mean NO 2 AQO. As shown on Figure 5.11, they are all within the urban areas of the Study Area, including Oxford, the western edges of outer London, Reading, Marlborough and Reigate.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 5.11: Air Quality Management Areas

5.6.2 Future Trends

Natural processes which regulate air quality will continue to be unable to cope with emissions from human activity. There is an increasing trend in particulate matter emissions from wood burning in a domestic setting and by solid fuel burning by industry (particularly use of biomass). Where industries continue to grow (for example food and beverages) these will have associated increased emissions unless offset by new technologies. As detailed further in Section 5.7, climate change will have a number of consequences. If NOx concentrations are not mitigated, increased bright sunshine in the summer months could potentially exacerbate photochemical smog and cause health issues.

Annual mean NO 2 concentrations are anticipated to decrease into the future due to the reduction in road traffic emissions associated with improvements in emissions technology and electric vehicles. There is currently uncertainty surrounding the rate of uptake, but actions such as the UK Government banning the sale of new combustion-engine vehicles by 2030 will help increase it.

Whilst the above will have a small impact on PM emissions from vehicles, sources of PM are often less localised than NOx emission sources, so changes to PM emissions and concentrations are less certain in the future.

5.6.3 Strategic Issues

No strategic issues relating to air quality have been identified at this stage. Flood risk management approaches rarely result in operational air quality effects and by reducing the risk of flooding-related traffic disruption and clean-up activities in urban areas would generally have a positive effect on local air quality, albeit small in nature.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Consideration of air pollution resulting from dust generation and vehicle emissions during construction would be undertaken at an individual project level, with further assessment required where there are sensitive human or ecological receptors located within set distances from any construction site boundaries.

This topic has been retained within the SA to consider if there are relevant opportunities as the Scheme progresses to include measures which could improve air quality within the Study Area, for example: the inclusion of extensive tree planting which could filter air and contribute to improved local air quality, or enhancing and extending cycling and walking networks and encouraging sustainable transport methods.

5.7 Climate Change

5.7.1 Current Baseline

Greenhouse Gas Emissions In 2018, UK emissions of the basket of seven greenhouse gases covered by the Kyoto Protocol were estimated to be 451.5 million tonnes carbon dioxide equivalent (MtCO 2e), a decrease of 2.1% compared to the 2017 figure of 461.0 million tonnes. Greenhouse gas emissions in 2018 are estimated to be 43.1% lower than they were in 1990 (UK National Statistics).

• The decrease in greenhouse gas emissions from 2017 was mainly caused by reductions in emissions in the energy supply sector, down 6.6% (7.4 MtCO2e). This was driven by the continued decrease in power station emissions due to the change in the fuel mix for electricity generation, in particular a reduction in the use of coal and gas. Emissions from energy supply are now 62.3% lower than they were in 1990. • Emissions from transport fell by 1.4% (1.8 MtCO2e) in 2018, their first fall since 2013. Despite this transport remains the largest emitting sector, responsible for 28% of all greenhouse gas emissions in the UK. Transport emissions are only 3.0% lower than in 1990, as increased road traffic has largely offset improvements in vehicle fuel efficiency. • Between 2017 and 2018 emissions from the business sector decreased by 2.5% (2.1 MtCO2e) caused by falls from industrial combustion and from refrigeration and air conditioning. Emissions from industrial processes decreased by 7.3% (0.8 MtCO2e), caused by reduced emissions from the production of ammonia, halocarbons, iron and steel. • There was an increase of 3.8% (2.5 MtCO2e) in residential sector emissions, driven by an increase in the use of natural gas for heating due to colder weather in the first half of 2018. Similarly, there was a 3.7% increase in public sector emissions. Emissions from both of these sectors tend to vary from year to year depending on the temperature. • Carbon dioxide (CO2) is the most important greenhouse gas from the Kyoto “basket” of greenhouse gases, accounting for 81% of total UK greenhouse gas emissions in 2018. The latest figures show: • UK net CO2 emissions were estimated to be 365.7 Mt in 2018, which was 2.2% lower than the 2017 figure of 373.8 Mt. This decrease in CO2 emissions was mainly due to the decrease in the use of coal and gas for electricity generation (as described above). Between 1990 and 2018 UK net CO2 emissions have decreased by 38.6%.

Many local authorities in UK are making a commitment to tackling climate change and 74% to date have declared a Climate Emergency. In the Study Area, per capita emissions of CO 2 have also fallen from a range of 5 to 9 tonnes CO 2 per capita per year in 2005 to a new range of 3 to 5 tonnes per capita per year in 2018. The highest emissions per capita were in West Berkshire in 2005 (9t), the lowest in Slough (5.4t); in 2018, the highest remains as West Berkshire (5.7t) and the lowest was Reading (3.2t). Most local authorities reduced per capita emissions by 3 to 4t per capita, although those with lower emissions in 2005 reduced by less than this. This equates to reductions of up to 50%, including in areas like West Berkshire, with the highest emissions in the Study Area.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

State of the UK Climate The UK State of the Climate report (2019) details the climate baseline for a range of indicators. Highlights are shown below:

• Land temperature: 2019 was the 12th warmest year since 1884, all of the top 10 warmest years since 1884 have occurred since 2002. • Air and ground frost: 2019 was the sixth consecutive year where the number of air and ground frosts was below average (since 1961). • Rainfall: England and Wales had the fifth wettest autumn since 1766, 6 of the 10 wettest years since 1862 have occurred since 1998. • Snow: substantial snow events have occurred four times since 2000 but their number and severity has generally declined since the 1960s.

For the Study Area, Met Office information relating to Southern England has been used as a reasonable proxy. Climate variables are shown below:

• Land temperature: Mean annual temperature ranges from 9.5 to 11.5ºC; maximum temperatures are usually around 21ºC although can be much higher; temperatures in Southern England are generally higher than more northern regions. The long term annual average for Southern England (from 1981 to 2010) is 14 ºC , with a low of 7.3 ºC and a high of 21.6 ºC. • Rainfall: the Thames Valley has an average rainfall of 650mm; the driest part of England has approximately 500mm of rainfall, the Scottish Highlands 4000mm of rainfall. The long term annual average (from 1981 to 2010) is 724mm in the Thames Valley. Southern England is susceptible to summer thunderstorms and high intensity rainfall, however the lack of rainfall and dry periods at time place demands on water supplies (see Section 5.2).

5.7.2 Future Trends

Greenhouse Gas Emissions

Between the baseline (2005) and 2018, UK emissions fell by 43%; they are predicted to fall a further 24% by 2040. Given that the reductions in per capita emissions within the Study Area have followed a similar pattern of reduction since 2005, it can be reasonably assumed they will continue to fall in a similar fashion to that predicted for the UK as a whole.

State of the Climate

In 2018 the Met Office updated it projections for the Climate in the UK (UKCP18). In its September 2019 report, it presents the following headlines for the UK:

• Temperature: By the end of the 21st century, all areas of the UK are projected to be warmer, more so in summer than in winter; hot summers are predicted to become more common. • Rainfall: Projections show that winter rainfall is likely to increase. Summers show an overall drying trend through to 2100, however new data from UKCP Local (2.2km) dataset suggests future increases in the intensity of heavy summer rainfall events • Extreme weather: Future climate change is projected to bring about a change in the seasonality of extremes with an extension of the convective season from summer into autumn, with significant increases in heavy hourly rainfall intensity in the autumn. In addition, it is predicted there will be significant increases in hourly rainfall extremes in the future.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Implications for the Study Area include hotter drier summers (in general) with subsequent increases in pressure on water demand and supply and increased frequency and intensity of summer rainfall events extending into the autumn, with subsequent increases in the risk of flooding.

5.7.3 Strategic Issues

The Environment Agency aims to reduce its organisational carbon footprint to net zero by 2030 and zero by 2050. Baseline information has identified that about half of the total organisational footprint is related to flood risk management construction activities. The Scheme will emphasise approaches which do not make significant contributions to a ‘carbon footprint’ and will require the adoption of low carbon construction materials and practices. It is anticipated that this will include adoption of developing low carbon technologies.

Greenhouse gas emissions will also be taken into account in terms of the potential for carbon storage associated with potential approaches and locations for the Scheme. Changes in land use will be assessed for their potential to sequester carbon and offer a net reduction.

Climate change will be assessed at a strategic level initially, and then as the Scheme progresses, its impacts and opportunities in relation to carbon emissions will be assessed in detail.

In terms of climate impacts, key issues for the Scheme relate to the avoidance, reduction and offsetting of carbon emissions so as to reduce the potential carbon impact, and the potential for it to increase resilience to future climate impacts. Adaptation is a key focus for national policy on climate change; the climate is already changing and it is critical the country adapts to meet the challenge. Climate adaptation will be taken into account in the SA through consideration of the ability of the approaches to facilitate it, for example through:

• Managing future flood risks that can’t be fully predicted. • Stabilising water resources, as more intensive rainfall will mean reduced overall groundwater recharge as well as longer dry spells. • Reducing temperatures through intelligent landscape planning and design to reduce soil desiccation and urban heat-islands.

5.8 Resource Use and Waste

5.8.1 Current baseline

Overview

Society is dependent on materials for the production and consumption of goods and services that fulfil human needs and improve quality of life. As local, national and global populations continue to grow and aspirations of developing and emerging economies rise, there is increasing pressure on our resources and environment. Not only are material resources finite, their use contributes to increasing greenhouse gas emissions and ultimately they frequently become contributors to a rising level of waste being produced. Waste has impacts on a wide variety of environmental aspects, including (but not limited to) biodiversity of rivers and seas (plastics – including microplastics) air quality (odour), greenhouse gas emissions (methane); and water quality (leachate).

There is currently no measurement of materials consumed at a local authority level and limited information at a regional level. Waste collected statistics are provided by local authorities to the UK government each year, including recycling and recovery rates.

This baseline will use national statistics in relation to materials consumption and waste to enable a complete picture to be presented. Whilst some differences across the country will occur in terms of resource efficiency and waste, the national picture is taken to be a reasonable proxy for what is likely to be happening across the Study Area.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Materials Consumption

In terms of the types of resources considered, the UK Environmental Accounts (ONS 2016) presents estimates of all material consumption, taking the extraction of raw materials and physical imports and exports into account. There are 4 broad categories of materials: biomass (crops, wood and fish), metal ores (iron and non-ferrous metals), non-metallic minerals (such as construction materials) and fossil energy materials (coal, oil and gas). The trends in consumption from 2000 to 2013 are presented in the ONS Statistical release as follows:

Extraction of raw materials

This has gradually declined, falling 41.7% from 717.9 million tonnes in 2000 to 418.7 million tonnes in 2013. The sharpest fall was observed in 2009 during the economic downturn, when the quantity extracted decreased by 12.2% compared with the previous year.

The main types of materials extracted are:

• non-metallic minerals (largest amount of extracted material): o sand and gravel (113.9 million tonnes in 2013), o limestone and gypsum (58.1 million tonnes in 2013), (largely for construction activities.

• Biomass: o a large quantity of fodder crops (56.5 million tonnes in 2013) are produced each year, which are used mainly for animal feed, although in recent years an increasing proportion has been used for producing biogas.

• Fossil energy materials: o Decline in extraction in the UK since 2000, although the quantity imported has increased.

• Metal ores: less than 10,000 tonnes have been extracted each year since 2000.

Import and Export of Materials

The weight of imports at all stages of manufacture was 4.9 tonnes per person in 2013, 1.3 times higher than in 2000; however, this does not take account of the weight of raw materials extracted to make the products. To overcome this, ONS have used a new model to estimate Raw Material Equivalents (RME) and applied it back to 2000. This model shows that the weights of RME have declined over the period and may be an indication of increased resource efficiency across the UK.

Use of Secondary Materials

Detailed information relating to the use of secondary materials is currently confined to the use of secondary or recycled aggregates. The UK government promoted their use through the introduction of an ‘aggregate levy’ in 2002; an environmental text to reduce the extraction of fresh aggregate (rock, sand and gravel). The use of recycled and secondary aggregates has grown across the UK since records began in 1995, and more steeply following the introduction of the levy, however the growth has plateaued in recent years. Consumption is still significantly higher in Great Britain than Europe: recycled and secondary materials are estimated to represent nearly 30% of the market in Great Britain; the average across Europe is approximately 10%.

Other Types of Resource Use

There are other types of resource use within the Study Area which are considered elsewhere in this document: land use is described in Sections 4.3, 4.5 and 4.6; water resources are described in Section 5.2; energy consumption (presented in the form of greenhouse gas emissions) is described in Section 5.7.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Resource Supply

In addition to understanding resources being consumed within the Study Area, a review of the resources assets has also been carried out. There are many types of resources which could fall under this category including, for example, food resources. Food and other resources, such as woodland are identified under ‘land use’ in Section 4.3. This section focuses on the resource of mon-metallic minerals within the Study Area. The South East holds a diverse geology with significant areas of clays and sands; chalk; limestone, and shale; and sandstone. The remainder of the UK primarily holds igneous rock, limestone and sandstones. As such, the South East region holds much of the country’s economic mineral resources. Parts of the South West which are within the Study Area have similar mineral resources.

Across the Study Area, there are large deposits of sand and gravel, chalk and clay, which are used in major construction projects and agricultural activities. Minerals and Waste Local Plans (See Section 3 and Appendix B) protect this resource and allocate specific sites, as shown in Table 5.5.

Table 5.5: Sand, gravel and crushed rock resource (Annual Average of Mt of all sites identified up to the year of the Plans production date.)

Minerals and Waste Plan Area Number of Allocated Sites Level of Resource (Million tonnes (Mt)

Berkshire Joint Authorities 15 12 1

Buckinghamshire 5 11

Central and Eastern Berkshire 2 5 6

Gloucestershire 7 105 3

Hampshire 12 (additional 5 proposed) 16 4

Hertfordshire 14 (additional 3 proposed) 1.54

Northamptonshire 7 3

Oxfordshire 4 8

Surrey 10 13

Wiltshire & Swindon 5 8.5 1 Many of these sites have now been worked and therefore do not provide a useful picture of minerals allocations in the Berkshire Area, therefore the emerging versions of the Mineral Local Plans will be of more use for up to date information. 2 Includes Bracknell Forest Council, Reading Borough Council, the Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead and Wokingham Borough Council (not adopted yet) 3 Potential yield. Gloucestershire estimate that 100% of future minerals requirements can be satisfied through their seven allocated sites. 4 Some sites do not have the total resource identified as it is currently unknown

Waste

The approach by Minerals and Waste authorities is to apply the principles of sustainable waste management and the waste hierarchy. Following prevention, recycling and recovery facilities are favoured over landfill sites, however there are capacity issues for waste management in some parts of the Study Area, with wastes being exported out of the various county areas to neighbours or further afield for treatment. Central and Eastern Berkshire, for example exports waste to Oxfordshire, Slough and Surrey.

Local authority waste statistics for 2019/20 were reviewed for all of the Upper-Tier and Unitary authorities within the Study Area. It is understood that this does not give the whole picture with respect to recycling rates but does give a reasonable overview for this stage in the Scheme development. A summary is presented in Table 5.6.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table 5.6: Local Authority Recycling Rates

Local Authority Local authority Local authority Recycling/reuse rate collected waste - sent collected waste - not for recycling- sent for recycling composting-reuse (tonnes) (tonnes)

Bracknell Forest Borough Council 21146 27837 43

Buckinghamshire Council* 124758 106919 54

Central Bedfordshire 58947 68575 46

Gloucestershire County Council 149333 152042 50

Hampshire County Council 258963 364067 42

Hertfordshire County Council 261295 248467 51

Luton Borough Council 29853 58036 34

Northamptonshire Council* 174572 184671 49

Oxfordshire County Council 179708 122120 60

Reading Borough Council 21419 44293 33

Slough Borough Council 13878 45636 23

Surrey County Council 292008 237161 55

Swindon Borough Council 41364 52203 44

Warwickshire County Council 140650 139005 50

West Berkshire District Council 37559 37980 50

West Sussex County Council 223682 198848 53

Wiltshire 105770 126798 45

Windsor and Maidenhead Borough Council 30216 36172 46

Wokingham Council 36253 35210 51

TOTALS 2201374 2286040 49 *Recently become unitary authorities. Data is provided at County level for this year.

These rates of recycling and reuse are substantially higher than in 2000 when records were first collected on a consistent basis and recycling rates were closer to 10%. Some local authorities are still relatively low, such as Slough at 23% and Reading at 33%.

This table also shows that, despite commitments to the waste hierarchy there remains a requirement for some waste to be disposed of to landfill. Currently there are 170 active landfill sites within the Study Area, with clusters to the west of Slough and the M25, the city of Oxford border and Swindon area (see Figure 5.12). Some of these landfills are former quarries, which historically produced the aggregates discussed in Section 5.8.

In terms of historical landfill sites there are 1813 within the Study Area, of varying sizes and categories. Clusters exist on the outskirts of predominantly urban areas such as the city of Oxford, Slough, St Albans and Reading. There is particular concentration on the eastern boundary of the Study Area between Staines and Heathrow Airport. There are a number of previously worked quarries and gravel pits in this area: many are now lakes becoming part of the alluvial flood meadows; it is reasonable to assume that some became used for landfill in the past. This, plus proximity to a direct route from London, may explain the cluster in this area.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 5.12: Landfill Sites

5.8.2 Future Trends

In the UK Government’s 25-year plan, it commits to the UK becoming a world leader in resource efficiency and reducing the amount of waste produced. It proposes to move away from the traditional (and inefficient) linear model of ‘take, make, use and throw’ and replace it with a circular economy (see Figure 5.13).

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Figure 5.13: Circular Economy

Notwithstanding this, predictions for population and economic growth in the Study Area suggest that resource consumption and waste arisings may rise. The need for new homes in the South East and South West, including the Study Area and the infrastructure required to support these is likely to increase demand for aggregates, even accounting for a significant proportion being secondary or recycled materials.

All of the county plans for minerals and waste predict a growth in the need for aggregates, especially for use in construction. In addition to the existing sites, provisions are being made to facilitate the extensions to some of those sites and for new sites, albeit under strict criteria from the perspective of communities and environmental constraints. All counties are also planning for a rise in waste arisings; given existing capacity issues in some parts of the Study Area, the need for new treatment and disposal facilities is being considered and planned for.

Since minerals are a non-renewable resource, minerals safeguarding is the process of ensuring that non-minerals development does not needlessly prevent the future extraction of mineral resources, of local and national importance. The Minerals and Waste Plans published by the relevant authorities in the Study Area include identified areas safeguarded for future minerals extraction, known as Minerals Safeguarding Areas (MSAs).

5.8.3 Strategic Issues

In terms of the use of aggregates, sustainable resource use requires that in considering the potential approaches to managing flood risk the best approach would be one which uses the least, or preferably no, new material. Therefore, the likely requirement for aggregate use will be considered in the SA in the consideration of the alternatives through the use of SA objectives relating to this.

Consideration will be given to the location of active, historic and planned landfill sites when the assessment of potential approaches has progressed to becoming location specific, in order to identify any potential impacts of both flood risk and flood risk management works on soil and water pollution.

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

MSAs will be considered further at the next stage of the SA at which time mapping of these and other allocated sites will help to inform the consideration of approaches which are more location specific.

6. Sustainability Appraisal Framework

6.1 Introduction

The SA Framework enables the contribution of the Scheme to sustainable development to be assessed. This will be done by testing the Scheme against a series of SA objectives and underpinning draft criteria.

6.2 Identification of Objectives

The draft SA objectives have been derived from a review of certain legislation, plans and programmes (see Section 3) and an assessment of the baseline sustainability conditions in the Study Area, which identified strategic issues of relevance to the Scheme. These were then developed into positive SA objectives for the Scheme to contribute towards. The issues and draft SA objectives are presented in Table 6.1. The summary of key issues identified within the Study Area for each topic is not exhaustive, and will be refined as the Scheme progresses, but is intended to provide justification for scoping in a particular topic in at this stage.

No SA topics have been excluded through the scoping exercise, as at this stage of the Scheme development all remain relevant; if any additional topics or issues are identified through the Consultation exercise, these will be considered for addition to the SA process. No transboundary impacts are possible as part of the Scheme and so this aspect of assessment is scoped out. As the Scheme progresses, some topics may become less relevant and excluded from the assessment. This is part of the continuing review of the SA objectives.

Table 6.1: Summary of Topics and Issues and the SA objectives SA Topic Relevant Issues SA Objective Social

Population • History of major flood events To reduce the risk of flooding to protect existing and future and Human • Population and properties within flood risk areas populations and properties. Health • Population and numbers of properties are To reduce the risk of flooding to community facilities. predicted to increase significantly to 2100 To reduce the health impacts of flooding, including from the • The different needs of minority and vulnerable fear of flooding and its associated health effects. groups within the Study Area including an ageing To enhance access to and provision of quality greenspace. population, ethnic minorities who may speak a different language, people with disabilities and To ensure equal protection for all people, regardless of age, social deprived communities. ethnicity, disability or social status.

Access and • Access to countryside and recreational facilities To reduce the risk of flooding to recreational facilities. Recreation • Green and Blue infrastructure To maintain and where possible enhance existing access links • Increased pressure on the countryside and connectivity to greenspaces, heritage assets, historic landscapes, and civic amenities.

To support the provision of new green-blue infrastructure.

To protect navigation routes within the Study Area.

Economy

Economic • Significant employment in health and To support and where possible enhance sustainable economic Activity professional service opportunities for the local and wider economy including the • Agricultural economy significant contribution to rural economy. rural economy • Large recreational areas and nationally significant tourism hotspots

Flooding • Cost of flooding To minimise the risks and cost of flooding. and the • Increased costs under climate change and Economy household projections

100

SA Topic Relevant Issues SA Objective Land Use • Vast majority (>90%) of land is agricultural land To support the sustainable use of land in rural areas, including and the • This land use is important to the rural economy agricultural land Economy and a sustainable, secure supply of food locally and nationally. • Predicted changes in land use (including potential for rural land to become allocated for housing)

Material • Presence of critical infrastructure (transport, To support the operation and maintenance of existing critical Assets hospitals, power stations and utilities) and third- infrastructure party assets • Increased requirement for critical infrastructure and third-party assets as a result of population and economic growth • Major infrastructure projects (for example HS2 and Oxford-Cambridge Arc) in the Study Area

Environment

Biodiversity • Significant number of international, national, To protect and where possible enhance internationally and regional and local designated sites nationally designated sites. • Priority habitats and protected species To protect and enhance biodiversity.

Water • High number of surface waterbodies and To protect the status of surface and groundwater bodies. groundwater bodies not achieving Good status To protect the quality and availability of water resources. • Water resources in short supply and demand increasing • infrastructure investments in the Study Area • Significant flood events since 2000

Soils and • Soil characteristics potentially damaged by the To manage risks from flooding to soil and to maintain and Geology Scheme enhance existing soil characteristics. • Groundwater bodies in poor status

Landscape • Significant number of designations or features To protect and enhance local landscape character and quality, and Visual that are sensitive to change at a landscape scale protected viewpoints and strengthen local distinctiveness and Amenity or to changes in their setting, including five sense of place. AONBs • Increased pressure on landscape from population growth

Cultural • Significant number of known designated assets To maintain and enhance cultural heritage assets and the Heritage and and their settings historic environment. Archaeology • Potential for ‘unknown’ or buried archaeological remains within Study Area

Air Quality • Many AQMAs in the Study Area – mostly in the To minimise impacts to air quality for the local and wider lower reaches close to London or in urban community. populations

Climate • Greenhouse gas emissions reducing To reduce greenhouse gas emissions and enhance carbon Change • Potential for embodied carbon in flood risk management opportunities. management measures To enable climate change adaptation and resilience. • Increased temperatures, rainfall and extreme weather

Resource • Large number of existing and historic landfill sites To reduce the risk of flooding to resource and waste sites. Use and • Landfill sites in the Study Area To minimise the use of natural resources and maximise Waste • Source protection zones in the Study Area opportunities to reuse waste. • Use of primary or secondary aggregates • Allocated and safeguarded sites for mineral extraction affected by the Scheme.

101

6.3 The Sustainability Appraisal Framework

To aid the assessment process and to ensure a robust and transparent approach to the SA, the SA Framework has been developed (see Table 6.2). The SA Framework is a ‘live’ document and will be reviewed regularly, based on consultation comments received, availability of further baseline information, and any issues and opportunities that may not have been identified to date.

Table 6.2 expands upon the SA objectives into this SA Framework. In this, a range of draft criteria and indicators associated with achieving the objectives have been identified to ensure robustness and transparency in the future appraisal process. The draft criteria focus specifically on the items which are of direct relevance to the Scheme and the Study Area and are essentially sub-objectives, to serve as guidance questions for the appraiser. The SA objectives are not mutually exclusive, as with the sustainability topics, for example cultural heritage, landscape and rural economy are all inter-linked. The inter-relationships are also listed in Table 6.2. The acknowledgement of such inter-relationships will continue in later stages of the SA process.

The SA Framework also includes potential indicators for future monitoring. The monitoring indicators outlined for each objective are primarily derived from relevant indicators identified at the national, regional and local level. These indicators will be used to measure progress against the identified SA objectives in the implementation and operation of the programme of works which are eventually identified for the Scheme.

102

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table 6.2: The SA Framework Topic Objective Objective Draft Criteria Inter -relationships Potential Indicators Number with topics

Social and Economic

Population and 1 To reduce the risk of flooding to Will the Scheme be effective in addressing flood risk to protect • Access and • Standards of Protection Population Human Health protect existing and future populations existing and future populations (including the socially Recreation; and within the floodplain Risk to Life and properties. vulnerable, deprived areas and aging population) and • Economic properties? Activity.

Will the Scheme help address flood risk in the identified 10% Most Deprived Areas?

2 To reduce the risk of flooding to Will the Scheme be effective in addressing flood risk to protect community facilities. existing community facilities?

3 To reduce the health impacts of Will the Scheme be effective in addressing flood risk to protect flooding, including from the fear of the health and wellbeing of local communities? flooding and its associated health effects.

4 To enhance access to and provision of Will the Scheme enhance access to and provision of quality quality greenspace. greenspace?

Will the Scheme enhance access to and provision of quality greenspace in the identified 10% Most Deprived Areas?

5 To ensure equal protection for all Does the Scheme include approaches to flood risk management people, regardless of age, ethnicity, which are suitable for all people including older people, ethnic disability or social status. minorities; people with disabilities and socially deprived people?

Access and 6 To reduce the risk of flooding to Will the Scheme be effective in addressing flood risk to protect • Population and • Length of footpaths access, quality Recreation recreational facilities. recreational facilities? Human Health; and quantity of recreational resources • Material Assets; 7 To maintain or improve existing access Will the Scheme affect access or connectivity for existing and • Local Green Infrastructure Strategies • Biodiversity; and links and connectivity to greenspaces, future populations? For example, access to waterfronts, and Policies delivery. heritage assets, historic landscapes, greenspaces, countryside i.e. features that contribute to well- and civic amenities. being or recreational and green infrastructure?

103

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Topic Objective Objective Draft Criteria Inter -relationships Potential Indicators Number with topics • Landscape and 8 To support the provision of new green- Will the Scheme provide support to improve and/or facilitate the Visual Amenity. blue infrastructure. provision of new green-blue infrastructure?

9 To protect navigation routes within the Will the approach affect existing navigation routes and/or Study Area. provide an opportunity to improve routes?

Economic 10 To support and where possible enhance Will the Scheme affect existing employment land or its viability? • Population and • Number of days particular parcels of Activity economic opportunities for the local Human Health; land flood such as agricultural land and wider economy, including the rural Will the Scheme support the rural economy? • Access and economy. Recreation; Will the Scheme affect existing tourist development and/or • provide an opportunity to improve? Flooding and the Economy;

• Land Use and the Economy;

• Material Assets;

• Major Accidents and Disasters;

• Water;

• Climate Change.

Flooding and 11 To minimise the risks and cost of Will the Scheme reduce flood risk to economic assets within the • Population and the Economy flooding. local communities such as businesses? Human Health;

• Economic Activity.

Land Use and 12 To support the sustainable use of land Does the Scheme provide the opportunity to manage or reduce • Population and • Agricultural Land. the Economy in rural areas, including agricultural flood risk to improve productivity of agricultural land? Human Health; • Classification Grade. land • Economic • Number of days agricultural land Does the Scheme affect land used for economic purposes in the Activity; and rural settlements? flooded. • Flooding and the • Changes to agricultural output. Economy.

Material Assets Will the Scheme help manage flood risk to critical infrastructure?

104

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Topic Objective Objective Draft Criteria Inter -relationships Potential Indicators Number with topics

13 To support the operation and provision Will the Scheme help manage flood risk to critical infrastructure: • Population and • Connection of transport of critical infrastructure Human Health; infrastructure routes. • energy • Access and • Vulnerability to flooding (depth and • transport Recreation; duration) of roads. • health • Economic • Length of navigable river. • water Activity; • Changes to gravels and minerals • Land Use and the extraction sites. Will the Scheme affect the provision of major infrastructure Economy; • Connection of transport projects? • Biodiversity; infrastructure routes.

Will the Scheme affect local planning authorities’ allocation of • Resource Use • Waste Management sites. land? and Waste; and • Natural Capital.

Environmental

Biodiversity 14 To protect internationally and Will the Scheme manage flood risk in a way which facilitates • Water; • Percentage achievement of nationally designated species and enhancement (or prevents deterioration) of international and conservation objectives for Natura • Soils and habitats nationally important species and habitats? 2000 sites. Geology; and • Favourable condition status of SSSIs. 15 To protect and enhance biodiversity Will the Scheme affect protected habitats and species? • Climate Change; • Habitats supporting protected Will the Scheme affect migratory routes of eels and fish and/or species populations. affect nursery and spawning sites? • Creation of priority habitats. • Will the Scheme manage flood risk in a way which enhances Kilometres of water body opened up regional or locally important habitats? to fish and/or eel passage through FCRM.

Will the Scheme affect the resilience of habitats to climate • Hectares of net water dependent change? habitat created.

• Hectares of habitat created through Will the approach lead to net gain in biodiversity above the FCRM Environment Agency minimum requirement?

Will the Scheme affect peatlands?

105

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Topic Objective Objective Draft Criteria Inter -relationships Potential Indicators Number with topics

Water 16 To protect the status of surface and Will the Scheme increase or reduce the likelihood of waterbodies • Land Use and the • WER status (RBMP monitoring). groundwater bodies within the Study Area achieving Good Ecological Potential? Economy; • Kilometres of water body enhanced. • Biodiversity; and • Kilometres of water body opened up • Soils and to fish and/or eel passage Geology; • Erosion and channel movements monitoring. 17 To protect the quality and availability Will the Scheme lead to a change in the availability of water • Economic of water resources resources including for rivers and other aquatic habitats, drinking Activity; water supply and for irrigation purposes? • Water; and

Will the Scheme affect any planned infrastructure investments? • Natural Capital.

Soils and 18 To manage risks from flooding to soil Will the Scheme lead to a change in soil characteristics such as • Water; and • Soil quality Geology and to maintain and enhance existing permeability or infiltration rate? • Resource Use • Erosion and channel movements soil characteristics. and Waste monitoring. Will the Scheme lead to an increase or decrease in the erosion of land?

Will the Scheme result in movement of sediment through watercourses?

Landscape and 19 To protect and enhance local Will the Scheme affect the special qualities of sites or places of • Access and • National and Local Landscape Visual Amenity landscape character and quality, landscape value of regional, national or international Recreation; Character Areas protected viewpoints and strengthen importance? • Economic • Conservation Area appraisals. local distinctiveness and sense of place Activity; Will the Scheme maintain or enhance local landscape character? • Townscape Character Assessments. • Land Use and the • AONBs. Will the Scheme contribute to maintaining or enhancing the Economy; and • Local Authority Areas of High sense of place? • Cultural Heritage Landscape Value. and Archaeology. Will the Scheme maintain or enhance the scenic views? • Registered Parks and Gardens.

Will the Scheme ensure relevant opportunities are captured to maximise benefits?

106

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Topic Objective Objective Draft Criteria Inter -relationships Potential Indicators Number with topics

Will the Scheme affect any other initiatives/opportunities? (for example, green infrastructure strategies, AONB Management Plans, NCA Environmental Opportunities).

Cultural 20 To maintain and enhance cultural Will the Scheme impact on existing heritage assets identified in • Access and • Scheduled monuments. Heritage and heritage assets and the historic the Study Area? Recreation; • Listed buildings. Archaeology environment. • Economic • Conservation Areas. Will the Scheme ensure existing heritage assets retain their Activity; significance and current societal value? • Designated and undesignated • Land Use and the heritage places and assets of Economy; Will the Scheme allow for reusing or restoring heritage assets? regional, national or international • Biodiversity; importance.

• Soils and • Areas of significant archaeological Geology; and and paleoenvironmental potential.

• Landscape and • Damage to viability of cultural Visual Amenity heritage assets of regional, national or international importance.

• Sites and areas of heritage tourism and historic character.

• Historic land-use activities/ reversion to a former land-use.

Air Quality 21 To minimise impacts to Air Quality for Will the Scheme ensure there is no increase in NOx and SOx in • Population and • Air Quality: NOx and SOx, the local and wider community and AQMAs? Human Health; particulates. improve where possible. • Land Use and the Will the Scheme lead to an improvement in air quality? Economy; and

• Material Assets.

Climate Change 22 To reduce greenhouse gas emissions Will the Scheme reduce greenhouse gas emissions? • Population and • Greenhouse gas emissions and enhance carbon management Human Health • Level of carbon storage opportunities Will the Scheme create an opportunity to develop a carbon • Economic • Number of properties at risk. of neutral (balance carbon sink and carbon source) approach to Activity; flood risk management? flooding

107

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Topic Objective Objective Draft Criteria Inter -relationships Potential Indicators Number with topics • Flooding and the • Number of utilities at risk. of flooding 23 To enable climate change adaptation Will the Scheme facilitate communities to adapt to climate Economy; and resilience change? • Land Use and the Will the Scheme improve local and regional resilience to Climate Economy; Change impacts? • Material Assets; and Does the Scheme account for Climate Change? • Air Quality.

Resource Use 24 To reduce the risk of flooding to Will the Scheme manage flood risk to landfill and historic landfill • Biodiversity; • Primary aggregate consumption and Waste resource and waste sites. sites within the area? • Water; and • Secondary and recycled materials consumption Will the Scheme affect allocated and safeguarded sites for • Soils and mineral developments? Geology. • Changes to gravels and minerals extraction sites.

Will the Scheme avoid undue sterilisation of mineral resources? • Changes to landfill and historic landfill sites. 25 To minimise the use of natural Will the Scheme use primary aggregates? • resources and maximise opportunities Waste Management sites. to reuse waste. Will the Scheme use secondary or recycled aggregates?

Will the Scheme maximise opportunities to reuse waste?

108

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

6.4 Compatibility Testing

6.4.1 Purpose

A test of compatibility between the Scheme ambitions/objectives and the SA objectives is typically conducted at an early stage of a plan making process to help identify whether the Scheme is aligned at the outset with the principles of sustainable development.

6.4.2 Scheme Ambitions

There are a number of Scheme ambitions which cover both flood risk management and sustainability.

Flood risk management ambitions:

Environmental ambitions:

As can be seen in Table 6.3, the Scheme ambitions are broadly compatible with the SA objectives; some aspects of the Scheme are directly supportive of individual SA objectives, taken as they are in isolation for this exercise. However, taken as whole, the Scheme ambitions are in line with those for the SA.

109

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table 6.3: Scheme Ambitions and SA Objectives compatibility matrix

C: Green = Compatible NC: Red = Not Compatible -: Yellow = No Relation ?: Pink = Uncertain

Scheme Objectives

Economy

Flooding

the

to Community Facilities Community to

Blue Infrastructure Blue Protection for All for Protection

Climate Impacts Climate Economic Activity Economic Economy and Flooding Assets Material Existing Sites Designated Waterbodi Resources Water Geology and Soils Archaeology and Heritage Cultural Quality Air WasteSites and Resource to Flooding Waste and Resources Natural and Use Land Biodiversity Amenity andVisual Landscape GasEmissions Greenhouse

Flooding to People and Properties andProperties People to Flooding Flooding of Impacts Health Greenspace Equal Facilities Recreational to Flooding Connectivity and Access Green Routes Navigation – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – 4 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 18 19 SA10 SA10 SA11 SA12 SA13 SA1 SA1 SA1 SA1 SA SA SA2 SA2 SA2 SA2 SA2 SA2 SA1 SA1 SA2 SA3 SA4 SA5 SA6 SA7 SA8 SA9 Significantly reduce flood risk to homes, businesses and C C C C C C C C - C C C C - - C - - - C - - C C - infrastructure

Build climate resilience for communities, business and infrastructure C C C C C C C C C C C C C - - C C - - C - - C C C

Deliver recreational asset(s) - - - C C C C C - C - C - - C - - - C C C C C - -

Deliver environmental net gain - - - - C - C C - - - - - C C C C C C C C C C - -

Support sustainable development C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

Be delivered and maintained sustainably C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

Be delivered in partnership C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

110

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

7. Next Steps

7.1 Scheme Timeline

The Scheme is at an early stage, as is set out in Section 1 of this report. The timeline for the progression of the Scheme is set out in Section 1 and repeated here as Figure 7.1 for ease of reference.

Figure 7.1: Thames Valley Flood Scheme Timeline

7.2 Update to SA Framework

The first step following Consultation in May 2021 will be an update to the baseline, issues, SA objectives and SA Framework based upon feedback received from Stakeholders. This will mark the completion of the scoping stage of the SA.

7.3 Preliminary SA Report

Feedback from the Consultation will contribute to refining the list of potential approaches to managing flood risk in the Study Area. Initial desk-based assessments will determine the potential areas in the Study Area where approaches may be possible. The SA, using the updated framework, will be used alongside technical investigations to identify the most sustainable locations that would meet both the flood risk management and sustainability ambitions of the Scheme. Findings will be published in a Preliminary SA Report at the Consultation in 2022.

7.4 Interim SA Report

Feedback from the Engagement in 2022 will contribute to refining the list of approaches and locations being considered for short listing. The SA objectives and SA Framework will be reviewed to ensure they remain appropriate. Detailed appraisal, ecology surveys, updated hydrology, modelling and testing of approaches, and initial economics will be carried out. More detailed studies are required for the SA to assess the potential issues and opportunities associated with specific locations. Field surveys will be carried out to ‘ground truth’ the desk studies carried out at earlier stages. Using this more detailed understanding of the new, more local, Study Areas, 111

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

the relative merits and disadvantages of each approach at specific locations can be determined for each SA topic and brought together in a holistic manner. Findings will be published in an Interim SA Report in the Consultation in 2023.

112

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

8. References Barnet and Enfield London Borough Councils, Draft North London Waste Plan (2015). Available at: https://www.nlwp.net/document-centre/ (Accessed March 2021).

Barnet London Borough Council, Barnet London Local Plan Core Strategy Development Plan Document (Adopted 2012). Available at: https://www.barnet.gov.uk/planning-and-building/planning-policies-and-local-plan/local- plan. (Accessed: March 2021).

Barnet London Borough Council, London Borough of Barnet Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (2017). Available at: https://www.barnet.gov.uk/sites/default/files/barnet_lfrms_final_issued.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Basingstoke and Deane District Council, Basingstoke and Deane Local Plan (2011 to 2029) (Adopted 2016). Available at: https://www.basingstoke.gov.uk/planningpolicy#:~:text=On%2026%20May%202016%2C%20Basingstoke,for %20decisions%20on%20planning%20applications. (Accessed: March 2021).

Brent London Borough Council, Brent Local Plan Core Strategy (Adopted 2010). Available at: https://www.brent.gov.uk/media/3501185/W1.4%20Core%20Strategy%20(small).pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Brent London Borough Council, Brent Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (Date Unknown). Available at: https://www.brent.gov.uk/media/16406897/flood-risk-strategy-sept-2015.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, Aylesbury Vale Council, Aylesbury Vale Local Development Plan (2004). Available at: https://www.aylesburyvaledc.gov.uk/section/adopted-aylesbury-vale-district-local-plan-avdlp. (Accessed March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, Bracknell Forest Borough Council Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (2017-2020). Available at: https://democratic.bracknell- forest.gov.uk/documents/s105000/8.a%20Annex1LFRMS20172020FinalReport140217.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, Bracknell Forest Council, Bracknell Forest Local Plan (2002). Available at: https://www.bracknell-forest.gov.uk/planning-and-building-control/planning/planning-policy/development- plan/local-plan-2002. (Accessed: March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, Central and Eastern Berkshire Emerging Joint Minerals and Waste Plan (2036). Available at: https://www.hants.gov.uk/landplanningandenvironment/berksconsult. (Accessed: March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, Chiltern Local Plan: Core Strategy (2011). Available at: https://www.chiltern.gov.uk/article/7073/Chiltern-and-South-Bucks-Local-Plan-2036. (Accessed: March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, Landscape Character Assessment (2019). Available at: https://www.buckscc.gov.uk/services/environment/landscape/landscape-character-assessments/ (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, Buckinghamshire Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (2013). Available at: flood_risk_strategy_finalpart2%20(1).pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, Minerals and Waste Local Plan 2016-2036 Available at: https://www.buckscc.gov.uk/services/environment/planning/minerals-and-waste-local-plan/minerals-and- waste-local-plan-2016- 2036/#:~:text=The%20Buckinghamshire%20Minerals%20and%20Waste,meeting%20on%2025%20July%202 019.&text=The%20plan%20includes%20site%20allocations,waste%20development%20would%20be%20app ropriate. (Accessed: 25 March 2021). 113

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Buckinghamshire Council, Replacement Minerals Local Plan for Berkshire (2001). Available at: /pp_minerals_local_plan_for_berkshire_pt1.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Council, South Bucks Local Plan: Core Strategy (2011). Available at: https://www.southbucks.gov.uk/article/7381/Adopted-Core-Strategy-2011-#:~:text=Development%20Plan- ,Adopted%20Core%20Strategy%20(2011),in%20the%20period%20to%202026. Accessed: March 2021). Buckinghamshire Council, Wycombe District Local Plan (2009). Available at: https://www.wycombe.gov.uk/uploads/public/documents/Planning/Adopted-Wycombe-local-plan/Wycombe- District-Local-Plan-Adopted-August-2019.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Buckinghamshire Local Enterprise Partnership, Strategic Economic Plan (SEP) 2014. Available at: https://www.buckstvlep.co.uk/our-strategies/strategic-economic-plan/ (Accessed: March 2021).

Carver, D. et al., Environment Bill 2019-21: Report on Committee and Remaining stages in the Commons, House of Commons Library. Available at: https://commonslibrary.parliament.uk/research-briefings/cbp-9119/ (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

Central Bedfordshire Council, Central Bedfordshire Local Plan 2035 Pre-Submission Draft 2018. Available at: https://www.centralbedfordshire.gov.uk/migrated_images/pre-submission-local-plan-compressed-v2_tcm3- 27081.pdf

Central Bedfordshire Council, Minerals and Waste Local Plan Strategic Sites and Policies (2014). Available at: https://www.centralbedfordshire.gov.uk/info/48/minerals_and_waste/450/development_framework. (Accessed: March 2021).

Central Bedfordshire Council, Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) for Central Bedfordshire (2014). Available at: https://www.centralbedfordshire.gov.uk/migrated_images/local-flood-risk-mgmt-strategy_tcm3- 7584.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure, Unknown Title. Available at: https://www.cpni.gov.uk/ (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

Cheltenham Borough Council, The Cheltenham (2020). Available at: https://www.cheltenham.gov.uk/info/46/planning_policy/1034/the_cheltenham_plan. (Accessed: March 2021).

Cherwell District Council, The Cherwell Local Plan 2011 – 2031 (Adopted 2016). Available at: https://www.cherwell.gov.uk/info/83/local-plans/376/adopted-cherwell-local-plan-2011-2031-part-1 (Accessed: March 2021).

Cherwell District Council, Oxford City Council, Oxfordshire County Council, South Oxfordshire District Council, Vale of White Horse District Council and West Oxfordshire District Council, Draft Joint Statutory Spatial Plan: Oxfordshire Plan 2050 (OP2050). Available at: https://www.cherwell.gov.uk/info/83/local- plans/577/oxfordshire-joint-statutory-spatial-plan-jssp. (Accessed: March 2021).

Cheyne, J. et al. What’s On – Thames Tidefest (2019). Available at: https://thamestidefest.net/category/whats- on/ (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

Chichester District Council, Chichester Local Plan, Key Policies (2014-2029) (Adopted 2015). Available at: https://www.chichester.gov.uk/newlocalplan (Accessed: March 2021).

CIRIA, Flood resilience and resistance for critical infrastructure (C688) (2010). Available online: https://www.gov.uk/flood-and-coastal-erosion-risk-management-research-reports/flood-resilience-and- resistance-for-critical-infrastructure

114

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

CIRIA, Code of practice and guidance for property flood resilience (2021). Available at: https://www.ciria.org/Research/Projects_underway2/Code_of_Practice_and_guidance_for_property_flood_resili ence_.aspx (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

Climate Change Committee, UK Climate Change Risk Assessment 2017 (2017). Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/uk-climate-change-risk-assessment-2017/ (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

Climate Emergency UK, List of councils who have declared a climate emergency (2021). Available at: https://www.climateemergency.uk/blog/list-of-councils/

Crawley Borough Council, Crawley Borough Local Plan 2015-2030 (Adopted 2015). Available at: https://crawley.gov.uk/planning/planning-policy/local-plan/about-local- plan#:~:text=Our%20Local%20Plan%2C%20Crawley%202030,development%20management%20decisions% 20are%20taken. (Accessed: March 2021).

Croydon London Borough, Croydon Local Plan 2018 (Adopted 2018). Available at: https://www.croydon.gov.uk/planning-and-regeneration/planning/planning-policy/croydons-development- plan/local-plan-2018. (Accessed: March 2021).

Croydon London Borough, Croydon Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS): 2015-2020. Available at: https://www.croydon.gov.uk/sites/default/files/articles/downloads/Local%20flood%20risk%20management% 20strategy.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Croydon, Kingston Upon Thames, Merton, Sutton and Wandsworth London Borough Councils), Draft South London Waste Plan (2020). Available at: https://democracy.merton.gov.uk/documents/s32596/Appendix%20A%20Submission%20Draft%20South%2 0London%20Waste%20Plan%20online%20only.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Cotswold District, Cotswold District Local Plan 2011-2031 (Adopted 2018). Available at: https://www.cotswold.gov.uk/planning-and-building/planning-policy/local-plan-2011-to-2031/ (Accessed: March 2021).

Cotswolds District Council, The economic Impact of Gloucestershire’s Visitor Economy (2015).

Cotswolds National Landscape, Cotswolds AONB Management Plan 2018-2023 - Cotswolds AONB. Available at: https://www.cotswoldsaonb.org.uk/planning/cotswolds-aonb-management-plan/cotswolds-aonb- management-plan-2018-2023/ (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Cotswolds National Landscape, Landscape Character Assessment - Cotswolds AONB (2021). Available at: https://www.cotswoldsaonb.org.uk/our-landscape/landscape-character-assessment/ (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Coventry and Warwickshire Local Enterprise, Strategic Economic Plan (SEP) 2016. Available at: https://www.cwlep.com/document/strategic-economic-plan-sep-2016 (Accessed: March 2021).

CPNI, CPNI Website – Critical National Infrastructure (2021). Website: ,https://www.cpni.gov.uk/critical- nationalinfrastructure0#:~:text=National%20Infrastructure%20are%20those%20facilities,upon%20which%20d aily%20life%20depends.

Dacorum Borough Council, Dacorum Local Plan Core Strategy 2006-2031 (Adopted 2013). Available at: https://www.dacorum.gov.uk/docs/default-source/strategic-planning/adopted-core-strategy- 2013.pdf?sfvrsn=2 (Accessed: March 2021).

Department of Agriculture, Environment and Rural Affairs (DAERA), Shellfish Water Protected Areas (2003). [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

115

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Department for Business Innovation and Skills, Industrial Strategy: UK Sector Analysis (2012) https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/34607/1 2-1140-industrial-strategy-uk-sector-analysis.pdf

Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (Defra), (2007). The Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (2007). Available at: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/69336/p b12654-air-quality-strategy-vol1-070712.pdf (Accessed March 2021)

Defra, Biodiversity 2020: A Strategy for England’s Wildlife (2011). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/biodiversity-2020-a-strategy-for-england-s-wildlife-and- ecosystem-services. (Accessed March 2021).

Defra, Clean Air Strategy (2019). Available at: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/770715/ clean-air-strategy-2019.pdf (Accessed March 2021)

Defra, Eel Management Plan – Thames River Basin District (2010). Available at: http://www.eelregulations.co.uk/pdf/demp.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Defra, 25 Year Environment Plan. Available (2018) online at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/25- year-environment-plan (Accessed March 2021)

Defra, National Flood Resilience Review (2016). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-flood-resilience-review. (Accessed March 2021).

Defra, Total income from farming for the regions of England (2019). Available online: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/total-income-from-farming-for-the-regions-of-england (Accessed March 2021)

Defra, Agriculture in the United Kingdom (2019). Available online: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/agriculture-in-the-united-kingdom-2019 (Accessed March 2021)

Defra, UK Resources and Waste Strategy (2018). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/resources-and-waste-strategy-for-england (Accessed March 2021).

Ealing London Borough Council, Ealing Local Plan Development (or Core Strategy) 2026 (Adopted 2012). Available at: https://www.ealing.gov.uk/info/201166/development_core_strategy_dpd (Accessed: March 2021).

Ealing London Borough Council, Ealing Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2016. Available at: https://www.ealing.gov.uk/downloads/download/3484/local_flood_risk_management_strategy(Accessed: March 2021).

East Hampshire District Council, East Hampshire District Local Plan: Joint Core Strategy (Adopted 2014). Available at: https://cdn.easthants.gov.uk/public/documents/DP01%20East%20Hampshire%20District%20Local%20Plan% 20Joint%20Core%20Strategy%20COMPLETE.pdf(Accessed: March 2021).

East Herts District Council, The East Herts District Plan 2011-2033 (Adopted 2018). Available at: https://www.eastherts.gov.uk/planning-building/planning-policy/east-herts-district-plan-2018(Accessed: March 2021).

Elmbridge Borough Council, Elmbridge Borough Local Plan, Core Strategy 2026 (Adopted 2011). Available at: https://www.elmbridge.gov.uk/planning/local-plan/strategic-planning/core- strategy/#:~:text=The%20Core%20Strategy%20is%20the,the%20Borough%20up%20to%202026. (Accessed: March 2021). 116

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Enfield London Borough Council, The Enfield Plan Core Strategy 2010-2025 (Adopted 2010). Available at: https://new.enfield.gov.uk/services/planning/adopted-plans/planning-policy-information-the-enfield-plan- core-strategy-november-2010.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Enfield London Borough Council, Enfield Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2016. Available at: https://new.enfield.gov.uk/services/environment/flood-management/(Accessed: March 2021).

Enterprise M3, Strategic Economic Plan 2018/2030. Available at: https://www.enterprisem3.org.uk/em3- strategic-economic- plan#:~:text='A%20Strategic%20Economic%20Plan%20for,GVA%20to%20the%20UK%20economy. (Accessed: March 2021).

Environment Agency, Contact Details, Available at: http://apps.environment-agency.gov.uk/contact/ (2020) (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Environment Agency, EA2025 Creating a Better Place (2020) Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/environment-agency-ea2025-creating-a-better-place (Accessed 24 March 2021).

Environment Agency, Fisheries Annual Report 2019 to 2020, Map showing the Angling Improvement Fund and Fisheries Improvement Programme projects 2019 to 2020. Available online: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/fisheries-annual-report-2019-to-2020

Environment Agency Thames Catchment Flood Management Plan (CFMP) Summary Report (2009). Available online: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/thames-catchment-flood-management-plan

Epsom and Ewell Borough Council, Epsom and Ewell Local Plan, Core Strategy (Adopted 2007). Available at: https://www.epsom-ewell.gov.uk/sites/default/files/documents/residents/planning/planning- policy/Core%20Strategy%202007.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

European Commission, Conservation of Wild Birds Directive and the Habitats and Species Directive (The Birds Directive) (amended 2009) Available at: https://ec.europa.eu/environment/nature/legislation/birdsdirective/index_en.htm (Accessed 25 March 2021).

European Commission, Nitrates - Water pollution – Environment (1991). [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

European Commission, The Habitats Directive - Environment (2017) [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

European Commission, Strategic Environmental Assessment - SEA - Environment (2003) [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

European Commission. (Unknown Date). Urban Wastewater Directive - Environment. [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

European Commission Flood risk management - Water - Environment (2007). Available at: https://ec.europa.eu/environment/water/flood_risk/ (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

European Commission, Green Infrastructure - Environment (2017). Available at: https://ec.europa.eu/environment/nature/ecosystems/index_en.htm (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

European Commission, Strategic Environmental Assessment - SEA - Environment (2001). Available at: https://ec.europa.eu/environment/eia/sea-legalcontext.htm (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

117

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

European Environment Agency, Updated CLC illustrated nomenclature guidelines (2019). Available at: https://land.copernicus.eu/user-corner/technical-library/corine-land-cover-nomenclature- guidelines/html/index.html

Experience Oxfordshire Partner, Economic Impact Study 2019.

Experience Oxfordshire Partner, Covid-19 Visitor Economy Business Impact Study (April 2020).

Gloucestershire County Council, Minerals Local Plan for Gloucestershire (2018). Available at: https://www.gloucestershire.gov.uk/planning-and-environment/planning-policy/minerals-local-plan-for- gloucestershire/ (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Gloucestershire County Council, Gloucestershire County Council's Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (2014). Available at: https://www.gloucestershire.gov.uk/your-community/emergencies-and-your- safety/flooding-and-drainage/gloucestershire-county-councils-local-flood-risk-management-strategy-lfrms/. (Accessed: March 2021).

Gloucestershire Local Enterprise Partnership, Strategic Economic Plan (SEP) 2018. Available at: https://www.gfirstlep.com/about-us/our-vision/strategic-economic-plan/ (Accessed: March 2021).

Guildford Borough Council, Guildford Borough Council Local Plan, Strategy and Sites (2015-2034) (Adopted 2019) Harrow London Borough Council, Harrow Local Plan Core Strategy (Adopted 2012)

Harrow London Borough Council, Harrow Local Flood Risk Management Strategy 2016. Available at: https://www.guildford.gov.uk/localplan/2015-2034 (Accessed: March 2021).

Hart District Council, Hart local plan (Strategy and Sites) 2031 (Adopted 2020). Available at: https://www.hart.gov.uk/plans-and-policies. (Accessed: March 2021).

Hampshire County Council, Hampshire Local Flood Risk Management Strategy Available at: https://www.hants.gov.uk/landplanningandenvironment/environment/flooding/strategies/local-flood-risk- management-strategy. (Accessed March 2021).

Hampshire County Council, Hampshire Integrated Character Assessment (2021). Available at: https://www.hants.gov.uk/landplanningandenvironment/environment/landscape/integratedcharacterassessme nt (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Hampshire County Council, Hampshire Minerals and Waste Plan (2013). Available at: https://www.hants.gov.uk/landplanningandenvironment/strategic-planning/hampshire-minerals-waste-plan (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Hertfordshire Local Enterprise Partnership, Strategic Economic Plan 2017-2030. Available at: https://www.hertfordshirelep.com/media/o4pj0kru/strategic-economic-plan-executive-summary-2017.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Hertsmere Borough Council, Hertsmere Local Plan Core Strategy 2012-2027 (Adopted 2013). Available at: https://www.hertsmere.gov.uk/Planning--Building-Control/Planning-Policy/Local-Plan/Current-Local- Plan/Local-Plan-2012-27-Core-Strategy.aspx (Accessed: March 2021).

Hertfordshire County Council, Minerals Local Plan Review 2002-2016. Available at: https://www.hertfordshire.gov.uk/services/Recycling-waste-and-environment/Planning-in- Hertfordshire/Minerals-and-waste-planning/Minerals-Planning/Minerals-Planning.aspx. (Accessed: March 2021).

Hertfordshire County Council, Local Flood Risk Management Strategy for Hertfordshire 2 (LFRMS 2) 2019-2029. Available at: https://www.hertfordshire.gov.uk/services/recycling-waste-and-environment/water/managing- flood-risks.aspx. (Accessed: March 2021).

118

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Hertfordshire County Council, Hertfordshire Waste Local Plan – Waste Core Strategy and Development Management Policies document, Waste Allocations (2011-2026), Waste Local Plan Review (2017) and the Joint Municipal Waste Management Strategy (2007).

Hey, Gill and Hind Solent-Thames Research Framework for the Historic Environment Resource Assessments and Research Agendas (2014) available from: https://library.thehumanjourney.net/2597/

Hillingdon London Borough Council, Hillingdon Local Plan Part 1: Strategic Priorities 2026 (Adopted 2012). Available at: https://www.hillingdon.gov.uk/local-plan (Accessed: March 2021).

Hillington London Borough Council, Hillington Local Flood Risk Management Strategy 2016. Available at: Appendix_A_-_Local_Flood_Risk_Management_Strategy_2016_(1).pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Historic England (2016). Understanding Climate Change Issues for Historic England. Available at: https://historicengland.org.uk/research/current/threats/heritage-climate-change-environment/understanding- issues/ (Accessed: 28 April 2021).

Institute for Fiscal Studies Living Standards, poverty and inequality in the UK: 2017-18 to 2021-22 (2017.

Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment, Major Accidents and Disasters in EIA: A Primer (2020).

Kingston Upon Thames London Borough Council, Royal Borough of Kingston Upon Thames Local Development Framework Core Strategy 2026 (Adopted 2012). Available at: https://www.kingston.gov.uk/policy/core- strategy/1 (Accessed: March 2021).

Kingston Upon Thames London Borough Council, Kingston Upon Thames Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2010. Available at: https://www.kingston.gov.uk/flooding-drainage/flood-prevention-managing-risk- flooding/3?documentId=457&categoryId=20122(Accessed: March 2021).

London Assembly, London Pan, 2021. Available at: https://www.london.gov.uk/what-we-do/planning/london- plan/new-london-plan/london-plan-2021. (Accessed: March 2021). (Accessed: March 2021).

London Borough of Hounslow, Hounslow Local Plan 2030 (Adopted 2015). Available at: https://www.hounslow.gov.uk/info/20167/local_plan/1108/local_plan (Accessed: March 2021).

London Borough of Hounslow, Hounslow Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2014. Available at: https://www.hounslow.gov.uk/info/20006/environment/1876/flooding/2 (Accessed: March 2021).

London Borough of Richmond Upon Thames, London Borough of Richmond Upon Thames Local Plan (Adopted 2018 and 2020 in relation to two legal challenges). Available at: Available at: https://www.richmond.gov.uk/local_plan(Accessed: March 2021).

London Borough of Richmond Upon Thames, Richmond Upon Thames Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2014-2020 (2014). Available at: https://www.richmond.gov.uk/media/13402/lfrms_strategic_environment_assessment.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Luton Borough Council, Luton Local Plan (2011-2031). Available at: https://m.luton.gov.uk/Page/Show/Environment/Planning/Regional%2520and%2520local%2520planning/Pa ges/Local%2520Plan%25202011%2520-%25202031.aspx. (Accessed: March 2021).

Luton Borough Council, Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (2015). Available at: https://m.luton.gov.uk/Page/Show/Environment/flood-risk-management/Pages/Local-flood- strategy.aspx?redirectToMobile=True. (Accessed: March 2021).

Merton London Borough Council, Merton Local Development Framework Core Planning Strategy (2011). Available at: https://www.merton.gov.uk/assets/Documents/0328_merton_core_strategy_adopted.pdf

119

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Merton London Borough Council, Merton Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2014-2020 (2014). Available at: https://www.merton.gov.uk/assets/Documents/Summary%20of%20Local%20Flood%20Risk%20Management %20Strategy.pdf(Accessed: March 2021).

Met Office, UK Climate Projections: Headline Findings (2019).

Mid Sussex District Council, Mid Sussex District Plan 2014 – 2031. Available at: https://www.midsussex.gov.uk/planning-building/mid-sussex-district-plan/(Accessed: March 2021).

Mole Valley District Council, Mole Valley District Council Local Plan, Core Strategy 2026 (Adopted 2009). Available at: https://www.molevalley.gov.uk/home/building-planning/local-plans/adopted-planning-policy- documents(Accessed: March 2021).

National Rivers Authority Thames Region, Thames Environment Design Handbook (National Rivers Authority (1992). Available at: http://www.environmentdata.org/archive/ealit:2975. (Accessed 17 May 2021).

Natural England, NCA Profile:115 Thames Valley NE379 (2012). Available online: http://publications.naturalengland.org.uk/publication/3865943?category=587130

Natural England (2014). National Character Area profiles. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-character-area-profiles-data-for-local-decision- making/national-character-area-profiles

Natural England, Green Infrastructure Guidance (2017). Available online: http://publications.naturalengland.org.uk/publication/35033

Natural England, Natural Capital Indicators: for defining and measuring change in natural capital (NERR076). (2018) Available online at: http://publications.naturalengland.org.uk/publication/6742480364240896

Nomis, Business Register and Employment Survey (2019). Available online: https://www.nomisweb.co.uk/query/construct/summary.asp?mode=construct&version=0&dataset=189

Northamptonshire Enterprise Partnership, Strategic Economic Plan. Available at: https://www.northamptonshire.gov.uk/councilservices/business-and-economy/our- projects/Documents/SEP%20FINAL%20DOCUMENT.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

North Herts District Council, North Hertfordshire District Local Plan No.2 with Alterations Written Statement 1996 (Adopted 1996 and Saved Local Plan 2007). Available at: https://www.north-herts.gov.uk/planning/planning- policy/local-plan/local-plan-current-policy/district-local-plan-no2-alterations (Accessed: March 2021).

North Wessex Downs, AONB Management Plan (2019-2024). Available at: https://www.northwessexdowns.org.uk/publications-resources/aonb-management-plan.html (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

North Wessex Downs, Landscape - North Wessex Downs AONB (2021). Available at: https://www.northwessexdowns.org.uk/publications-resources/landscape-2.html (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Ministry of Housing, Communities & Local Government, Oxford Cambridge Arc Spatial Development Framework Policy Paper (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/planning-for-sustainable- growth-in-the-oxford-cambridge-arc-spatial-framework/planning-for-sustainable-growth-in-the-oxford- cambridge-arc-an-introduction-to-the-spatial-framework Accessed 17 May 2021.

Office for National Statistics, 2011 rural/urban classification (2011). Available online: https://www.ons.gov.uk/methodology/geography/geographicalproducts/ruralurbanclassifications/2011ruralur banclassification

120

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Office for National Statistics, Regional gross value added (income approach), Table 6 Gross Value Added (Income Approach) by SIC07 industry at current basic prices (2017). Available online: https://www.ons.gov.uk/economy/grossvalueaddedgva

Office for national Statistics, National population projections: 2018-based (2019). Available online: https://www.ons.gov.uk/peoplepopulationandcommunity/populationandmigration/populationprojections/bulle tins/nationalpopulationprojections/2018based

Office for National Statistics, Annual Population Survey, Jan 2019 – Dec 2019. Downloaded from Nomis. (2019b) Available online : https://www.nomisweb.co.uk/query/advanced.aspx?resume=yes

Office for National Statistics, Population estimates for the UK, England and Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland: mid-2019, using April 2020 local authority district codes (2020). Available online: https://www.ons.gov.uk/peoplepopulationandcommunity/populationandmigration/populationestimates/datas ets/populationestimatesforukenglandandwalesscotlandandnorthernireland

Office for National Statistics, UK natural capital: monetary estimates, (2016). Available at: https://www.ons.gov.uk/releases/uknaturalcapitalpartialmonetaryestimates2016 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

Old Oak and Park Royal Development Corporation, (2018). Strategic Environmental Assessment Screening Statement. [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

Oxford City Council, Oxford Local Plan 2036 (Adopted 2020). Available at: https://www.oxford.gov.uk/info/20067/planning_policy/1311/oxford_local_plan_2016-2036 (Accessed: March 2021).

Oxford Climate Society, Oxford Climate Action Plan (2021). Available at: https://www.oxfordclimatesociety.com/oxford-climate-action-plan.html (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Oxfordshire County Council, Oxfordshire Wildlife & Landscape Study - Home (2021). Available at: http://owls.oxfordshire.gov.uk/wps/wcm/connect/occ/OWLS/Home/ (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Oxfordshire County Council, Minerals and Waste Local Plan (1996) Available at: https://www.oxfordshire.gov.uk/residents/environment-and-planning/planning/planning-policy/minerals-and- waste-policy/minerals-and-waste-local- plan#:~:text=Saved%20policies%20from%20the%20existing,covered%20the%20period%20to%202006.&text =The%20Core%20Strategy%20was%20adopted%20on%2012%20September%202017. (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Oxfordshire County Council Minerals and Waste Local Plan (2017) Available at: https://www.oxfordshire.gov.uk/residents/environment-and-planning/planning/planning-policy/minerals-and- waste-policy/core-strategy. (Accessed: March 2021).

Oxfordshire County Council, Oxfordshire County Council Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (date unknown). Available at: https://www.oxfordshirefloodtoolkit.com/contacts/council/ ( Accessed: March 2021).

Oxfordshire Local Enterprise Partnership, Strategic Economic Plan (SEP) 2016. Available at: https://www.oxfordshirelep.com/about/our-strategies/our-strategic-economic-plan-sep (Accessed: March 2021).

Plan, M. et al., High Weald AONB Management Plan evidence, Highweald.org (2019). Available at: http://www.highweald.org/high-weald-aonb-management-plan/evidence.html (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Public Health England, The English National Study for Flooding and Health: First year report. Briefing for policy makers and practitioners (2017). Available online: 121

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/597846/ NSFH_briefing_for_policymakers_and_practitioners.pdf

Public Health England (PHE) Strategy 2020-2025 (2019). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/phe-strategy-2020-to-2025. (Accessed: 17 May 2021).

Reading Borough Council, Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (2015). Available at: https://images.reading.gov.uk/2019/12/27560_007_RBCLFRMS_REV05.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Reading Borough Council, Reading Borough Local Plan 2019-2036. Available at: https://images.reading.gov.uk/2019/12/Local_Plan_Adopted_November_2019.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Reigate and Banstead Borough Council, Reigate and Banstead Borough Council Local Plan, Core Strategy (Adopted 2014 and reviewed 2019). Available at: https://www.reigate- banstead.gov.uk/info/20088/planning_policy/1101/development_plan/2 (Accessed: March 2021).

Reporters, F. and reporters, F. 2019 farm output estimates released by Defra | Farm Business, Farmbusiness.co.uk (2019). Available at: http://www.farmbusiness.co.uk/business/2019-farm-output-estimates-released-by- defra.html (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

River Thames Alliance, Bargee-traveller.org.uk (2015). Available at: http://www.bargee-traveller.org.uk/wp- content/uploads/2018/08/RTA-Draft-Waterway-Plan-2015.pdf (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead Council, The Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead Local Plan (2003) and Emerging Draft Local Plan (currently undergoing examination). Available at: https://www.rbwm.gov.uk/home/planning/planning-policy/emerging-plans-and-policies/draft-borough-local- plan/examination-local-plan. (Accessed: March 2021).

Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead Council, Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (2014). Available at: https://www.rbwm.gov.uk/sites/default/files/2020- 04/highways_flood_risk_management_strategy.pdf. (Accessed March 2021).

Runnymede Borough Council, Runnymede Local Plan 2030 (Adopted 2020). Available at: https://www.runnymede.gov.uk/article/19466/NEW-Runnymede-2030-Local- Plan#:~:text=The%20Council%20adopted%20the%202030,Plan%202001%20(second%20alteration). (Accessed: March 2021).

Rushmoor Borough Council, Rushmoor Local Plan 2014-2032 (Adopted 2019). Available at: https://www.rushmoor.gov.uk/rushmoorlocalplan#:~:text=Adoption%20of%20the%20Rushmoor%20Local,pro viding%20detailed%20development%20management%20policies. (Accessed: March 2021).

Saint Albans City and District Council, City and District of St Albans District Local Plan Review 1994 (Adopted 1994) Saved and Deleted Policies Version Written Version (2020). Available at: https://www.stalbans.gov.uk/current-local-plan. (Accessed: March 2021).

Slough Borough Council, Slough Local Development Plan including Core Strategy (2006 – 2026). Available at: https://www.slough.gov.uk/planning-policy/local-plan-slough/2. (Accessed: March 2021).

Slough Borough Council, Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) for Slough (2013). Available at: https://www.slough.gov.uk/downloads/file/868/flood-risk-management-strategy-sbc. (Accessed: March 2021).

South Oxfordshire District Council, South Oxfordshire Local Plan 2011-2035 (Adopted 2020). Available at: https://www.southoxon.gov.uk/south-oxfordshire-district-council/planning-and-development/local-plan-and- planning-policies/local-plan-2035/adopted-local-plan- 2035/#:~:text=The%20South%20Oxfordshire%20Local%20Plan,Council%20on%2010%20December%20202

122

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

0.&text=The%20Local%20Plan%202035%20was,South%20Oxfordshire%20up%20to%202035. (Accessed: March 2021).

South East Midlands Local Enterprise, Strategic Economic Plan (SEP) 2015-2020. Available at: https://www.lepnetwork.net/media/1127/south-east-midlands-sep.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Spelthorne Borough Council, Spelthorne Borough Council Local Plan, Core Strategy and Policies Development Plan Document 2026 (Adopted 2009). Available at: /core_strategy_and_policies%20(2).pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Stratford-On-Avon District Council, Stratford-On-Avon Local Plan, Core Strategy (2011-2031) (Adopted 2016). Available at: https://www.stratford.gov.uk/planning-building/core-strategy.cfm (Accessed: March 2021).

Stroud District Council, Stroud District Local Plan 2031 (Adopted 2015). Available at: https://www.stratford.gov.uk/planning-building/core-strategy.cfm (Accessed: March 2021).

Surrey County Council, Landscape Character Assessment (2021). Available at: https://www.surreycc.gov.uk/land- planning-and-development/countryside/strategies-action-plans-and-guidance/landscape-character- assessment (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Surrey County Council, Surrey Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (2017-2032). Available at: https://www.surreycc.gov.uk/people-and-community/emergency-planning-and-community-safety/flooding- advice/more-about-flooding/surrey-local-flood-risk-management-strategy. (Accessed March 2021).

Surrey County Council, Surrey Minerals Plan Primary Aggregates Development Plan Document (2001). Available at: https://www.surreycc.gov.uk/land-planning-and-development/minerals-and-waste/minerals-core-strategy- development-plan/adopted-primary-aggregates-development-plan (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Surrey County Council, Surrey Waste Local Plan (2019-2033) Part 1: Policies and Part 2: Sites (Adopted 2008). Available at: https://www.surreycc.gov.uk/land-planning-and-development/minerals-and-waste/waste-plan. (Accessed: March 2021).

Surrey Heath Borough Council, Surrey Heath Local Plan, Core Strategy and Development Management Policies 2028 (Adopted 2012). Available at: https://www.surreyheath.gov.uk/residents/planning/planning- policy/surrey-heath-current-local-plan/core-strategy-and-development. (Accessed: March 2021).

Surrey Hills Board, Management Plan | Surrey Hills (2021). Available at: https://www.surreyhills.org/board/our- management-plan/ (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Survey, D. et al. Evidence, Highweald.org (2018). Available at: http://www.highweald.org/downloads/publications/uk-landscape-research-reports.html (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Sutton London Borough Council, Sutton Local Plan 2016-2031 (Adopted 2018). Available at: https://www.sutton.gov.uk/info/200464/planning_policy/1521/local_plan_adopted_2018#:~:text=On%2026 %20February%202018%2C%20the,appear%20on%20the%20Policies%20Map. (Accessed: March 2021).

Sutton London Borough Council, Sutton Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2014-2020 (2014). Available at: https://www.sutton.gov.uk/info/200487/flood_risk_management/1275/lead_local_flood_authority/5 (Accessed: March 2021).

Swindon and Wiltshire Councils, Strategic Economic Plan (SEP) 2016-2026. Available at: https://growthhub.swlep.co.uk/docs/default-source/strategy/economic-priorities/strategic-economic-plan--- january-2016.pdf?sfvrsn=e7d58ea0_12 (Accessed: March 2021).

123

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Swindon Borough Council, The Swindon Local Plan 2015-2026. Available at: https://www.swindon.gov.uk/info/20113/local_plan_and_planning_policy/635/swindon_local_plan. (Accessed: March 2021).

Swindon Borough Council, Swindon Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (2014). Available at: https://www.swindon.gov.uk/downloads/file/5131/swindon_local_flood_risk_management_strategy. (Accessed: March 2021).

Tandridge District Council, Tandridge District Local Plan, Core Strategy 2026 (Adopted 2008). Available at:

Thames Valley Berkshire, Thames Valley Berkshire Strategic Economic Plan (SEP) 2015/2016 – 2020/2021. Available at: https://www.tandridge.gov.uk/Planning-and-building/Planning-strategies-and-policies/Current- and-adopted-planning-policies/Core-strategy (Accessed: March 2021).

Thames Water, Water resources | Regulation | About us (2021). Available at: https://www.thameswater.co.uk/about-us/regulation/water-resources (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

Thames Water, Water Resources Management Plan 2020-2021 (2019). Available at: https://www.thameswater.co.uk/about-us/regulation/water-resources. (Accessed March 2021).

The Chilterns AONB - Management Plan (2021). Available at: https://www.chilternsaonb.org/conservation- board/management-plan.html (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Tidefest, Messing about by the River Thames Tidefest Returns for a 7th time (2020). Available online: https://thamestidefest.net/tag/tidefest/

Test Valley Borough Council, Test Valley revised local Plan 2011-2029. Available at: https://www.testvalley.gov.uk/planning-and-building/planningpolicy/local-development-framework/dpd (Accessed: March 2021).

Tewkesbury Borough Council, Tewkesbury Local Plan (2011). Available at: https://www.tewkesbury.gov.uk/local- plan (Accessed: March 2021).

The Coast to Capital Local Enterprise Partnership, Strategic Economic Plan (SEP) 2018-2030. Available at: https://www.coast2capital.org.uk/strategy/ (Accessed: March 2021).

Three Rivers District Council, Three Rivers Local Development Framework Core Strategy (Adopted 2011). Available at: https://www.threerivers.gov.uk/egcl-page/core-strategy (Accessed: March 2021).

UK Government, Agenda 2030: Delivering the Global Goals (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/agenda-2030-delivering-the-global-goals (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Biodiversity 2020: A strategy for England’s wildlife and ecosystem services (2020). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/biodiversity-2020-a-strategy-for-england-s-wildlife-and- ecosystem-services (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Build Back Better: Our Plan for Growth (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/build-back-better-our-plan-for-growth (Accessed 17 May 2021).

UK Government Civil Society Strategy: building a future that works for everyone. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/civil-society-strategy-building-a-future-that-works-for-everyone (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government Clean Air Strategy (2019). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/clean-air- strategy-2019 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

124

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

UK Government, Conservation 21: Natural England’s conservation strategy for the 21st century (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/conservation-21-natural-englands-conservation-strategy-for- the-21st-century (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Countryside and Rights of Way Act (2000). Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2000/37/contents (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, English indices of deprivation (2019). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/english-indices-of-deprivation-2019 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, (1995) Environment Act 1995 (1995). Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/1995/25/contents (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, (2018) EU (Withdrawal Act) 2018. Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2018/16/contents/enacted (Accessed 17/05/2021).

UK Government, Fisheries annual report 2019 to 2020. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/fisheries-annual-report-2019-to-2020 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Flood and Coastal Erosion Risk Management: appraisal guidance (2020). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/flood-and-coastal-erosion-risk-management-appraisal-guidance (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Godalming flood alleviation scheme (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/godalming-flood-alleviation-scheme/godalming-flood- alleviation-scheme (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Legislation.gov.uk. Salmon and Freshwater Fisheries Act 1975. [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Legislation.gov.uk.. Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act 1979. [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Legislation.gov.uk.. The Water Environment (Water Framework Directive) (England and Wales) Regulations 2017. [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Legislation.gov.uk.. Climate Change Act 2008. [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Legislation.gov.uk.. The Conservation of Habitats and Species Regulations 2017. [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Leglislation.gov.uk. The Wildlife and Countryside Act 1981. [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Meeting our future water needs: a national framework for water resources (2020). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/meeting-our-future-water-needs-a-national-framework-for- water-resources (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Ministry of Housing Communities & Local Government (2019). English Indices of Deprivation 2019. Available online: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/english-indices-of-deprivation-2019

UK Government, Natural capital tool launched to help protect the environment (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/news/natural-capital-tool-launched-to-help-protect-the-environment (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

125

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

UK Government, Natural Environment and Rural Communities Act (2006). Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2006/16/contents (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, National Flood and Coastal Erosion Risk Management Strategy for England (2020). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-flood-and-coastal-erosion-risk-management-strategy- for-england--2 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, National Infrastructure Delivery Plan 2016 to 2021 (2016). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-infrastructure-delivery-plan-2016-to-2021 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government. National Nature Reserves in England (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/national-nature-reserves-in-england (Accessed: 30 March 2021).

UK Government, National planning policy for waste (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-planning-policy-for-waste (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, National Planning Policy Framework (2019). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-planning-policy-framework--2 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, PHE annual report and accounts: 2017 to 2018 (2017). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/phe-annual-report-and-accounts-2017-to-2018 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Planning policy for traveller sites (2015). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/planning-policy-for-traveller-sites (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Programme of flood and coastal erosion risk management (FCERM) schemes (2020). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/programme-of-flood-and-coastal-erosion-risk-management- schemes (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, River basin planning: Challenges and Choices (2019). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/consultations/river-basin-planning-challenges-and-choices (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Securing the future: delivering UK sustainable development strategy (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/securing-the-future-delivering-uk-sustainable-development- strategy (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Strategic environmental assessment and sustainability appraisal (2004). [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Surface water management action plan (2018). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/surface-water-management-action-plan (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Strategic Environmental Assessment Directive: guidance (2005). [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Thames Flood Risk Management Plan (2015). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/thames-river-basin-district-flood-risk-management-plan (Accessed 17 May 2021).

126

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

UK Government, Thames river basin district river basin management plan (2015). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/thames-river-basin-district-river-basin-management-plan (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Thames Valley Flood Scheme (2021). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/thames-valley-flood-scheme/thames-valley-flood-scheme (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Thames: Catchment flood management plan (2009). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/thames-catchment-flood-management-plan (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, The Bathing Water Regulations (2013). Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2013/1675/contents/made (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, The Eels (England and Wales) Regulations, 2009. Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2009/3344/contents/made Accessed: 24 March 2021.

UK Government, The Environmental Assessment of Plans and Programmes Regulations (2004). Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2004/1633/contents/made (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, The Environment Bill 2019-2021 (2019). Available at: https://bills.parliament.uk/bills/2593 (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, The Equality Act (2010). Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2010/15/contents (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, The Health and Social Care Act (2010) (England) Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2012/7/contents/enacted (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, The Nitrate Pollution Prevention Regulations (2015). Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2015/668/contents/made (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, The Social Value Act (2012). Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2012/3/enacted (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, The UK low carbon transition plan: national strategy for climate and energy (2009). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/the-uk-low-carbon-transition-plan-national-strategy-for- climate-and-energy (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Urban Wastewater Treatment (England and Wales) Regulations (1994) Available at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/1994/2841/contents/made (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

UK Government, Water abstraction plan: Environment (2019). Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/water-abstraction-plan-2017/water-abstraction-plan- environment (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

UK Government, Water Framework Directive: shellfish protected areas (2003). [online] Available at: (Accessed 24 March 2021).

UK National Statistics, Local Authority territorial CO2 emissions estimates 2005-2018 (2018) (kt CO2)

UK Parliament, Parliamentary Briefing (January 2021): Tackling the under-supply of housing in England

Vale of White Horse District Council Vale of White Horse Local Plan, Part 1: Strategic Sites and Policies 2031 and Part 2: Detailed Policies and Sites (Adopted 2019). Available at: https://www.whitehorsedc.gov.uk/vale-of-white-

127

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

horse-district-council/planning-and-development/local-plan-and-planning-policies/local-plan-2031/ (Accessed: March 2021).

Visit England (2017, The Future Travel Journey. Trends for Tourism Product Development.

Wandsworth London Borough Council, Wandsworth Local Plan Core Strategy (Adopted 2016) Available at: https://www.wandsworth.gov.uk/media/1934/sd_019_core_strategy__2016_.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

Wandsworth London Borough Council, Wandsworth Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2016 Available at: https://www.wandsworth.gov.uk/planning-and-building-control/planning-policy/flood-risk/local- flood-risk-management-strategy/ (Accessed: March 2021).

Warwickshire County Council. Minerals Local Plan (1995). Available at: https://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/waste- recycling/minerals-local- plan/1#:~:text=The%20Minerals%20Local%20Plan%20(1995,Plan%20was%20adopted%20in%201995. (Accessed: March 2021).

Warwickshire County Council, Minerals Development Framework Emerging Minerals Plan (2019). Available at: https://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/mdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Warwickshire County Council, Warwickshire Waste Core Strategy (adopted 2013). Available at: https://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/wdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Warwickshire County Council, Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (2016). Available at: https://www.warwickshire.gov.uk/flooding/flood-risk-management-surface-water-management-plan/2. (Accessed: March 2021).

Watford Borough Council, Watford Local Plan Core Strategy 2006-2031 (Adopted 2013). Available at: https://www.watford.gov.uk/downloads/download/61/adopted_local_plan_core_strategy (Accessed: March 2021).

Waverley Borough Council, Waverley Borough Local Plan Part 1: Strategic Policies and Sites (Adopted 2018) Available at: https://www.waverley.gov.uk/Services/Planning-and-building/Planning-strategies-and- policies/Local-plan/Local-Plan-Part-1 (Accessed: March 2021).

Welwyn Hatfield District Council, Welwyn Hatfield District Plan Written Statement (Adopted 2005 and Saved Policies in 2008). Available at: https://www.welhat.gov.uk/article/463/Welwyn-Hatfield-District-Plan (Accessed: March 2021).

West Berkshire Council, Draft Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (2013-2017).

West Berkshire Council, West Berkshire Development Plan including Core Strategy Development Plan (2006- 2026) and West Berkshire District Local Plan 1991-2006 (Saved Policies 2007). Available at: https://info.westberks.gov.uk/localplan. (Accessed: March 2021).

West Berkshire Council - Environment Strategy - Information (2021). Available at: https://info.westberks.gov.uk/environment (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

West Berkshire Council - Landscape Character Assessments (LCA) - Information (2021). Available at: https://info.westberks.gov.uk/lca (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

West Berkshire Council - Mineral Extraction and Waste Management Planning - Information (2021). Available at: https://info.westberks.gov.uk/mineralsandwaste (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

West Berkshire Council - Minerals and Waste Local Plan - Preferred Options - Information (2021). Available at: https://info.westberks.gov.uk/mwlppo (Accessed: 24 March 2021).

128

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

West Berkshire Council - Minerals and Waste Local Plan - Proposed Submission - Information (2021). Available at: https://info.westberks.gov.uk/mwlpps (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

West Northamptonshire Council, West Northamptonshire Joint Part 1 Core Strategy (adopted 2014) and the Northampton Local Plan Part 2 (emerging). Available at: https://www.northampton.gov.uk/info/200205/planning-for-the-future/2199/northampton-local-plan-part-2. (Accessed: March 2021).

West Northamptonshire Council, Northamptonshire Minerals and Waste Local Plan 2017. Available at: https://www.northamptonshire.gov.uk/councilservices/environment-and-planning/planning/planning- policy/minerals-and-waste-planning-policy/Pages/update-of-the-adopted-minerals-and-waste-local- plan.aspx. (Accessed: March 2021).

West Northamptonshire Council, Northamptonshire Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2012. http://cmis.northamptonshire.gov.uk/CMIS5Live/Document.ashx?czJKcaeAi5tUFL1DTL2UE4zNRBcoShgo=zi02 ao7ZNAivJvNKzoxNb7quHdGRPWlM9Im%2BIUtaJiU6txns4giJZQ%3D%3D&mCTIbCubSFfXsDGW9IXnlg%3D% 3D=hFflUdN3100%3D&kCx1AnS9%2FpWZQ40DXFvdEw%3D%3D=hFflUdN3100%3D&uJovDxwdjMPoYv%2B AJvYtyA%3D%3D=ctNJFf55vVA%3D&FgPlIEJYlotS%2BYGoBi5olA%3D%3D=NHdURQburHA%3D&d9Qjj0ag1P d993jsyOJqFvmyB7X0CSQK=ctNJFf55vVA%3D&WGewmoAfeNR9xqBux0r1Q8Za60lavYmz=ctNJFf55vVA%3D &WGewmoAfeNQ16B2MHuCpMRKZMwaG1PaO=ctNJFf55vVA%3D. (Accessed: March 2021).

West London (Brent, Ealing, Hillingdon, Harrow, Hounslow, Richmond Upon Thames London Borough Councils), West London Waste Plan (2015). Available at: https://www.brent.gov.uk/media/16402581/west-london-waste- plan.pdf (Accessed: March 2021).

West Oxfordshire District Council, West Oxfordshire Local Plan 2031 (Adopted 2018). Available at: https://www.google.com/search?q=West+Oxfordshire+District+Council%2C+West+Oxfordshire+Local+Plan+20 31&rlz=1C1GCEJ_enGB865GB865&oq=West+Oxfordshire+District+Council%2C+West+Oxfordshire+Local+Plan +2031&aqs=chrome..69i57.19903j0j4&sourceid=chrome&ie=UTF-8 (Accessed: March 2021).

West Sussex County Council, West Sussex Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) (2013-2018). Available at: https://www.westsussex.gov.uk/media/1595/local_flood_risk_management_strategy.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

West Sussex County Council, West Sussex Joint Minerals Local Plan (2018) (Partial Review March 2021). Available at: https://www.westsussex.gov.uk/about-the-council/policies-and-reports/environment-planning-and-waste- policy-and-reports/minerals-and-waste-policy/joint-minerals-local-plan/. (Accessed: March 2021).

West Sussex County Council, West Sussex Waste Local Plan (2014). Available at: https://www.westsussex.gov.uk/about-the-council/policies-and-reports/environment-planning-and-waste- policy-and-reports/minerals-and-waste-policy/waste-local-plan/. (Accessed March 2021).

Wiltshire and Swindon Minerals Core Strategy (2006-2026), Development Control Policies Development Plan Document (2009) and Site Allocation Local Plan (2013). Available at: https://www.swindon.gov.uk/info/20113/local_plan_and_planning_policy/644/minerals_planning_framework. (Accessed: March 2021).

Wiltshire Council, Landscape conservation (2021). Available at: https://www.wiltshire.gov.uk/planning- landscape-conservation (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Wiltshire County Council, The Carbon Neutral Challenge - Wiltshire Council (2021). Available at: https://www.wiltshire.gov.uk/article/1004/The-Carbon-Neutral-Challenge (Accessed: 25 March 2021).

Wiltshire Council, Wiltshire Local Development Plan Core Strategy (2015-2026). Available at: https://www.wiltshire.gov.uk/planning-policy-core- strategy#:~:text=The%20Wiltshire%20Core%20Strategy%20Development,the%20period%20up%20to%2020

129

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

26.&text=The%20inspector's%20recommended%20main%20modifications%20have%20been%20included% 20in%20the%20adopted%20plan. (Accessed: March 2021).

Wiltshire Council, Wiltshire Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2014. Available at: https://geosmartinfo.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/wiltshire-local-flood-risk-manage-strategy.pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Winchester City Council, Winchester Local Plan Part 1: Joint Core Strategy (2013). Available at: https://www.winchester.gov.uk/planning-policy/winchester-district-local-plan-2011-2036-adopted/local-plan- part-1-joint-core-strategy-adopted-march-2013-local-plan-review-2006 (Accessed: March 2021).

Woking Borough Council, Wokingham Local Plan, Core Strategy 2026 (Adopted 2010) Available at: http://www.planvu.co.uk/wbc/written/cptcs1.htm (Accessed: March 2021).

Wokingham Borough Council, Wokingham Borough Council Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 2015. Available at: /Local%20Flood%20Risk%20Management%20Strategy%20April%202015%20(PDF%20document).pdf. (Accessed: March 2021).

Wokingham Borough Council, Wokingham Local Plan Core Strategy (2026). Available at: https://www.wokingham.gov.uk/planning-policy/planning-policy-information/local-plan-and-planning- policies/. (Accessed: March 2021).

130

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix A Data Used

Data Data available on Project Mapper (Y/N/N/A – Not Applicable)

Local Authority Boundaries – County, Electoral Y Local Authority Boundaries – Unitary Y Local Authority Boundaries - District Y Local Authority Boundaries – District Borough Y OS MasterMap N/A OS VectorMap District N/A OS 1:50,000 Scale Colour Raster N/A OS 1:25,000 Scale Colour Raster N/A Indices of Multiple Deprivation – 2019 Y Public Rights of Way – Gloucestershire, Oxfordshire, Buckinghamshire, Hertfordshire, Surrey, Y Hampshire, Wiltshire, Reading, West Berkshire Crop Map of England (CROME) 2019 – Gloucestershire, Berkshire, Buckinghamshire, Y Hampshire, Hertfordshire, Oxfordshire, Surrey, Wiltshire Provisional Agricultural Land Classification Y Priority Habitat Inventory Y Open Mosaic Habitat Y Habitat Networks Y Naturalness of Biological Assemblage (mean estimates of expected plant habitat indicators. Y % of positive plant habitat indicators present) Y Ancient Woodland Y OS Open Green Space Y Wood Pasture and Parkland Y Sites of Special Scientific Interest Site and Units Y Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty Y National Trails Y Nature Improvement Areas Y Special Protection Areas Y Special Areas of Conservation Y RAMSAR Y Listed Buildings Y Scheduled Monuments Y World Heritage Sites Y Registered Battlefields Y Registered Parks and Gardens Y National Forest Inventory Y Country Parks Y Canals Y Water Framework Directive - Cycle 1 and 2 Y WFD Classification Status Cycle 2 N WFD RBMP2 Reasons for Not Achieving Good Status N Recorded Flood Outlines Y River Habitat Survey N Hydrometric Monitoring Points Y Flood Zone 2 and 3 Y Source Protection Zones Y Water Management Area Boundaries Y Flood Alert Areas Y Priority Habitat Creation and Restoration Y Water Resource Availability and Abstraction Reliability Cycle 2 Y Potential sites of hydropower opportunity N Flood Warning Areas Y 131

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Data Data available on Project Mapper (Y/N/N/A – Not Applicable)

Historic Flood Map Y Nitrate Vulnerable Zones Y WFD River WaterBody Catchments Cycle 2 Y WFD Groundwater Bodies Cycle 2 Y Soil Carbon Y Soil Nitrogen Y Soil Bacteria Y Soil Invertebrates Y Soil Ph Y Soil Phosphorus Y Carbon in Vegetation Y Headwater stream quality (Invertebrates in headwater streams) Y Pollinator Food Plants (nectar plant species for bees) Y Air Quality Management Areas Y Rail Noise - LAeq 16h - England Round 3 Y Rail Noise - Lden - England Round 3 Y Rail Noise - Lnight - England Round 3 Y Road Noise - LAeq 16h - England Round 3 Y Road Noise - Lden - England Round 3 Y Road Noise - Lnight - England Round 3 Y Modelled Background Pollution Data – Benzene Y Modelled Background Pollution Data – Ozone Y Modelled Background Pollution Data - Nitrogen Dioxide Y Modelled Background Pollution Data - Nitrogen Oxides Y Modelled Background Pollution Data - PM10 Y Modelled Background Pollution Data - PM2.5 Y Modelled Background Pollution Data - Sulphur Dioxide Y Built Up Areas Y Permitted Waste Sites Y Detailed River Network – Main Y Detailed River Network – Nodes Y Detailed River Network – Offline Y National Receptor Database Y Historic Landfill Sites Y Aquifer Designation Map - Bedrock Geology N Aquifer Designation Map - Superficial Deposits N Reservoirs Y

132

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix B1: Upper-Tier Authorities and Single-Tier Authorities (excluding London Boroughs) Spatial Plans Title Description Upper-Tier Authorities

Gloucestershire County Council The Minerals Local Plan for At the Plans core is the management of mineral resources to support: Gloucestershire (2018-2032) • local and national economic well-being; • the safeguarding of Gloucestershire’s local communities and those nearby who may be affected by mineral developments; and • the protection and enhancement of the natural environment including the integrity of the county’s multi-functional green infrastructure network of landscape elements and features and valued built assets. Measures that contribute towards advancing the mitigation of climate change and that seek to help improve our resilience and ability to adapt to climate change impacts are also imbedded throughout in the plan. The plan provides a list of the allocations under Policy MA01 | Aggregate working within allocations. Those relevant to the Scheme include: • Allocation 04: Land northwest of Daglingworth Quarry; • Allocation 05: Land south and west of Naunton Quarry; • Allocation 06: Land southeast of Down Ampney; • Allocation 07: Land at Lady Lamb Farm, west of Fairford. Gloucestershire County The LFRMS sets out how this Council will intend to fulfil their leadership and co -ordinating role, as well as their operational role. This strategy identifies the issues Council's Local Flood Risk that flood risk can impose on economic, social, environmental and cultural aspects of the County. It identifies 6 strategic objectives which will be implemented in the County to ensure flood risk is managed including: Management Strategy • Improve our understanding of flood risk. (LFRMS) (2014) • Put in place plans to manage these risks. • Avoid inappropriate development and ensure • that new development does not increase flooding elsewhere. • Increase public awareness of flooding and encourage communities to take action and ensure that new development does not increase flooding elsewhere. • Ensure close partnership working and coordination with other Risk Management Authorities and local communities. • Support response to, and recovery from, flooding incidents. Hampshire County Council

Hampshire Minerals and Waste The Plan is based upon the principle of delivering sustainable minerals and waste development in Hampshire up to 2030. The Plan comprises three elements Plan 2013 including strategic approach and policies; strategic sites allocations considered necessary to deliver the Plan objectives; and general and site-specific development management policies. Of relevance to the proposed Scheme the following policies, including allocated sites include: • Policy 20: Local land-won aggregates An adequate and steady supply of locally extracted sand and gravel will be provided by maintaining a landbank of permitted sand and gravel reserves sufficient for at least seven years from (1) the extraction of remaining reserves at the following permitted sites: o Bramshill Quarry, Bramshill (sharp sand and gravel); o Eversley Common Quarry, Eversley (sharp sand and gravel); o Eversley Quarry (Chandlers Farm), Eversley (sharp sand and gravel); o Mortimer Quarry, Mortimer West End (sharp sand and gravel); o Frith End Sand Quarry, Sleaford (soft sand); and

133

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description o Kingsley Quarry, Kingsley ( soft sand). • (2) extensions to the following existing sites, provided the proposals address the development considerations outlined in 'Appendix A - Site allocations' of the Plan: o Bramshill Quarry Extension (Yateley Heath Wood), Blackbushe (sharp sand and gravel) (Inset Map 1 of the Plan) – 1.0 million tonnes. • (3) new sand and gravel extraction sites, provided the proposals address the development considerations outlined in 'Appendix A - Site allocations' of the Plan: • Roeshot, Christchurch (sharp sand and gravel) (Inset Map 11 of the Plan) – 3.0 million tonnes. Policy 20 (4) is also of relevance from this Plan. Hampshire Local Flood and The LFWMS aims to protect people, homes, businesses and key infrastructure within the County by: Water Management Strategy • Avoiding risks and managing water resources through effective planning and design. • (LFWMS) Preventing future flooding by reducing or removing existing risks. • Adapting to flood risk in order to minimise the impact and enable normal life to return as soon as possible. • Enabling communities to be better prepared to react to flood events and recover more easily. • Adopting effective practices that are sustainable and affordable now and in the future. The Strategy identifies that flooding issues come from a wide range of causes including development, climate change and coastal change and proper management of these future changes is required to ensure the communities, homes and businesses are protected.

Hertfordshire County Council Hertfordshire Waste Local Plan The Waste Core Strategy sets out the vision, objectives, and spatial strategy for waste planning in Hertfordshire up to 2026, providing the basis for a longer-term – Waste Core Strategy and spatial strategy that complements the county council’s Joint Municipal Waste Management Strategy to 2026. The Local Waste Plan is currently under review and Development Management is at consultation stage. The policies identified in the Plan capture the need to sustainability reduce and manage waste within the County Council area. The Policies document, Waste following sites have been identified in the Waste Allocations document (adopted 2014) that are relevant to the Scheme (within the Schemes Study Area): Allocations (2011-2026), Existing Safeguarded Strategic Sites: Waste Local Plan Review 1) SA060 Cupid Green Depot, Hemel Hampstead (also identified as an allocated site);

(2017) and the Joint Municipal 2) SA236 Land at Redwell Wood Farm, Ridge; and

Waste Management Strategy 3) AS041 Waterdale, Garston (also identified as an allocated site). (2007). Allocated Sites for existing and future waste and Employment Land Areas of Search (ELAS) Sites: 1) AS036 Roehydge, Hatfield; 2) AS048 Travellers Lane, New Barnfield Centre and ELAS048a Travellers Lane; 3) ELAS006 Maylands (East and West); 4) ELAS007 Swallowdale; 5) ELAS168 Buncefield; 6) ELAS164 Icknield Way, Tring; 7) ELAS167 Northbridge Road; 8) ELAS169 River Park; 9) ELAS210 Colney Street Industrial Warehousing Estate; 10) ELAS122 Acrewood Way; 11) ELAS203 Porters Wood/Soothouse Spring; 12) ELAS204 Council Depot and Adjoining Land 13) ELAS205 Brick Knoll Park;

134

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description 14) ELAS207 North Orbital Trading Estate; 15) ELAS208 Riverside Estate; 16) AS041 Waterdale; 17) ELAS212 Tolpits Lane; 18) ELAS221 Watford Business Park; 19) ELAS213 Odhams and Sandown; 20) ELAS214 Greycaine; and 21) ELAS044 Hatfield Aerodrome. Minerals Local Plan Review The current Minerals Local Plan for Hertfordshire was adopted in March 2007. Whilst seemingly out of date this Plan is still adopted for the County Council. This 2002-2016 Plan provides the basis for determining planning applications for, or linked to, minerals development in Hertfordshire. Minerals Policy 2 – Need for Mineral Working, Minerals Policy 3 – Sites for Sand and Gravel Extraction and the working of Preferred Areas and Minerals Policy 10 – Railheads and Wharves are of relevance. The Plan identifies sites of existing and preferred areas for chalk, clay, sand and gravel extraction. Those of relevance to the Scheme (within the Study Area) include: 1) Hatfield Quarry and Suttons Farm (Existing Sand and Gravel Site) and Preferred Area No. 1 (Land at BAe); 2) Land at Symondsyde Farm (Existing Sand and Gravel Site); 3) Tyttenhanger (Existing Sand and Gravel Site) and Preferred Area No. 3 (Land at Coursers Road); and 4) Bovington Brickworks 9Pockets Dell) (Clay). The following Rail Aggregate Depots are also located within the Schemes Study Area: 1) Harper Lane Rail Aggregates Depot and Rail Loop; and 2) Langley Sidings Rail Aggregates Depot. Local Flood Risk Management The LFWMS aims to protect people, homes, businesses and key infrastructure by: Strategy for Hertfordshire 2 • Taking a risk-based approach to local flood risk management. • (LFRMS 2) 2019-2029 Working in partnership to manage flood risk in the County. • Improving understanding of flood risk to better inform decision making. • Supporting those at risk of flooding to manage that risk. • Working to reduce the likelihood of flooding where possible. • Ensuring that flood risk arising from new development is managed appropriately. The Strategy identifies that flooding issues come from a wide range of causes including development, climate change and coastal change and proper management of these future changes is required to ensure the communities, homes and businesses are protected. Oxfordshire County Council Oxfordshire Minerals and Policies within the saved Minerals and Waste Local Plan 1996 which are location specific have been ‘saved’ and assessed against the NPPF, NPPW and the PPG. Waste Local Plan (1996) The following location specific policies are therefore relevant from the 1996 plan. • Sutton Wick Area Policy SW1 - Part of the area between south Abingdon, the River Thames, the Drayton-Sutton Courtenay road and Stonehill Lane will be released for sharp sand and gravel extraction in accordance with the other policies in this Plan. Stanton Harcourt Area (Lower Windrush Valley) (Inset Map3) Policy SH1 – Land for sharp sand and gravel working will be released in the Lower Windrush Valley in accordance with the other policies in this plan: • To the south east of Ducklington • To the north of Hardwick

135

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description • To the south of West End. • Cassington –Yarnton Area (Inset Map 4)

Policy CY1 – Land for sharp sand and gravel working will be released in accordance with other policies in this plan in a small area at the eastern end of the existing permission south of Worton Rectory Farm. Oxfordshire County Council The Oxfordshire Minerals and Waste Local Plan part 1: Core Strategy provides the planning strategies and policies for the development that will be needed for the Minerals and Waste Local Plan supply of minerals and management of waste in Oxfordshire over the period to the end of 2031. It identifies Mineral Safeguarding Resource Areas and Mineral Part 1: Core Strategy (adopted Safeguarding Areas (MSAs) relevant to the Study Area including: 2017) and Emerging Minerals • Mineral Strategic Resource Areas (North Area) (Policy M3): o and Waste Local Plan Part 2: Burford – South of A40 (Crushed Rock) o East/South East of Faringdon (Crushed Rock) Site Allocations (not yet o North West of Bicester (Crushed Rock) adopted - in preparation) o Thames Valley – Caversham to Shiplake (Sharp Sand and Gravel) o Thames & Lower Thame Valleys – Standlake to Yarnton (Sharp Sand and Gravel) o Thames, Lower Windrush & Evenlode Valleys – Standlake to Yarnton (Sharp Sand and Gravel) o Corallian Ridge – Oxford to Faringdon (Soft Sand) o Duns Tew Area (Soft Sand)

There are also a number of MSAs within the Study Area identified by the Policies Map North and South of this Plan.

Part 2: Site Allocations (Sites Plan) will, when adopted, allocate specific sites for minerals and waste development. It was consulted on as a preferred options document at the beginning of 2020. The consultation, (Regulation 18), followed the previous issues and options consultation in 2018, along with work undertaken on-site assessments and evidence gathering. To note this plan is an emerging policy document and will carry little weight as it is only part way through the development plan process. However, the information included in this plan has been considered. The draft plan identified those sites the Council believed could best deliver the policies within the Core Strategy. The draft sites plan identified four mineral extraction sites and nine waste management sites as preferred options. All of the sites identified within the consultation, are considered as reasonable alternatives. The document identified the following sites for allocation which are relevant to the Study Area: • SG20b Land between Eynsham and Cassington; • SG42 Land at Nuneham Courtenay; • SS12 & CR12 Land at Chinham Farm; and • SS18 & CR22 Hatford Quarry West Extension.

Further consultation on the Site Allocations Local Plan is anticipated in Summer 2021. It is expected these sites listed above will remain but there may be further sites added. Oxfordshire County Council The LFRMS is a long-term plan to managing flood risk which outlines ways to encourage public awareness, facilitation of consultation and identifies a number of Local Flood Risk Management objectives to ensure flood risk is managed to the best of the County Councils ability. These objectives include: • Improving understanding of flood risks and ensure that all stakeholders understand their roles and responsibilities for flood risk management.

136

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description Strategy (LFRMS) (date • Taking a collaborative approach to reducing flood risks, using all available resources and funds in an integrated way and in so doing derive enhanced overall unknown) benefit. • Preventing an increase in flood risk from development where possible, by preventing additional flow entering existing drainage systems and watercourses. • Taking a sustainable and holistic approach to flood risk management, seeking to deliver wider environmental and social benefits, climate change mitigation and improvements under the Water Framework Directive. Draft Joint Statutory Spatial The Oxfordshire Plan 2050 that, through working with all Oxfordshire’s authorities, will set out the framework for future planning decisions about housing and Plan: Oxfordshire Plan 2050 infrastructure needs while seeking to protect our natural environment, tackle climate change and improve quality of life for all. The Plan is an important statutory (OP2050) plan and whilst its aspirations are considered here these have not been included in the development of the SA objectives at this stage. The Plan sets out the aspirations for the area which includes: • Protect environmental quality • Strong and healthy communities • Support economic growth • Improve housing availability and affordability • Improve connectivity and movement Surrey County Council

Surrey Minerals Plan (2001) - The Development Plan forms part of the Surrey Minerals Plan and identities preferred areas for future primary aggregate extraction for the period 2009-2026. Primary Aggregates The Plan highlights that sites for excavation are limited to those already with permission. New sites will be considered in Preferred Areas listed in Policies MA2 Development Plan Document and MA3 of the Plan. There are no allocated Preferred Areas within the Study Area for the Scheme.

Surrey Waste Local Plan The Surrey Waste Local Plan identifies existing waste sites and allocated waste sites within the County. Policies 10, 11a and 11b are of relevance to these sites. (2019-2033) Part 1: Policies The Policies Map in Part 1 of the Plan identifies the below sites of relevance to the Study Area. and Part 2: Sites (Adopted 2008) Industrial Land Areas: • Brooklands Industrial Park, Wintersells Road Industrial Park and Byfleet Industrial Estate • Molesey Industrial Estate, West Molesey • Hersham Road North and Lyon Road / North Weylands, Walton-on-Thames Elmbridge • Longmead Industrial Estate, Epsom Epsom and Ewell • Slyfield Industrial Estate, Guildford Guildford • Woodbridge Meadows Industrial Estate, Guildford Guildford • Land around Burnt Common Warehouse, London Road, Send Guildford • North and south of Lysons Avenue, Ash Vale Guildford • Riverway Industrial Estate, Astolat Business Park and Weyvern Park, Peasmarsh Guildford • Land near Dorking West Station, Curtis Road/Station Road, Dorking Mole Valley • Holmethorpe Industrial Estate, Redhill Reigate and Banstead • Perrywood Business Park, Salfords Reigate and Banstead • Salfords Industrial Estate, Salfords Reigate and Banstead • Thorpe Industrial Estate, Thorpe Runnymede • Byfleet Road Employment Allocation, Addlestone Runnymede • York Town Industrial Estate, Doman Road and Stanhope Road, Camberley Surrey Heath • Windmill Road, Sunbury-on -Thames Spelthorne

137

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description • Hobbs Industrial Estate, Felbridge Tandridge • Farnham Trading Estate (including Land off Water Lane), Farnham Waverley • Land at Dunsfold Aerodrome (as part of new settlement), Dunsfold Waverley • Coxbridge Business Park, Farnham Waverley • Monument Way East Industrial Estate (including Woking Business Park), Woking Woking Allocated Sites: • Land to the north east of Slyfield Industrial Estate, Moorfield Road, Guildford • Former Weylands Sewage Treatment Works, Walton-on-Thames Elmbridge • Land adjoining Leatherhead Sewage Treatment Works, Randalls Rd, Leatherhead Mole Valley • Oakleaf Farm, Stanwell Moor • Land at Lambs Business Park, South Godstone Surrey Local Flood Risk The vision of “ To reduce the impact of flooding in Surrey on a long-term, sustainable basis through a co-ordinated approach with partners ” is the main goal that Management Strategy will be achieved as part of this Strategy. The principles to achieve this vision include adopting sustainable flood risk management through planning and (LFRMS) (2017-2032) development to make communities more resilient to flooding. The LFRMS is in support of flood alleviation infrastructure.

West Sussex County Council West Sussex Joint Minerals The Minerals Plan deals only with minerals development and should be read in line with the Waste Plan as identified below. It includes strategies for minerals Local Plan (2018) (Partial planning and use specific policies to deliver those strategies, together with generic development management policies against which proposals for minerals Review March 2021) development will be assessed. It also allocates a strategic mineral site for clay and includes a monitoring and implementation framework. Policy M11 identifies the proposed allocated sites within the West Sussex area. There are no proposed allocated sites within the Study Area. The Minerals Plan also includes Safeguarding sites including: • Proposed Safeguarded Railheads, Crawley The Minerals Plan also includes Sharp Sand and Gravel Mineral Safeguarding Areas (MSAs). There are no Sharp Sand and Gravel MSAs within the Study Area. Brick Clay Resource MSAs and building stone are located within the Study Area shown by Appendix E of this Plan (no named sites). There are no chalk MSAs within the Study Area. West Sussex Waste Local Plan This Plan is used to manage waste and identify waste sites within the West Sussex Council area. Policy W10 identifies strategic waste allocation sites in the West (2014) Sussex Area. There are no waste allocations of relevance to the Study Area.

West Sussex Local Flood Risk The LFRMS is a strategy that identifies the actions the Council need to take over the coming years to bring about a better, more sustainable approach to flooding Management Strategy and managing flooding that works with nature. The Council have identified objectives in achieving this including: (LFRMS) (2013-2018) • Understanding the areas that flood; • Manage flood risk in West Sussex; • Enable people, communities, business and public bodies to work together more effectively; and • Put communities at the heart of what we do and help West Sussex residents during flood events and recover as quickly as possible after incidents. Warwickshire County Council Minerals Local Plan (1995) Although this plan is largely out of date its ‘saved policies’ will remain adopted until the Minerals Development Framework emerging Minerals Plan, as set out below is adopted. Policy M1 – Areas of Search and Preferred Areas has been saved from this Plan. No areas are located within the Study Area.

138

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description Minerals Development When adopted this document sets out the preferred strategy, sites and policies for the extraction of minerals in support of sustainable economic development Framework Emerging Minerals until 2032. Due to its status of yet to be adopted it holds little weight in its policies/identifying sites. However, as the 1995 Minerals Plan is largely out of date it Plan (2019) has been considered here. However, there are no sites allocated within this plan that are located in the Study Area.

Warwickshire Waste Core The Core Strategy of the Waste Development Framework is a Development Plan Document which sets out the Spatial Strategy, Vision, Objectives and Policies for Strategy (adopted 2013) managing waste for a 15-year plan period up to 2028. Figure 7.1 of the Waste Core Strategy identifies broad locations for new waste developments. It does not appear that new sites are located within the Study Area. Local Flood Risk Management The Council aim to reduce and mitigate flood risk to communities within Warwickshire through partnership working, by adopting a prioritised, economic and Strategy (2016) environmentally sustainable approach. The Plan identifies the issues and challenges associated with flooding within Warwickshire but also outlines objectives in which the Council will adopt in order to achieve the identified vision for flood reduction. These objectives include: • Develop a better understanding of local flood risk in Warwickshire to better manage flood risk to people, property, infrastructure and the natural environment. • Seek to reduce local flood risk in Warwickshire in an economically, socially and environmentally sustainable way. • Adopt a collaborative approach to local flood risk management. • Promote community preparedness and resilience to local flood risk. • Enable planning decisions to take full account of local flood risk and seek to reduce local flood risk through development. Single-Tier Authorities (excluding London Boroughs)

Bracknell Forest Council Bracknell Forest Local Plan The Local Plan for Bracknell Forest, although arguably out of date, is still in effect, with some policies being saved. The Plan sets out the overarching vision for the (2002) development of the Borough. Bracknell Forest Council want to ensure that the Borough is a place where people want to live, learn, play and work. The prime purpose of this document is to detail: • the strategy which guides the content of the local plan; • the Borough Council’s objectives and land use policies for the control of development which support the strategy; and • the proposals which would help to secure the implementation of the strategy. To achieve the vision a number of objectives are identified throughout the document which are contained under their topic headings including objectives in relation to the built and natural environment, the economy, the greenbelt, movement, housing, recreation, leisure and tourism and services and community. Replacement Minerals Local Bracknell Forest was originally a District under Berkshire County Council, which was abolished in 1998 and Bracknell Forest became a Unitary Authority. However, Plan for Berkshire (2001) the replacement Minerals Local Plan, adopted in 1995 by Berkshire County Council is still relevant to Bracknell Forest whilst the emerging Joint Minerals Plans (as identified below) is developed. The Replacement Minerals Local Plan for Berkshire has been altered in 1997 and 2001. Various policies from the Plan are now obsolete but the policy relating to Preferred Areas is ‘saved’. The preferred areas are identified within this policy and given in detail in the Appendices of the Local Plan. The sites relevant to the scheme (within the Study Area) have been identified below: • 4 – South of Theale, Reading (635,000 Est yield (tonnes)); • 5 – South-East of Theale, Reading (481,000 Est yield (tonnes)); and • 7 – Raghill Farm, Aldermaston, Reading (500,000 Est yield (tonnes)) Central and Eastern Berkshire Slough Borough Council, Bracknell Forest Council, Reading Borough Council, the Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead and Wokingham Borough Council Emerging Joint Minerals and (collectively referred to as the Central and Eastern Berkshire Authorities) are working in partnership to produce a Joint Minerals and Waste Plan. Waste Plan (2036)

139

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description This Plan will build upon the currently adopted minerals and waste plan, and improve, update, and strengthen the policies and provide details of mineral safeguarding sites (MSAs) and strategic sites that are proposed to deliver the vision. The Plan will also ensure that the full extent of social, economic and environmental benefits of minerals and waste development are captured, contributing to Central and Eastern Berkshire’s economic activity and enhancing the quality of life and living standards within the area. These benefits will be achieved, whilst minimising impacts on the natural and historic environment and positively contributing to climate change adaptation and mitigation. The emerging plan has now been submitted to the Inspectorate (Reg 22) The plan identifies the sites for sand and gravel extraction in policy M4. There are no sites relevant to the Scheme i.e. no proposed allocations are located within the Study Area. Bracknell Forest Borough The LRMS for Bracknell Forest aims to increase awareness of local flood risk issues and sets out how partners are working together to reduce flood risk. The LRMS Council Local Flood Risk options and objectives in managing flood risk in the Borough include: Management Strategy • Implement infrastructure to reduce flooding. • (LFRMS) (2017-2020) Opportunities for education and training in flood risk management and improving the level of understanding in flood risk. • Reduce flooding as a result of new development by controlling water discharge. Due consideration is given to the wider environmental, social benefits and climate change requirements in both the strategy and delivery of objectives and measures. Buckinghamshire Council Buckinghamshire County Council, as a newly formed Unitary Council does not yet have a Local Plan adopted. The Council must pr oduce a Local Plan within five years of coming into being, that is, by April 2025. Until the government has firmed up the detail and timetable for the proposed changes to the planning system regarding Buckinghamshire County Council there is very little progress this Council can do. However, the aims of their local plan once formed have been established, which are overall, to deliver sustainable development through: • meeting the social, economic, and environmental needs of Buckinghamshire • better quality places • more comprehensive and predictable delivery of all kinds of infrastructure. In the meantime the previous Districts Local Plans established when Buckinghamshire was identified as a County will be considered. These are outlined below.

Aylesbury Vale Local The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Development Plan (2004) Environmental Objective • To protect and enhance the District’s environmental heritage. Social Objective • To make provision for an enhanced range and diversity of homes, jobs and other facilities for the existing and future resident population of the District and redress the impact of “disadvantage”. Economic Objective • To facilitate the creation and maintenance of conditions which provide for a healthy, dynamic, diverse and robust economy. In line with Government guidance, some 28 environmental, social and economic criteria (see Appendix 1) have been used to test how any proposal, whether at a strategic or local level, might satisfy these objectives. No attempt has been made to award any weighting to the criteria tests, mainly because this will always be a subjective judgement. The purpose of the process is to provide a framework for identifying potential positive, negative or neutral impacts Chiltern Local Plan: Core The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include : • Strategy (2011) Enable an appropriate amount of housing together with supporting infrastructure. • Ensure that a significant proportion of new dwellings permitted are affordable • Steer development to the most sustainable locations and ensure that new development is of very high quality design appropriate to its locality, and that it maximises efficiency in the use of energy, water and other resources, minimises pollution and waste and uses sustainable building practices, is designed so as to minimise criminal activity and has excellent access to sustainable transport

140

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description • Encourage local employers and small businesses so we can protect the area’s economy for the future. • Promote the vitality and viability of town centres and other local centres, whilst retaining the character of the historic centres • Conserve and enhance the Chilterns Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty and its setting and other natural assets (including biodiversity and geodiversity) of the District. • Encourage provision of specialist facilities and care and appropriate, adaptable homes for elderly people and those with special needs such as dementia. • Seek to retain and improve, and, where possible, add, new services and facilities which serve the whole community, or groups within it, and improve access to these facilities. South Bucks Local Plan: Core The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include Strategy (2011) Community Needs • Manage the rate and scale of new housing development, to deliver between 2,200- 2,800 net new dwellings in the Plan period. • Ensure that local residents can live in a property that is appropriate to their needs in terms of size and type. • Increase the amount of affordable housing provided throughout the District, particularly social rented units • Protect existing physical, social and Green Infrastructure, and provide new or improved infrastructure where it is needed. • Focus new development in accessible locations, reducing the need to travel and increasing opportunities for walking, cycling and public transport use. • Encourage more sustainable forms of transport and increase travel choice to help reduce traffic congestion and facilitate healthier, lower carbon lifestyles. • Increase accessibility for those in rural areas. • Address traffic congestion (including on the A355 / A40 to the east of Beaconsfield) and mitigate the amenity impacts of HGV movements (particularly in and around Iver Village and Richings Park). • Ensure that new development is located and designed in such a way as to promote community safety. Living Environment • Protect and positively manage the Green Belt. • Conserve and enhance the character and high quality environment of the settlements in South Bucks • Conserve and enhance the natural and historic environment in South Bucks. Maintaining Local Economic Prosperity • Promote a balanced local economy in terms of jobs, skills and the local labour supply, and support existing businesses and small start-up businesses. • Maintain and enhance the range and quality of shops and other town centre uses in the District and Local Centres. Climate Change and Environmental Management • Reduce the carbon footprint of South Bucks District. • Ensure use of sustainable construction, reduce energy and resource consumption, and maximise the potential of renewable energy. Wycombe District Local Plan The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include (2009) • Cherish the Chilterns • Strengthen the sense of place • Foster economic growth • Improve strategic connectivity • Facilitate local infrastructure • Deliver housing • Champion town centres • Mitigate climate change Buckinghamshire Minerals and This Plan is still being used despite the changes to Buckinghamshire’s tiered approach. This Plan provides the basis for determining planning applications for, or Waste Local Plan (2016-2036) linked to, minerals and waste development in Buckinghamshire. It includes the following allocation policy identifying the individual sites for sand and gravel provision. Those sites that are relevant to the Scheme (within the Study Area) have only been included below: • Policy 4: Allocated Sites for Sand and Gravel Provision

141

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description Sand and gravel provision to facilitate delivery of the requirement to 2036 will come from sites with planning permission as of 1 January 2016 and the following allocated sites (within the Study Area of the Scheme): o Thames and Colne Valleys: o M1: Springfield Farm South (Beaconsfield) (2Mt) Buckinghamshire Local Flood As above this Plan is still being used despite the changes to Buckinghamshire’s tiered approach. The LFRMS identifies the issues that flood risk can impose on Risk Management Strategy economic, social, environmental, and cultural aspects of the region. It identifies that flood risk can result from, or be exacerbated by, natural factors and other (LFRMS) (2013) factors including; insufficient capacity in drainage systems, Inadequate maintenance of watercourses, inappropriate development in floodplains, building on land in a way that prevents rainfall from draining away naturally, such as roads and carparks that are impermeable to water and unsustainable land management activities. Principle 2 of the strategy outlines there will be provision made to support to local planning authorities to minimise future development in flood risk areas, increase resistance and resilient building design and seek to use development to reduce flood risk elsewhere. Central Bedfordshire Council

Central Bedfordshire Local The Central Bedfordshire Local Plan is currently under examination by a Planning Inspector prior to its adoption. The Plan is the most up to date loc al development Plan 2035 Pre-Submission plan for the Council area and therefore offers creditability to be used in this report. The Plan outlines the challenges faced by Central Bedfordshire and six key themes in which the Council aim to adopt to enable growth in the area. These growth themes are shaped by the vision and objectives. The key themes and Draft 2018 associated objectives are outlined below: • Growth and Infrastructure - SO1 Ensuring sustainable growth and associated infrastructure including the continued regeneration of town and neighbourhood centres to deliver the annual target for new homes and the provision of integrated health and care hubs. SO2 Delivering enough homes and jobs to meet our needs. Promote and demand good urban design practices throughout all types and scale of development across Central Bedfordshire • Local Character - SO3 Conserve and enhance the area’s heritage and settings by ensuring new development, including changes to the public realm, are of high quality design, appropriate to the significance of the heritage asset, and seek to maintain and enhance the contribution of built, landscaped and buried heritage. SO4 Create high quality neighbourhoods that have regard for local character and use sustainability principles which are sensitive and responsive to the significance of the local environment, are distinctive, safe, functional and accessible and which reinforce the identity of the area's townscapes, landscape and public places. • Jobs and Business - SO5 Provide a minimum of 24,000 new jobs by 2035, accommodating new economic growth along strategic and sustainable transportation routes, new mixed-use developments and existing established sites. SO6 Recognise the contribution of land for employment uses to meet the needs of different sectors of the economy and manage the release of surplus employment land for other uses where appropriate. SO7 Link deprived areas with employment benefits arising from the development of major sites and existing key locations. • Homes - SO8 Address housing needs in Central Bedfordshire using appropriate affordable housing targets and policies to encourage quality and choice. • Transport - SO9 Reduce the reliance on the use of the car by improving facilities at bus and train stations, delivering transport interchanges and by promoting safe and sustainable forms of transport, such as improved walking and cycling routes. SO10 Ensure a reliable network of east/west and north/south public transport routes to improve access to local services and facilities, especially for those without a car, through well planned routes and integrated public transport. Encouraging the shift from road to rail freight to reduce demands on the highway network. • Environment - SO11 Promote healthier and more active lifestyles by improving the quality of, and accessibility to, the area’s open spaces, as areas for sports, recreation, visual interest, biodiversity, education, health and wellbeing. SO12 Encourage the development of wildlife corridors and networks and provide new open spaces in line with the requirements identified in Central Bedfordshire's Leisure Strategy SO13 Support the necessary changes to adapt to climate change by minimising emissions of carbon and local air quality pollutants, protecting and enhancing biodiversity. Improving and protecting air and water quality, reducing flood risk and adverse impacts from noise including the safeguarding of quiet areas and reducing the impacts of contaminated land. Minerals and Waste Local Plan The Minerals and Waste Local Plan was adopted by Luton Borough Council and Central Bedfordshire in 2014. It se ts out an overall vision which outlines how the Strategic Sites and Policies area should develop in respect of minerals extraction and waste management developments along with identifying strategic sites for both mineral extraction and waste management. The sites of relevance to the Study Area within Central Bedfordshire include: (2014) • Inset Map 4

142

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description o Land at Thorn Turn, which has a proposed use for non -landfill waste management operation site. (Policy WSP2). o Chalk Group Mineral Safeguarding Area (Policy MSP11 and MSP12). Local Flood Risk Management The LFRMS for Central Bedfordshire outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges. The FRMS outlines Strategy (LFRMS) for Central that the Council will promote partnership working, promote flood risk and development, reduce local flood risk, ensure efficient and timely delivery, enable a good source of resources, and provide to local communities as part of their overall objectives to managing flood risk in their area. Bedfordshire (2014) Luton Borough Council Luton Local Plan (2011-2031) The Local Plan for Luton is the document that contains the policies for how Luton will develop up to 2031, which is the end date of the plan. At a strategic level the Local Plan sets out a vision and objectives for Luton. The vision incorporates social, economic and environmental factors in order for Luton to become an attractive place to live and work. The objectives to achieve this vision include: • Strategic Objective 1: Retain and enhance Luton’s important sub-regional role as a place for economic growth and opportunity including the safeguarding of London Luton Airport’s existing operations and to support its sustainable growth over the Plan period based on its strategic importance. • Strategic Objective 2: To utilise Luton’s economic, social and environmental resources efficiently and sustainably, including appropriate mitigation within the limited physical land capacity of the borough whilst ensuring the permanence of the Green Belt. • Strategic Objective 3: To ensure that new housing delivers an appropriate level of provision to meet local needs in terms of the number of homes subject to capacity constraints and a mix of dwelling types, sizes and tenures that offer local residents a choice of where to live and addresses issues of affordability and overcrowding. Luton Borough Council will work collaboratively with neighbouring authorities to help ensure unmet needs are provided for in appropriate locations outside Luton and to actively monitor progress in terms of unmet needs. • Strategic Objective 4: To establish an effective network and hierarchy of Town, District and Neighbourhood Centres to serve as the heart of local communities; improving health and wellbeing through improved access by train, bus, foot and cycle to a mix of uses including shopping, services and jobs. • Strategic Objective 5: To improve the built and natural environment to deliver quality places through high quality and sustainable design taking into account the landscape, setting and character of the town and neighbourhoods within its national (i.e. AONB) and local landscape settings, including heritage assets and providing safe environments that help to reduce crime and the fear of crime. • Strategic Objective 6: Reduce social, economic and environmental deprivation, particularly where it is spatially concentrated, by taking priority measures to reduce unemployment, improve skills and education and renew housing, community and environmental conditions. • Strategic Objective 7: To safeguard and enable new community, educational and cultural facilities to be delivered and expanded to meet the needs of a growing and diverse borough. • Strategic Objective 8: Improve accessibility, connectivity, sustainability and ease of movement to, from and within the borough. • Strategic Objective 9: To deliver a new Luton football stadium in a location capable of good access to transport infrastructure along with associated uses, shared venue events, and ancillary sports related uses. • Strategic Objective 10: Improve, protect and enhance the biodiversity of natural areas within the town, including the quality, accessibility, health and recreational value of green spaces, the River Lea Corridor, the Chilterns Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB), the Areas of Great Landscape Value (AGLV), Areas of Local Landscape Value (ALLV) and their connectivity. • Strategic Objective 11: To safeguard and ensure the prudent use of natural resources, increase energy and water efficiency and encourage and promote the use of renewable energy sources to help adapt to climate change, manage pollution, natural and land use operational hazards, avoid inappropriate development in areas at risk of flooding, secure improvements in air and water quality and ensure effective waste management. Minerals and Waste Local Plan The Minerals and Waste Local Plan was adopted by Luton Borough Council and Central Bedfordshire in 2014. It sets out an overa ll vision which outlines how the Strategic Sites and Policies area should develop in respect of minerals extraction and waste management developments along with identifying strategic sites for both mineral extraction and waste management. There are no sites within Luton that are located within the Study Area. (2014) Local Flood Risk Management The strategy will focus on local flood risk resulting from surface water, groundwater and ordinary watercourses. The interact ion with main river flooding has also Strategy (2015) been assessed in this strategy. The Council have developed the strategy around key objectives in managing flood risk which include: • Improve the understanding of flood risk in Luton. 143

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description • Flood Risk in Planning and Development Control. • Emergency Planning, Response and Resilience. • Flood Risk Mitigation. • Partnership Working. • Wider Environmental Benefits. • Economics. Reading Borough Council Reading Borough Local Plan The Local Plan for Reading is the document that contains the policies for how Reading will develop up to 2036, which is the end date of the plan. At a strategic 2019-2036 level the Local Plan sets out a vision and objectives for Reading. The vision incorporates social, economic and environmental factors in order for Reading to become an attractive place to live and work. The objectives to achieve this vision include: • Strengthen the role of Reading, including central Reading, as the hub for the Thames Valley, providing an accessible focus for the development of employment, housing, services and facilities, meeting the needs of residents, workers, visitors, those who study in Reading Borough, and the wider area; • Make the most efficient use of Reading’s limited land, particularly previously developed land, to ensure that as many new homes as possible are delivered to meet identified needs, particularly needs for affordable housing; • Improve the quality of life for those living, working, studying in and visiting the Borough, creating inclusive, sustainable communities with good access to employment, open space and waterspace, transport, education, services and facilities (such as sustainable water supplies and wastewater treatment, healthcare services, social and community facilities, sport and recreation, etc.) to meet identified needs; • Form the basis for co-operation with neighbouring authorities to consider the wider West of Berkshire area as a whole; • Ensure new development and existing areas are accessible and sustainable, in accordance with the sustainability appraisal objectives, including reducing its effects on, and adapting to, climate change; • Maintain and enhance the historic, built and natural environment of the Borough through investment and high quality design, and capitalise on these assets to contribute to quality of life and economic success; • Improve and develop excellent transport systems to improve accessibility within Reading and for the wider area by sustainable modes of transport, including walking and cycling; • Offer outstanding cultural opportunities, which are based on multiculturalism, local heritage and high quality, modern arts, leisure and visitor facilities; and • Ensure that Reading is a healthy, clean, safe and socially-inclusive community where the needs of all its citizens are met by high quality, cost effective services and outstanding levels of community involvement. Replacement Minerals Local Reading was originally a District under Berkshire County Council, which was abolished in 1998 and Reading became a Unitary Authority. However, the replacement Plan for Berkshire (2001) Minerals Local Plan, adopted in 1995 by Berkshire County Council is still relevant to Reading whilst the emerging Joint Minerals Plans (as identified below) is developed. The Replacement Minerals Local Plan for Berkshire has been altered in 1997 and 2001. Various policies from the Plan are now obsolete but the policy relating to Preferred Areas is ‘saved’. The preferred areas are identified within this policy and given in detail in the Appendices of the Local Plan. The sites relevant to the scheme (within the Study Area) have been identified below: • 4 – South of Theale, Reading (635,000 Est yield (tonnes)); • 5 – South-East of Theale, Reading (481,000 Est yield (tonnes)); and • 7 – Raghill Farm, Aldermaston, Reading (500,000 Est yield (tonnes)) Central and Eastern Berkshire Slough Borough Council, Bracknell Forest Council, Reading Borough Council, the Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead and Wokingham Borough Council Emerging Joint Minerals and (collectively referred to as the Central and Eastern Berkshire Authorities) are working in partnership to produce a Joint Minerals and Waste Plan. Waste Plan (2036) This Plan will build upon the currently adopted minerals and waste plan, and improve, update, and strengthen the policies and provide details of mineral safeguarding sites (MSAs) and strategic sites that are proposed to deliver the vision . The Plan will also ensure that the full extent of social, economic and environmental benefits of minerals and waste development are captured, contributing to Central and Eastern Berkshire’s economic activity and enhancing the

144

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description quality of life and living standards within the area. These benefits will be achieved, whilst minimising impacts on the natural and historic environment and positively contributing to climate change adaptation and mitigation. The emerging plan has now been submitted to the Inspectorate (Reg 22) The plan identifies the sites for sand and gravel extraction in policy M4. There are no sites relevant to the Scheme i.e. no proposed allocations are located within the Study Area. Local Flood Risk Management The LFRMS aims to increase awareness of local flood risk issues; provide an overview of the on-going flood risk mitigation work underway across Reading; and set Strategy (2015) out the long term strategy for flood risk management. It identifies the extent of flood risk in Reading, establishes priorities for managing local flood risk, and identifies how the Council will work together with other Risk Management Authorities, stakeholders, and local communities to manage local flood risk. To achieve this aim the LFRMS have identified ‘action plans’ that the Council will adopt which include: • Identifying what flood risk is. • Identifying local risk management mechanisms. • Enabling the LFRMS. • Identifying flood risk areas. • Identifying ways and means of mitigation local flood risk. The objectives adopted in this plan include: • To improve knowledge of Local Flood Risk within Reading Borough including collating and mapping all existing flood risk data. • To identify areas where flood risk is high or identify where there is future flood risk as a result of development or climate change. • To engage with local communities to; increase awareness of local flood risk; consult on potential mitigation measures; and inform residents of the work RBC undertake as a LLFA in managing this risk. • To reduce existing flood risk from local sources within the Borough • To inform planning strategies and policies to facilitate flood risk management and mitigation from all local sources of flood risk except Main Rivers and reservoirs • To prevent an increase in flood risk as a result of new development within the Borough • To improve co-operation between Reading Borough Council and the Risk Management Authorities (RMAs) • To facilitate RBC as LLFA in undertaking the duties and responsibilities under the FWMA and the EU Flood Directive • To set out the guiding principles for SuDS in the Borough • To promote sustainability of Flood Risk Management through Water Framework Directive compliance, Climate Change Adaptations, Land Management and the protection and enhancement of habitats and biodiversity. • To take a holistic approach to flood management ensuring that the non-flood related benefits of schemes are maximised, selecting those with multiple and environmental benefits where practicable, and factoring in the monetary value of the additional benefits into the calculations. Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead Council The Royal Borough of Windsor The Local Plan was developed to set out policies relating to the development of the Borough. However, since its adoption the needs and wants of the Borough and Maidenhead Local Plan have developed and a draft Local Plan has been published for consultation. The aim and objective of the both Local Plans are aligned to ensure the Borough (2003) and Emerging Draft remains a place where everyone can thrive in a safe, healthy and sustainable environment. The draft Local Plan, yet to be adopted, is an updated reflection of the Local Plan (currently objectives the Borough commit to in order to achieve their overall vision. Whilst this plan is still to be adopted and replace the existing local plan for the Borough undergoing examination) they provide more creditability for the Scheme development. The objectives within the draft Local Plan include: To conserve and enhance the special qualities of the Borough's built and natural environments. • To meet the varied housing needs of residents in an appropriate way whilst steering development to the most sustainable locations. • To enable the continued success and evolution of the Borough’s distinct visitor economy. • Enable the evolution and growth of the local business economy. • To promote the vitality and viability of town centres so that they are at the heart of their communities.

145

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description • To retain, improve and provide new facilit ies and other infrastructure to support new development and ensure a high quality of life for residents of all ages. • To promote sustainable transport and alternatives to the use of private vehicles. • To maintain and enhance the natural environment of the Borough. • To seek to maintain and enhance the rich heritage of the Borough. • To provide adequate open space for planned development and appropriate leisure and recreation facilities. • To ensure that new development takes account of the need to mitigate the impacts of climate change and on biodiversity. Replacement Minerals Local The Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead was originally a District under Berkshire County Council, which was abolished in 1998 and the Royal Borough of Plan for Berkshire (2001) Windsor and Maidenhead became a Unitary Authority. However, the replacement Minerals Local Plan, adopted in 1995 by Berkshire County Council is still relevant to this area whilst the emerging Joint Minerals Plans (as identified below) is developed. The Replacement Minerals Local Plan for Berkshire has been altered in 1997 and 2001. Various policies from the Plan are now obsolete but the policy relating to Preferred Areas is ‘saved’. The preferred areas are identified within this policy and given in detail in the Appendices of the Local Plan. The sites relevant to the scheme (within the Study Area) have been identified below: • 4 – South of Theale, Reading (635,000 Est yield (tonnes)); • 5 – South-East of Theale, Reading (481,000 Est yield (tonnes)); and • 7 – Raghill Farm, Aldermaston, Reading (500,000 Est yield (tonnes)) Central and Eastern Berkshire Slough Borough Council, Bracknell Forest Council, Reading Borough Council, the Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead and Wokingham Borough Council Emerging Joint Minerals and (collectively referred to as the Central and Eastern Berkshire Authorities) are working in partnership to produce a Joint Minerals and Waste Plan. Waste Plan (2036) This Plan will build upon the currently adopted minerals and waste plan, and improve, update, and strengthen the policies and provide details of mineral safeguarding sites (MSAs) and strategic sites that are proposed to deliver the vision . The Plan will also ensure that the full extent of social, economic and environmental benefits of minerals and waste development are captured, contributing to Central and Eastern Berkshire’s economic activity and enhancing the quality of life and living standards within the area. These benefits will be achieved, whilst minimising impacts on the natural and historic environment and positively contributing to climate change adaptation and mitigation. The emerging plan has now been submitted to the Inspectorate (Reg 22) The plan identifies the sites for sand and gravel extraction in policy M4. There are no sites relevant to the Scheme i.e. no proposed allocations are located within the Study Area. Royal Borough of Windsor and The LFRMS will focus on local flood risk resulting from surface water, groundwater and ordinary watercourse flooding, as well as assess the interaction with Main Maidenhead Local Flood Risk River flooding. The strategy will also explain how the Royal Borough will manage this flood risk, both now and in the future. The LFRMS establishes a number of Management Strategy objectives to ensure the efficient and sustainable management of flood risk including: (LFRMS) (2014) • Develop a clear understanding of flood risk within the Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead and increase public awareness. • Establish and maintain effective partnerships with key organisations and local communities, to deliver a sustainable, cost effective approach to flood risk management that reduces flood risk and delivers wider environmental and social economic benefits where possible. • Ensure that land use planning and application decisions take full account of flood risk, avoiding development in inappropriate locations, minimising and preventing an increase in flood risk wherever possible. • Develop plans to reduce existing flood risk taking account of people, communities and the environment. • Ensure that emergency plans and responses to flood incidents are effective and that communities are prepared and resilient to flood risk. • Identify national, regional and local funding mechanisms to deliver flood risk management solutions and schemes. • Work in partnership with the Environment Agency, professional partners, other stakeholders and communities to deliver effective schemes to alleviate flood risk from the River Thames. Slough Borough Council

146

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description Slough Local Development The Core Strategy is part of a range of documents included in the Local Development Plan which sets out the key vision and strategic objectives for Slough. The Plan including Core Strategy main vision is for Slough to have a positive image which will help to create prosperous, confident and (2006 – 2026) cohesive communities. The Strategic Objectives to ensure the vision is achieved include: • To focus development in the most accessible locations such as the town centre, district and neighbourhood centres and public transport hubs and make the best use of existing buildings, previously developed land and existing and proposed infrastructure. • To meet the housing allocation for Slough identified in the South East Regional Plan, while also preventing the loss of existing housing accommodation to other uses. • To provide housing in appropriate locations which meets the needs of the whole community; is of an appropriate mix, type, scale and density; is designed and built to high quality standards and is affordable. • To ensure that the existing business areas continue to provide sufficient employment generating uses in order to maintain a sustainable, buoyant and diverse economy and ensure that Slough residents continue to have access to a wide range of job opportunities. • To encourage investment and regeneration of employment areas and existing town, district and neighbourhood shopping centres to increase their viability, vitality, variety and distinctiveness. • To maintain and provide for community services and facilities in appropriate locations that are easily accessible. • To preserve and enhance Slough’s open spaces and to protect the Green Belt from inappropriate development and seek, wherever practically possible, to increase the size and quality of the Green Belt land in the Borough. • To protect, enhance and wherever practically possible increase the size of the Borough’s biodiversity, natural habitats and water environment and those elements of the built environment with specific townscape, landscape and historic value. • To reduce the need to travel and create a transport system that encourages sustainable modes of travel such as walking, cycling and public transport. • To reduce areas subject to risk of flooding and pollution and control the location of development in order to protect people and their property from the effects of pollution and flooding. • To promote a safe and healthy community that is inclusive of the needs of the Borough’s diverse population. Replacement Minerals Local Slough was originally a District under Berkshire County Council, which was abolished in 1998 and Slough became a Unitary Authority. However, the replacement Plan for Berkshire (2001) Minerals Local Plan, adopted in 1995 by Berkshire County Council is still relevant to this area whilst the emerging Joint Minerals Plans (as identified below) is developed. The Replacement Minerals Local Plan for Berkshire has been altered in 1997 and 2001. Various policies from the Plan are now obsolete but the policy relating to Preferred Areas is ‘saved’. The preferred areas are identified within this policy and given in detail in the Appendices of the Local Plan. The sites relevant to the scheme (within the Study Area) have been identified below: • 4 – South of Theale, Reading (635,000 Est yield (tonnes)); • 5 – South-East of Theale, Reading (481,000 Est yield (tonnes)); and 7 – Raghill Farm, Aldermaston, Reading (500,000 Est yield (tonnes)) Central and Eastern Berkshire Slough Borough Council, Bracknell Forest Council, Reading Borough Council, the Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead and Wokingham Borough Council Emerging Joint Minerals and (collectively referred to as the Central and Eastern Berkshire Authorities) are working in partnership to produce a Joint Minerals and Waste Plan. Waste Plan (2036) This Plan will build upon the currently adopted minerals and waste plan, and improve, update, and strengthen the policies and provide details of mineral safeguarding sites (MSAs) and strategic sites that are proposed to deliver the vision . The Plan will also ensure that the full extent of social, economic and environmental benefits of minerals and waste development are captured, contributing to Central and Eastern Berkshire’s economic activity and enhancing the quality of life and living standards within the area. These benefits will be achieved, whilst minimising impacts on the natural and historic environment and positively contributing to climate change adaptation and mitigation. The emerging plan has now been submitted to the Inspectorate (Reg 22) The plan identifies the sites for sand and gravel extraction in policy M4. There are no sites relevant to the Scheme i.e. no proposed allocations are located within the Study Area.

147

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description Local Flood Risk Management The overarching objectives of the LFRMS are to improve safety, health and wellbeing for residents and create a cleaner/greener Slough. This will be done by: Strategy (LFRMS) for Slough • identifying where flooding occurs, and what it affects, and reducing flood risk where appropriate. • (2013) avoiding inappropriate development in areas of flood risk • developing public awareness of flood risk. • opening up watercourses where possible, improving public accessibility and enhance and improving their quality and biodiversity. • Any flood management activities carried out will aim to enhance the built and natural environment. Swindon Borough Council The Swindon Local Plan 2015- The Swindon Local Plan is the principal planning policy document for the Borough, providing the development strategy to deliver sustainable growth to the year 2026 2026. The Plan sets out specific policies for development within the Borough which aim to achieve the overall strategic vision in developing a place that people want to live, work and invest. Underpinning the Spatial Vision for Swindon and the Borough Council’s priorities are a themed set of Strategic Objectives which include: • Strategic Objective 1: High Quality Sustainable Development - to improve the image of Swindon, enable inclusive communities and address climate change by the provision of high quality, well designed and sustainable development. • Strategic Objective 2: Infrastructure - to meet the infrastructure needs for and arising from the growth of Swindon (including health and community needs) in a timely and co-ordinated manner and being adequately funded. • Strategic Objective 3: Economy - to meet the needs of local businesses and the forecast growth in the local economy, and to enhance Swindon’s position as the UK’s best business location. • Strategic Objective 4: Housing - to meet the Borough’s housing needs by the provision of well-designed sustainable housing, at sustainable locations and at a range of types and densities according to local needs and circumstances, and that promotes the effective use of land. • Strategic Objective 5: Education - to meet the need for education provision arising from the anticipated growth in population and to enable an improvement in skills and qualifications, particularly through the provision and support of tertiary education opportunities. • Strategic Objective 6: Community and Health - to promote healthy lifestyles and to meet the need for community and health facilities arising from growth and demographic change in the Borough. • Strategic Objective 7: Transport - to support Swindon’s growth through the provision of a comprehensive and sustainable transport network that is efficient, safe, affordable, accessible and easy to understand, and offers a genuine choice of modes. • Strategic Objective 8: Culture and Leisure - to enable the provision of cultural and leisure facilities commensurate with Swindon’s size and growth in population and realise Swindon’s potential as a regional leisure destination. • Strategic Objective 9: Green Infrastructure - to provide an attractive and inspirational environment to live, work, learn and play, by the provision of a far- reaching network of connected and multifunctional green spaces linked to the wider countryside. • Strategic Objective 10: Natural, Built & Historic Environment - to ensure that development respects, enhances, and conserves the best of the existing built, historic and natural environment in the Borough. Wiltshire and Swindon Minerals Wiltshire and Swindon work together to produce joint Minerals and Waste plans The principle aim of the Minerals Development Control Policies DPD is to ensure Core Strategy (2006-2026), that applications received by the Councils for minerals development result in sites that are operated and managed to high standards with minimum impacts to Development Control Policies local communities and the environment. The Wiltshire and Swindon Minerals site allocation Local Plan, May 2013, identifies Sand and Gravel Allocations in the Development Plan Document Upper Thames Valley. Those of relevance to the Scheme, within the Study Area include: (2009) and Site Allocation • Cox's Farm (2.4 million tonnes). • Local Plan (2013) Black burr Farm (0.81 million tonnes). • North Farm (0.3 million tonnes). • Land east of Calcutt (2.2 million tonnes). • Land at Cotswold Community (2.76 million tonnes).

148

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description Swindon Local Flood Risk The aim of this Strategy is to manage flood risk in a way that will benefit people, property and the environment. The Strategy outlines the challenges faced by Management Strategy Swindon in relation to flood risk and a number of key objectives that will help reduce these risks. These objectives include education people on how to manage (LFRMS) (2014) flood risk, identifying areas of high flood risk for potential developers and maintain and improve existing local flood risk management infrastructure whilst supporting new flood risk management infrastructure. West Berkshire Council West Berkshire Development The Core Strategy forms part of the Local Plan for the district. The Core Strategy is a development plan document which sets out the Councils overall planning Plan including Core Strategy strategy to 2026. It explains their vision for the area, and how it will be delivered. It also provides a framework for more detailed policies which will be contained Development Plan (2006- in future development plan documents prepared as part of the Local Plan. In order to achieve the vision, the Strategy sets out strategic spatial objectives including: 2026) and West Berkshire • Tackling Climate Change. To exceed national targets for carbon dioxide emissions reduction and deliver the District’s growth in a way that helps to adapt to District Local Plan 1991-2006 and mitigate the impacts of climate change. • Housing Growth. To deliver at least 10,500 homes across West Berkshire between 2006 – 2026. These homes will be delivered in an effective and timely (Saved Policies 2007). manner, will maximise the use of suitable brownfield land and access to facilities and services and will be developed at densities which make the most efficient use of land whilst responding to the existing built environment. • Housing Needs To secure provision of affordable and market housing to meet local needs in both urban and rural areas of the District. To provide homes in a way that promotes sustainable communities, providing a mix of house sizes, types and tenures to meet identified needs, and respond to the changing demographic profile of the District. • Economy. To provide for a range of sizes and types of employment land and premises in the right locations to respond to the forecast changes in economic activity, the location of new residential development and the specific needs of the rural economy, including the equestrian and horseracing industries. • Infrastructure Requirements. To ensure that infrastructure needs (including community services and facilities) arising from the growth in West Berkshire are provided in a timely and coordinated manner, which keeps pace with development in accordance with the detail set out in the Infrastructure Delivery Plan. • Green Infrastructure. To ensure that West Berkshire contains a strong network of well-connected and multi-functional green infrastructure which provides an attractive environment to live, work and spend leisure time, providing benefits for health and opportunities for formal and informal recreation. • Transport. To put in place a sustainable transport network which supports the growth in West Berkshire, links existing and new development, prioritises walking, cycling and public transport and provides a genuine choice of modes. Traffic management measures will minimise the impact of new development on the existing network. • Retail. To achieve growth in retail activity and consequent increase in the vitality and vibrancy of town centres in West Berkshire. To meet the range of shopping needs for residents and visitors largely through the completion of the Parkway development and through the regeneration of Thatcham town centre. To provide for local shopping need in town, district and local centres to serve the needs of existing and future residents. • Heritage. To ensure that development to 2026 is planned, designed and managed in a way that ensures the protection and enhancement of the local distinctive character and identity of the built, historic and natural environment in West Berkshire's towns, villages and countryside. Replacement Minerals Local West Berkshire was originally a District under Berkshire County Council, which was abolished in 1998 and West Berkshire became a Unitary Authority. However, Plan for Berkshire (2001) the replacement Minerals Local Plan, adopted in 1995 by Berkshire County Council is still relevant to this area whilst the emerging Joint Minerals Plans (as identified below) is developed. The Replacement Minerals Local Plan for Berkshire has been altered in 1997 and 2001. Various policies from the Plan are now obsolete but the policy relating to Preferred Areas is ‘saved’. The preferred areas are identified within this policy and given in detail in the Appendices of the Local Plan. The sites relevant to the scheme (within the Study Area) have been identified below: • 4 – South of Theale, Reading (635,000 Est yield (tonnes)); • 5 – South-East of Theale, Reading (481,000 Est yield (tonnes)); and • 7 – Raghill Farm, Aldermaston, Reading (500,000 Est yield (tonnes)) Emerging West Berkshire This Plan has not yet been submitted for Examination however as the Replacement Minerals Local Plan is 20 years old this emerging Local Plan gives a much Minerals and Waste Local Plan more up to date snapshot of the existing sites with planning permission and 2 proposed allocations. The Plan will provide the planning framework for Minerals

149

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description (submission document for and Waste development in West Berkshire. It will set out the long-term vision for mineral and waste development to 2037 and set out the policy context for consultation, 2020) assessing planning applications for minerals and waste development in the District. In relation to allocated sites Policy 4 is of relevance. Policy 4 identifies allocated sites which include Tidney Bed, Ufton Nervet allocated for Sharp Sand and Gravel and Chieveley Services, Chieveley allocated for Soft Sand. The plan acknowledges that 1 allocation for soft sand will not be sufficient within the plan period so indicates future applications within the area of search will be considered, as per the policy above. The below indicates the sites safeguarded for mineral extraction with permission within the Study Area of the Scheme: • Existing Permitted Extraction Sites o Wasing Lower Farm, Wasing; o Kennetholme, Thatcham; o Craven Keep, Hamstead Marshall; o Harts Hill Quarry, Upper Bucklebury; o Moores Farm, Pingewood; and o Copyhold Farm, Curridge. Draft Local Flood Risk Through the process of producing the LFRMS West Berkshire has established the following local flood risk management objectives: Management Strategy • To provide a clear explanation of the roles and responsibilities of organisations in the management of Flood Risk and how we will work together to manage (LFRMS) (2013-2017) this risk. • To develop a clear understanding of flood risk within West Berkshire and increase public awareness. • To develop plans to reduce existing flood risk taking account of people, communities and the environment. • To identify measures to reduce flood risk. • To ensure that planning decisions take full account of flood risk. • To ensure that emergency plans are effective, and that individuals and communities understand the risks along with their role in an emergency. West Northamptonshire Council

West Northamptonshire Joint The Core Strategy sets out the long -term vision and objectives for the whole of the area covered by Northampton Borough, Daventry District and South Part 1 Core Strategy (adopted Northamptonshire Councils. The objectives of the Plan include: • Objective 1 - Climate Change To minimise demand for resources and mitigate and adapt to climate change, by: 2014) and the Northampton o Promoting sustainable design and construction in all new development; Local Plan Part 2 (emerging) o Ensuring strategic development allocations are located and designed so as to be resilient to future climate change and risk of flooding; • Encouraging renewable energy production in appropriate locations; and o Ensuring new development promotes the use of sustainable travel modes. • Objective 2 - Infrastructure and Development To protect and enhance existing local services and to ensure social, physical and green infrastructure is adequately provided to meet the needs of people and business in a timely and sustainable manner in response to regeneration and new development in West Northamptonshire. • Objective 3 - Connections To reduce the need to travel, shorten travel distances and make sustainable travel a priority across West Northamptonshire by maximising the use of alternative travel modes. In so doing, combat congestion in our main towns and town centres, reduce carbon emissions and address social exclusion for those in both rural and urban areas who do not have access to a private car. • Objective 4 - Protecting and Building Urban Communities To ensure new development in urban areas effectively supports and links new and existing communities physically and socially, to achieve social cohesion and address the areas of deprivation identified in parts of Northampton and Daventry. • Objective 5 - Supporting Northampton Town Centre To support the regeneration of Northampton's town centre by making it the focus of high quality retail, employment, leisure and cultural development at the heart of Northamptonshire and to support the delivery of the Northampton Central Area Action Plan. • Objective 6 - Supporting Daventry Town Centre To support the regeneration of Daventry town centre through planned growth and infrastructure delivery. • Objective 7 - Supporting Towcester and Brackley's Town Centres To support Towcester and Brackley in their rural service centre roles to ensure their communities are self-sufficient sustainable places and the towns are the focus of services and facilities for surrounding villages. 150

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description • Objectiv e 8 - Economic Advantage To strengthen and diversify West Northamptonshire's economy by taking advantage of our internationally wel l-placed location, strategic transport network and proximity to London and Birmingham. • Objective 9 - Specialist Business Development To support and develop opportunities for specialist employment clusters and business development focused on a low carbon economy. • Objective 10 - Educational Attainment To raise educational achievement and the skills base of our communities through supporting the development of West Northamptonshire's learning infrastructure and strengthening the link between local businesses and local schools, Moulton and Northampton Colleges, the University of Northampton and Daventry and Silverstone University Technology Colleges. • Objective 11 - Housing To provide a range of housing in sustainable locations to ensure all residents have access to a home that they can afford and that meets their needs. Housing development will be focused at the most sustainable location of Northampton, supported by Daventry and Towcester and Brackley in their roles as rural service centres with limited development in the rural areas to provide for local needs and support local services. • Objective 12 - Protecting and Supporting Rural Communities To protect and support rural communities to ensure they thrive and remain vital. • Objective 13 - Rural Diversification and Employment To support rural diversification and rural employment opportunities, in particular those related to agriculture, horticulture and forestry. • Objective 14 - Green Infrastructure To protect natural species present in West Northamptonshire and enhance the existing strategic green infrastructure network, including biodiversity corridors, by incorporating and designing these into Sustainable Urban Extensions (SUEs) at Northampton, Daventry, Towcester and Brackley. • Objective 15 - High Quality Design To achieve high quality design in both rural and urban areas that takes account of local character and heritage and provides a safe, healthy and attractive place for residents, visitors and businesses. • Objective 16 - Heritage To conserve and where possible enhance, through carefully managed change, the heritage assets and their settings of West Northamptonshire, and to recognise their role in providing a sense of place and local distinctiveness. Northamptonshire Minerals The Minerals and Waste Local Plan for Northamptonshire was updated in 2017. This Plan provides the basis for determining planning applications for, or linked and Waste Local Plan 2017 to, minerals and waste development in Northamptonshire. The Plan identifies boundaries of the allocated sites for minerals development and of the designated industrial area locations and allocated sites for wate management development. There are no sites of relevance to the Scheme (within the Study Area). Northamptonshire Local Flood The LFRMS aims to protect people, homes, businesses and key infrastructure by: Risk Management Strategy • Developing a collaborative approach to managing flood risk. • (LFRMS) 2012 Developing a greater understanding of local flood risk. • Adopting a sustainable approach to reducing local flood risk. • Reduce harmful consequences of flooding to communities and human health through proactive actions. • Minimise flood risk that may arise from new development by producing guidance, standards etc. • Ensuring financial viability of flood related schemes through development of appropriate policies and assessment tools. • Encourage flood management activities by private owners of ordinary watercourses and flood defence structures. The Strategy identifies that flooding issues come from a wide range of causes including development, climate change and coastal change and proper management of these future changes is required to ensure the communities, homes and businesses are protected. Wiltshire Council Wiltshire Local Development The plan provides an overarching planning policy framework for Wiltshire for the period up to 2026. It identifies specific area core strategies however also outlines Plan Core Strategy (2015- a strategic spatial vision and core strategy which is relevant to this stage of the Scheme. The strategic vision for Wiltshire is to ensure it remains a place that people 2026) want to live and work. The strategic objectives to achieve this vision include: • Strategic objective 1: delivering a thriving economy. • Strategic objective 2: addressing climate change. • Strategic objective 3: providing everyone with access to a decent, affordable home. • Strategic objective 4: helping to build resilient communities.

151

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description • Strategic objective 5: protecting and enhancing the natural, historic and built environment. • Strategic objective 6: ensuring that adequate infrastructure is in place to support our communities. Wiltshire and Swindon Minerals Wiltshire and Swindon work together to produce joint Minerals and Waste plans The principle aim of the Minerals Development Control Policies DPD is to ensure Core Strategy (2006-2026), that applications received by the Councils for minerals development result in sites that are operated and managed to high standards with minimum impacts to Development Control Policies local communities and the environment. The Wiltshire and Swindon Minerals site allocation Local Plan, May 2013, identifies Sand and Gravel Allocations in the Development Plan Document Upper Thames Valley. Those of relevance to the Scheme, within the Study Area include: (2009) and Site Allocation • Cox's Farm (2.4 million tonnes). • Local Plan (2013) Black burr Farm (0.81 million tonnes). • North Farm (0.3 million tonnes). • Land east of Calcutt (2.2 million tonnes). • Land at Cotswold Community (2.76 million tonnes). Wiltshire Local Flood Risk The LFRMS outlines the key challenges Wiltshire currently faces due to flood risk. It highlights the requirement to manage flood risk more efficiently by improving Management Strategy knowledge, protection, resilience, the environment and communications. It supports flood risk alleviation infrastructure. (LFRMS) 2014 Wokingham Borough Council Wokingham Local Plan Core The Core Strategy is part of the Local Development plan and sets out the key elements of the Boroughs vision for the development of Wokingham borough until Strategy (2026) March 2026. This includes 21 policies and strategies to provide new housing, schools, roads, places to work and other services. Replacement Minerals Local Wokingham was originally a District under Berkshire County Council, which was abolished in 1998 and Wokingham became a Unitary Authority. However, the Plan for Berkshire (2001) replacement Minerals Local Plan, adopted in 1995 by Berkshire County Council is still relevant to this area whilst the emerging Joint Minerals Plans (as identified below) is developed. The Replacement Minerals Local Plan for Berkshire has been altered in 1997 and 2001. Various policies from the Plan are now obsolete but the policy relating to Preferred Areas is ‘saved’. The preferred areas are identified within this policy and given in detail in the Appendices of the Local Plan. The sites relevant to the scheme (within the Study Area) have been identified below: • 4 – South of Theale, Reading (635,000 Est yield (tonnes)); • 5 – South-East of Theale, Reading (481,000 Est yield (tonnes)); and • 7 – Raghill Farm, Aldermaston, Reading (500,000 Est yield (tonnes)) Central and Eastern Berkshire Slough Borough Council, Bracknell Forest Council, Reading Borough Council, the Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead and Wokingham Borough Council Emerging Joint Minerals and (collectively referred to as the Central and Eastern Berkshire Authorities) are working in partnership to produce a Joint Minerals and Waste Plan. Waste Plan (2036) This Plan will build upon the currently adopted minerals and waste plan, and improve, update, and strengthen the policies and provide details of mineral safeguarding sites (MSAs) and strategic sites that are proposed to deliver the vision . The Plan will also ensure that the full extent of social, economic and environmental benefits of minerals and waste development are captured, contributing to Central and Eastern Berkshire’s economic activity and enhancing the quality of life and living standards within the area. These benefits will be achieved, whilst minimising impacts on the natural and historic environment and positively contributing to climate change adaptation and mitigation. The emerging plan has now been submitted to the Inspectorate (Reg 22) The plan identifies the sites for sand and gravel extraction in policy M4. There are no sites relevant to the Scheme i.e. no proposed allocations are located within the Study Area. Wokingham Borough Council The Strategy focuses on local flood risk and explains the ways in which WBC will ensure flood risk is managed in an integrated and effective way. The Strategy Local Flood Risk Management provides a single consistent reference point for flood risk management in the Borough. The Strategy highlights the requirement to manage flood risk more Strategy (LFRMS) 2015 efficiently by improving knowledge, working collaboratively with other Flood Risk Management Authorities, ensuring planning decision take full account of flood

152

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description risk, maintain, and where necessary improve flood risk management infrastructure, ensuring emergency plans are effective and identifying funding available. It supports flood risk alleviation infrastructure.

153

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix B2: Lower-Tier Spatial Plans

Title Description

Lower-Tier Plans located within Gloucestershire County Council

Cheltenham Borough Council The Cheltenham Plan Cheltenham Borough Council have created a number of themed visions with associated objectives which relate to people, places, communities, economy, the environment (Adopted 2020) and so on. Theme A vision includes “Cheltenham is a place where people live in strong, safe, healthy, well-served and well-connected communities which are successful and sustainable places to live and work, and which contain the necessary infrastructure to support social and cultural life together with space for people and places to evolve in future”. The Objectives associated with this vision include: • Recognise the local distinctiveness of Cheltenham’s various neighbourhoods and deliver regeneration where appropriate; • Ensure provision of sufficient housing land and other opportunities for residential development to meet the needs of the current and future population of the Borough; • Understand what people need from the places where they live and work, to help create socially sustainable communities using locally specific models; • Ensure that new communities are integrated with neighbouring communities to promote cohesion, address issues of deprivation, and reduce social isolation; • Enable investment in schools, healthcare and other community facilities and meeting places in order to support new and existing communities; • Increase opportunities for sport and active leisure, particularly in areas of under-provision; • Design places, with a focus on connectivity, that are accessible to all and where barriers to walking and cycling are removed so that active travel and public transport are the default choices; • Improve health outcomes by promoting and prioritising active travel; i • Support a network of neighbourhood centres that provide an appropriate range of local amenities to support sustainable communities; • Ensure that new development protects public safety and amenity and creates environments that contribute to reducing crime and fear of crime. Theme B vision includes “Cheltenham is a place with a prosperous and enterprising economy where education, skills and employment opportunities are increasing and diversifying, where businesses choose to invest and deliver increased value of economic output, and where the benefits are felt by all”. The Objectives associated with this vision include: • Ensure provision of sufficient sites and a range of employment land and other opportunities for economic development to attract new businesses and to enable existing businesses to grow and develop within Cheltenham, creating an environment that supports economic growth, provision of local jobs, and flexibility within the local economy; • Promote the development of adaptable and flexible employment space within Cheltenham so that sites and buildings can be re-used with minimal environmental impact; • Support opportunities for business start-ups and small / medium-sized enterprises (SMEs); • Assist in developing and maintaining an attractive retail offer in the town centre and other designated centres; e) Help secure a balanced economy overall which includes a focus on retail and leisure employment in the central core; • Deliver a range of sustainable transport choices through appropriate infrastructure improvements including better cross-town and local links, prioritised junctions, and improved public transport; • Encourage knowledge-intensive services businesses in high-value sectors; • Support development of Cheltenham’s educational facilities to ensure that the young people have access to a wide range of opportunities.

154

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Theme C vision includes “Cheltenham is a place where the quality and sustainability of our cultural assets and natural and built environment are valued and recognised locally, nationally and internationally, and where tourists choose to visit and return. • Conserve and enhance Cheltenham’s architectural, townscape and landscape heritage both within and out of the town’s conservation areas; • Conserve, manage and enhance Cheltenham’s natural environment and biodiversity, including its parks and gardens, its trees and green spaces, its countryside, and the Cotswolds Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty; • Support development of Cheltenham’s sporting, cultural, arts and tourism infrastructure (including public art) to ensure that the Borough maintains its reputation as a cultural destination and continues to be an attractive place to visit; • Address the challenge of climate change, ensuring that development meets high design and sustainability standards and is built to be adaptable over the long term; • Improve pedestrian and cycle connectivity and permeability throughout the town by creating a network of convenient routes which include multifunctional green spaces that link with the wider countryside, attractive and safe streets and spaces, and measures which reduce the visual and environmental impact of vehicular traffic; • Support provision, maintenance and continued investment in a high-quality public and private realm, including public hard-landscaped areas, formal and informal green spaces, and private gardens that contribute to local amenity and wildlife biodiversity; • Manage and reduce the risk of flooding within the Borough. Stroud District Council Stroud District Local Plan The Council have adopted six objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: 2031 (Adopted 2015) Homes and communities: • Strategic Objective SO1: Accessible communities o Maintaining and improving accessibility to services and amenities for our communities, with: o Healthcare for all residents o Affordable and decent housing for local needs o Active social, leisure and recreation opportunities o Youth and adult learning opportunities Economy and infrastructure: • Strategic Objective SO2: Local economy and jobs o Providing for a strong, diverse, vibrant local economy that enables balanced economic growth, coupled with enhanced job opportunities across the District • Strategic Objective SO3: Town centres and rural hinterlands o Improving the safety, vitality and viability of our town centres, which link to and support the needs of their rural hinterlands • Strategic Objective SO4: Transport and travel o Promoting healthier alternatives to the use of the private car and seeking to reduce CO2 emissions by using new technologies, active travel and/or smarter choices, working towards a more integrated transport system to improve access to local goods and services Our environment and surroundings: • Strategic Objective SO5: Climate Change and environmental limits o Promoting a development strategy that mitigates global warming, adapts to climate change and respects our environmental limits by: o Securing energy efficiency through building design o Maximising the re-use of buildings and recycling of building materials o Minimising the amount of waste produced and seeking to recover energy o Promoting the use of appropriately located brownfield land o Supporting a pattern of development that facilitates the use of sustainable modes of transport 155

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

o Minimising and mitigating against future flood risks, recycling water resources and protecting and enhancing the quality of o ur District’s surface and groundwater resources • Strategic Objective SO6: Our District’s distinctive qualities o Conserving and enhancing Stroud District’s distinctive qualities, based on landscape, townscape and biodiversity Cotswold District Council Cotswold District Local The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Plan 2011-2031 Natural and Historic Environment (Adopted 2018) Through the use of appropriate planning policies in the development management process: • Conserve and enhance the high quality, local distinctiveness and diversity of the natural and historic environment. • Ensure that new development is of high quality and sustainable design, which reflects local character and distinctiveness, is appropriately sited, and provides attractive and inclusive environments. • Protect the open countryside against sporadic development, while also avoiding coalescence of settlements, particularly around Cirencester. • Support the creation of new green infrastructure to enhance environmental quality and provide health benefits. Population and Housing Through establishing the District's OAN for the Plan period and allocation of land: • Provide an adequate supply of quality housing, of appropriate types and tenures, to at least meet objectively assessed needs. • Identify suitable land in appropriate locations to provide sufficient pitches for gypsy and traveller accommodation, to meet the needs established through the Gypsy & Traveller Accommodation Assessment. Local Economy Through implementation of the OAN, Economic Strategy and allocation of land: • Support the local economy and enable the creation of more high quality jobs in the District, which meet local employment needs. • Encourage the vitality and viability of town and village centres as places for shopping, leisure, cultural and community activities, including maintaining Cirencester’s key employment and service role. • Support sustainable tourism in ways that enable the District to act as a tourist destination which attracts higher numbers of longer-stay visitors. Infrastructure and Service Provision Through implementation of the IDP, maximise the quality of life by maintaining and supporting the delivery of infrastructure, services and facilities needed to support local communities and businesses. Sustainable Travel Reduce car use by: • Locating most developments in sustainable locations where there is better access to jobs, services and facilities and public transport. • Supporting improvements in public transport and walking/ cycling networks. Climate Change and Flood Risk Reduce the environmental impact of development and vulnerability to the impacts of climate change by: • Maximising water and energy efficiency, promoting the use of renewable energy sources and sustainable construction methods, and reducing pollution and waste. • Supporting the principle of waste minimisation. • Locating development away from areas identified as being at high risk from any form of flooding or from areas where development would increase flood risk to others. Tewksbury Borough council

156

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Tewkesbury Local Plan The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These objectives include: (2011) • To promote sustainable development • To conserve and enhance the built and natural heritage of the Borough. • To stimulate a healthy local economic base. • To meet the needs of residents whilst enhancing their quality of life. Lower-Tier Plans located within Hampshire County Council

Basingstoke and Deane District Council Basingstoke and Deane The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Local Plan (2011 to Prosperous and thriving 2029) (Adopted 2016) • Maintain and enhance the borough’s position as a prosperous economic centre with a diverse economy by supporting a range of employment sectors through the availability of employment land and premises of the right quality, type, location and size. This will be delivered through the protection and regeneration and/or redevelopment of the established strategic employment areas (such as Basing View) and the allocation of a new employment sites through a future DPD. • Reduce the need to travel, providing sustainable and fully accessible transport opportunities, and promoting walking and cycling across the borough. Work in partnership to address issues around junction 6 of the M3 and the delivery of strategic transport infrastructure. • Facilitate a well-educated and highly skilled local population and workforce with strong connections to the local business community and opportunities to access high quality education and jobs with lifelong learning for all. • Strengthen Basingstoke Town Centre’s role as a destination of choice, for residents, workers and those living outside the borough for retail, culture and leisure. Progress the Central Area Vision and the new Town Centre Programme to achieve a well-connected, vibrant and attractive town centre, while supporting a distinctive cultural and historic area at the Top of the Town. • Promote a thriving rural economy with a network of vibrant towns and villages which provide homes, services, jobs and infrastructure to respond to the needs and aspirations of local communities. Connected and vibrant • Focus the provision for new housing and supporting infrastructure within a number of development sites around Basingstoke town, with local level housing provision in our other main settlements, and homes which respond to local needs in smaller settlements. • Ensure that infrastructure is planned for prior to development and delivered alongside development to meet the changing needs of our residents and employers, including the broader infrastructure needs of an increasingly ageing population. This will include the provision of flexible accommodation that responds to varying needs and supports mixed and inclusive communities with the opportunity for social interaction. • Provide new housing which incorporates a mix of tenure, size and type to meet the borough’s needs and enable accommodation for all, including older people and downsizers, smaller households, families, and resident gypsy and travellers. • Promote and support successful regeneration and renewal schemes to improve social, built and natural environments, and improve housing and employment areas of poor quality. This will be delivered through a partnership approach and close working with local communities and businesses to address existing pockets of deprivation and reduce inequalities at a neighbourhood level. • Promote healthy lifestyles by maintaining and enhancing the quality and value of community, health, cultural, leisure and recreational facilities and open spaces that support and provide opportunities for participation in social and physical activity in local communities and good access to health services. Environmentally responsible and distinctive • Minimise our contribution to climate change and its effects through more efficient use of energy and natural resources and increased use of renewable and low carbon energy infrastructure, as well as mitigating and adapting to climate change. • Ensure high quality and locally distinctive design which responds to local character to create inclusive, well connected and safe neighbourhoods by reducing the fear of crime and anti-social behaviour.

157

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• Conserve, m anage and monitor the borough’s waterways, reducing the risk of flooding and consequences of pollution through partnership wo rking, active flood management and appropriate mitigation approaches. • Protect and enhance the borough’s biodiversity and the locally distinctive character of our priority habitats and landscapes, such as the North Wessex Downs AONB, through protection, partnership working, conservation and active management. • o) Proactively manage the borough’s rich historic and built environment to protect and enhance its quality and distinctiveness while accommodating change. This highly varied resource ranges from conservation areas, to listed buildings including the large country houses to numerous brick, flint and timber framed farm buildings and cottages distinctive of our rural areas. East Hampshire District Council East Hampshire District The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Local Plan: Joint Core Sustainable Economic Development Objectives Strategy (Adopted 2014) • To maintain a sustainable, buoyant local economy designed to provide jobs to meet residents needs and improve the quality of life in East Hampshire, but always within the constraints of the local environment; • To plan for the District’s town and village centres to provide a range of facilities and services that meet the needs of local communities; • To maximise the value of sustainable tourism whilst minimising environmental impacts and acknowledging that within the National Park tourism will be subordinate to the protection of the natural beauty, wildlife and cultural heritage of the area Sustainable Communities Objectives • To plan for sufficient land to be available for 10,060 homes (including 2,725 at Whitehill & Bordon) to be built in the District in the period 2011-2028. Within the National Park development should be focused on local needs. • To make the most efficient use of land and the existing housing stock so that everyone has the opportunity to live in a decent, sustainably constructed and affordable home, which is capable of being adapted to changing personal needs; • To promote safe, sustainable communities by ensuring an appropriate housing mix, taking account of the needs of identified groups in various settlements, and utilising good quality design to reflect town and village design statements and the characteristics of individual settlements; • To provide the opportunities for a high quality of life for everyone, enhance the well-being of people and reduce inequalities in health; • To improve access to all facilities and services particularly in rural areas; • To promote opportunities for vocational training; • To design development that reduces the opportunities for crime and anti-social behaviour and the fear of crime; • To provide and retain a range of high quality open space, sport and recreational facilities; • To actively encourage people to make healthy lifestyle choices including opportunities to increase the level of physical activity and participation in sports and recreation; • To promote multi-functional and cost effective green infrastructure in urban and rural areas including closer working with rural enterprises, farming and forestry. Natural and Built Environment Objectives • To make best use of land in sustainable settlements to minimise the impact of development upon the countryside; • To ensure that any decisions or activities relating to land within, or affecting the setting of, the South Downs National Park meet the relevant National Park purposes as set out in statute; • To conserve and enhance landscape quality, distinctiveness and character in the wider landscape; • To conserve and enhance designated sites and natural habitats whist creating networks of habitats and wildlife corridors to encourage adaptation to climate change; • To conserve and enhance the District’s attractive built and historic environment, including heritage sites, conservation areas, listed buildings, archaeological sites and important open areas and the settings of these assets; • To plan for new development to be built to a high quality that promotes the use of sustainable resources in developments, in particular to minimise waste, increase energy efficiency in new and existing developments and to maximise the proportion of energy generated from renewable sources within environmental constraints;

158

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To protect and enhance water quality, water supply, groundwater and minimise the risk of flooding in the District; • To prevent development resulting in unacceptable levels of air, noise, land, light or other pollution and to ensure that new development is adequately protected against such pollution; • To address the causes of climate change and ensure that the District is able to adapt to it within environmental constraints. Transport and access Objectives • To reduce the need to travel, particularly by car, through careful planning of development and the location of services, whilst recognising that the car will remain part of the mix of transport modes, particularly for those in the rural areas; • To improve accessibility to all services, particularly for those who may need them most, but are least able to access them; • To increase the use of public and community transport, cycling and walking where travel remains necessary. Hart District Council Hart local plan (Strategy The following objectives (in no particular order) provide the link between the Vision and the policies and proposals in this Plan. and Sites) 2031 • To plan for sufficient land to be available for at least 7,614 new homes to be built in the District in the period 2014 –2032 such that it provides a continuous supply (Adopted 2020) of housing. • To deliver a sustainable new community at Hartland Village by 2032. • To provide new homes of a mix of types, sizes and tenures to meet the current and future needs of Hart’s residents, including affordable housing; new homes and care accommodation to meet the needs of an ageing population, and homes for other specialist groups2 • To support the vitality and viability of the District’s town and village centres to serve the needs of residents. • To support economic growth by protecting and providing a range of size and types of employment land and buildings, including those supporting the rural economy. • To ensure that transport, social and physical infrastructure required to support new development is delivered in a timely and coordinated manner including through partnership working with infrastructure providers and neighbouring local authorities. • Through partnership working with the education authority (Hampshire County Council) to plan for the provision of sufficient primary and secondary school places. This will include new primary provision at Hartland Village. • To conserve and enhance the distinctive built and historic environment in the District including the protection of the significance and special interest of heritage assets and their settings. • To maximise opportunities for the provision of sustainable transport infrastructure that supports new development. including facilities for walking, cycling and public transport, and the delivery of measures, including provision for sustainable transport to mitigate the impact of new development on the existing network. • To protect and enhance the District’s natural environment, landscape character, water environment and biodiversity, including ensuring appropriate mitigation is in place for new development to avoid adverse impacts on the Thames Basin Heaths Special Protection Area (TBHSPA). • To provide measures for adapting to the impacts of climate change and minimising the contribution of new development to the causes of climate change, including reducing the risk of flooding by directing development away from areas at risk of flooding, and using opportunities offered by new development to reduce the causes and impacts of flooding from all sources. • To promote healthy and sustainable local communities through protecting and enhancing community, sport, health, cultural, recreation and leisure facilities, including the public rights of way network, and through the delivery of a multifunctional green infrastructure network across the District. • To maintain the separate character and identity of settlements by avoiding development that would result in their physical or visual coalescence. • To ensure new development is well designed creating safe, inclusive environments and taking account of character, local distinctiveness and sustainable design principles. • To encourage the re-use and redevelopment of previously developed land. Rushmoor Borough Council

159

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Rushmoor Local Plan The Council have adopted priorities in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. The key strategic priorities that cross administrative boundaries, and 2014-2032 (Adopted which are relevant to the delivery of the Local Plan strategy are set out below. Their land use planning implications are addressed, both directly and indirectly, under the 2019) relevant sections in this Plan, and policies are often reflective of the cross-cutting nature of the strategic priorities. • Housing (including Traveller site provision); • Employment land and economic development; • Natural environment (including the Thames Basin Heaths Special Protection Area); • Climate change, water supply and waste; • Flooding; • Transport; and • Healthcare provision. Test Valley Borough Council Test Valley revised local The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Plan 2011-2029 Local Communities • 1) Providing for the future housing needs, types and tenures within the Borough. • 2) Promote appropriate scale of development in settlements in keeping with their size, character and function. • 3) Create sustainable communities, locating development where daily needs for employment, shopping, leisure, recreation, education, health and other community facilities are accessible by sustainable modes of transport. Local Economy • 4) Providing a range of job opportunities. • 5) Supporting Andover and Romsey town centres and Stockbridge local centre to enable them to remain successful destinations. Environment • 6) Conserve and enhance the built and historic environment, conserve and enhance the local character, identity and cultural heritage. • 7) Ensure development takes full account of climate change including implementing water efficiency measures. • 8) Protect high standards of water and air quality. • 9) Conserve and enhance the countryside and landscape and improve access to it. • 10) Conserve and enhance biodiversity. Leisure, Health and Wellbeing • 11) Provide for leisure, recreation, culture and tourism needs • 12) Creating opportunities for improving the health and wellbeing of communities. Transport • 13) Encourage use of public transport, cycling and walking networks to help reduce reliance on cars and provide choice. Community Safety • 14) Create high quality, low crime environments and spaces. Education and Learning • 15) Raise skill levels and reduce economic disparities across the Borough. Winchester City Council Winchester Local Plan The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Part 1: Joint Core Active Communities Strategy (2013) • Maximise new and existing opportunities for walking, cycling, sport and recreation/play to promote healthy lifestyles for all members of the community 160

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• Provision of 12,500 new homes across the District by 2031 • Provision of a range of housing types and tenures to address the varied housing needs of the District’s resident and working population and ensure inclusion for all. • Retention of existing and provision of new services and support facilities in the right places at the right time, including health, education, cultural, leisure and shopping, etc, to ensure existing and new communities are attractive and safe places to live and work and to allow our ageing population to participate. • Encourage sustainable transport alternatives that reduce the use of the private car and enable people to live close to where they work or participate in activities Prosperous Economy • Promote the varied talents of the District, building on the creative and knowledge based industries that exist, whilst developing the agricultural, tourism and cultural assets of our historic towns and villages and valued landscapes. • Ensure that there are a range of sites and premises available for businesses and commercial enterprises to set up and expand to meet their full potential and adequate infrastructure is available, including the provision of communications technology • Maximise the economic opportunities offered by the designation of the South Downs National Park, utilising its tourism, recreation and cultural opportunities whilst supporting its purposes. • Encourage the development and adoption of energy efficiency and renewable energy technologies and enable their take-up by new and existing businesses, through the creation and promotion of a low carbon economy. High Quality Environment • Maintain, protect and enhance Winchester District’s valuable environments and wildlife assets, whether these are urban or rural areas or involve the built or natural environments. Ensure that change restores, maintains or enhances the biodiversity, landscape character and historic environment of the District as a special place, whilst respecting its setting within the South Downs National Park • Ensure that the status of the water environment (both ground and surface water systems) in the District is maintained and improved through the development strategy promoted. • Provide, protect and enhance green infrastructure to include open spaces, green links and wildlife corridors. • Mitigate against the impacts of, and adapt to the effects of, climate change through promoting lifestyles and businesses which are sustainable for the environment and maximising the use of technologies that are available to reduce waste and carbon emissions. • Maximise the use of sustainable construction methods and drainage systems and encourage the use of locally sourced materials, to protect the integrity of the natural systems and resources that exist in the District. • Ensure high quality design takes account of character, local distinctiveness and sustainable design principles. • Maximise the use of the District’s land resource through the promotion of higher densities and creative design where these are appropriate and make a positive contribution to the public realm. Lower-Tier Plans located within Hertfordshire County Council

Dacorum Borough Council Dacorum Local Plan Core The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Strategy 2006-2031 The Sustainable Development Strategy (Adopted 2013) • To promote healthy and sustainable communities and a high quality of life. • To mitigate and adapt to the impacts of climate change. • To promote social inclusion and cohesiveness, embrace diversity and reduce inequalities. • To enable convenient access between jobs, homes and facilities, minimise the impact of traffic and reduce the overall need to travel by car. • To promote Hemel Hempstead as the focus of the borough for homes, jobs and strategic services, reinforcing the role of the neighbourhoods in the town • To conserve and enhance the function and character of the market towns, villages and countryside. • To ensure the effective use of existing land and previously developed sites.

161

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To create safe and attractive environments through high quality design. Strengthening Economic Prosperity • To promote a vibrant and prosperous economy: − to strengthen confidence in Hemel Hempstead’s role as a thriving sub-regional business centre and shopping hub; − to develop the Maylands Business Park as a leader of “green enterprise” and focus of the low carbon economy; − to maintain commercial enterprise and employment opportunities in the market towns and large villages; and − to support rural enterprise. • Providing Homes and Community Services • To provide a mix of new homes to meet the needs of the population. • To provide for a full range of social, leisure and community facilities and services. Looking after the Environment • To protect and enhance Dacorum’s distinctive landscape character, open spaces, biological and geological diversity and historic environment. • To promote the use of renewable resources, reduce carbon emissions, protect natural resources and reduce waste. • To protect people and property from flooding. • To minimise the effects of pollution on people and the environment. Implementation and Delivery • To co-ordinate the delivery of new infrastructure with development. • To ensure that all development contributes appropriately to local and strategic infrastructure requirements

East Herts District Council The East Herts District The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: • Plan 2011-2033 To mitigate the effects of climate change by reducing carbon dioxide emissions, supporting decentralised, low carbon and renewable energy and reducing the risk of flooding. (Adopted 2018) • To encourage safe and vibrant mixed communities that provide for the needs of all East Herts residents including the young, the elderly and vulnerable people. • To balance the housing market by delivering a mix of market, low cost, and affordable homes and accommodating the housing needs of an ageing population. • To protect the countryside from inappropriate development and to protect and enhance the historic environment of East Herts, promoting good design that creates a distinctive sense of place. • To foster entrepreneurial endeavour through educational attainment and encourage small and medium enterprises through maximising existing employment opportunities and clusters and supporting rural diversification. • To improve access opportunities, minimise the need to travel, and encourage necessary journeys to be made by sustainable means to ease congestion and help reduce East Herts’ carbon footprint. • To meet the needs of all of East Herts’ communities by maintaining and improving existing facilities and providing new facilities including for arts, culture, community, leisure, entertainment, recreation, faith and health. • To improve the health and wellbeing of all East Herts' communities and to reduce health inequalities. • To reduce water consumption, increase biodiversity and protect and enhance the quality of existing environmental assets by, inter alia, creating new green spaces and networks of high quality green space for both recreation and wildlife. • To ensure that development occurs in parallel with provision of the necessary infrastructure, including enhancement and provision of green infrastructure Hertsmere Borough Council Hertsmere Local Plan The Council have adopted core strategy objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Core Strategy 2012- • To provide the spatial policies necessary to deliver the land use requirements of the Hertsmere Together Community Strategy. • 2027 (Adopted 2013 To protect the Green Belt and its role in preventing urban sprawl and the coalescence of towns. 162

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To maintain an adequate supply of suitable land, focused on brownfield sites within the principal towns, to accommodate expec ted development needs and supporting community infrastructure. • To work towards meeting the community’s need for Affordable Housing. • To address issues arising from climate change, and all types of flooding and to take advantage of water and other natural recourses responsibly. • To improve environmental and streetscape quality in town centres and protect and enhance the built heritage of Hertsmere. • To protect and enhance the environment in Hertsmere by addressing local causes and impacts of pollution. • To raise levels of access by seeking development in locations not dependent on access by car and by requiring the provision of physically accessible transport interchanges and other buildings. • To promote safe and healthy communities, respecting the diverse needs of the whole Borough. • To support businesses of all sizes and to help promote local skills, focusing on areas of deprivation, education and training. • To provide a planning framework which promotes sustainable and competitive economic performance, in support of jobs growth requirements. • To safeguard and enhance the role of the town and district centres in Hertsmere, steering commercial developments, which attract a large number of people toward the most accessible locations. • To protect and enhance local biodiversity. • To secure efficient land use through well-designed development reflecting the size, pattern and character of settlements in Hertsmere • To promote rural diversification and through the Watling Chase Greenways Strategy, sustainable access to the wider countryside. North Herts District Council North Hertfordshire Since 1996, the district's planning policies have been contained in the District Local Plan No.2 with Alterations. Under the Planning & Compulsory Purchase Act 2004, District Local Plan No.2 those policies expired on 27 September 2007, except for those which were given permission from the Secretary of State to endure beyond this date. Since the adoption with Alterations Written of the National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF) policies in the Local Plan need to be considered alongside those of the NPPF. The Council believes that most policies Statement 1996 in the Local Plan remain broadly consistent with the NPPF and therefore still have significant weight in determining applications. The Local Plan therefore aligns with the (Adopted 1996 and NPPFs objectives. Saved Local Plan 2007) Saint Albans City and District Council City and District of St The Council have continued to adopt objectives of the 1994 Plan in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Albans District Local Plan Metropolitan Green Belt Review 1994 (Adopted • To continue to protect and maintain the Green Belt. 1994) Saved and Settlement Hierarchy • Deleted Policies Version To protect and enhance the character of existing settlements and define the nature and intensity of development acceptable in the following settlement hierarchy: o towns; Written Version (2020) o specified settlements - the larger villages excluded from the Green Belt; o Green Belt settlements - smaller villages located within the Green Belt. Housing • To make provision for a 1981-96 dwelling increase of 6,400 and 1986-2001 dwelling increase of 7,200, and to seek to influence the type of dwellings provided to help meet the needs of the area. Hospital Sites • To consider the future use of Hill End, Cell Barnes and Napsbury Hospitals in the context of Circular 12/91 (Redundant Hospital Sites in Green Belts: Planning Guidelines).

163

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Employment • To provide sufficient land and floorspace to cater for full employment and provide for different kinds of employment use whilst not encouraging substantial additional commuting into the District. Transport • To consider the transportation needs of the District, including: o improvements to the highway system; o traffic management schemes including improvements to the environment of residential and shopping areas; car parking, pedestrian and cyclist requirements; o the future role of public transport; o the implications of future development proposals. Shopping • To maintain the viability and vitality of existing shopping centres and to make reasonable provision for new forms of retailing. Environment and Conservation • To carefully consider the environmental effects of planning decisions and to conserve and improve the historic, architectural and archaeological fabric of settlements, in particular St. Albans City Centre and Roman Verulamium. Leisure and Tourism • To make provision for leisure uses especially taking advantage of opportunities to restore mineral sites in the Upper Colne Valley Area and to support tourism related developments on appropriate sites. Countryside • To protect and enhance the natural beauty, amenity and ecology of the countryside and to retain high quality agricultural land. Three Rivers District Council Three Rivers Local The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: • Development To ensure that development in Three Rivers recognises and safeguards the District’s distinctive character of small towns and villages interspersed with attractive countryside and Green Belt, through sustainable patterns of development. Framework Core Strategy • To make efficient use of previously developed land. (Adopted 2011) • To reduce impacts on the environment by reducing waste, pollution and energy consumption, by promoting the use of renewable energy, and the conservation of water resources and by designing development to take into account future changes to the climate. • To balance the community’s need for future homes and jobs by providing sufficient land to meet a range of local housing needs and to maintain a prosperous local economy. • To increase levels of affordable housing in the District, prioritising the provision of social rented and larger family-sized homes. • To facilitate the provision of services and infrastructure to meet the needs of existing development and new development by working on cross-boundary issues with adjoining authorities, service providers and the development industry • To deliver improved and more integrated transport systems and reduce the need to travel by locating development in accessible locations. • To maintain and enhance the viability, vitality and variety of shops and services within the Principal Town and Key Centres and retain shops and services in other smaller settlements. • To conserve and enhance the countryside and the diversity of landscapes, wildlife and habitats in the District within a coherent network of Green Infrastructure to support the natural environment and human health. • To conserve and enhance the historic environment by resisting the loss of, or damage to, heritage assets including important buildings and to ensure that new development respects the unique character and identity of the towns and villages in the District. • To provide accessible and varied opportunities for leisure, arts, sport and recreational activities in order to promote healthy lifestyles. 164

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To promote safety and security as a high priority in the design of new developments in order to create attractive and safe pl aces in which to live, work and play. Watford Borough Council Watford Local Plan Core The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Strategy 2006-2031 • Strategic Objective 1: A family-friendly town centre. • (Adopted 2013) Strategic Objective 2: Sustainable neighbourhoods. • Strategic Objective 3: Enhance Watford’s regional economic and transportation role. • Strategic Objective 4: Enhance Watford’s regional health, recreational, educational, cultural and social role. • Strategic Objective 5: Enhance Watford’s environment, green infrastructure and heritage assets. Welwyn Hatfield District Council Welwyn Hatfield District The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Plan Written Statement • Preserve and enhance the district’s wildlife and biodiversity, landscape, urban open land and historic environment, and minimise the use of natural resources. • (Adopted 2005 and Provide for development to meet the recognised needs of local people in terms of housing, jobs, shopping, leisure, services, health and community facilities, education and training. Saved Policies in 2008) • Maintain the Green Belt and concentrate development within the main towns and villages of Welwyn Garden City, Hatfield, Welwyn, Oaklands and Mardley Heath, Digswell, Woolmer Green, Welham Green, Brookmans Park, Cuffley and Little Heath, in particular on previously developed land. • Seek to sustain the countryside and rural communities, allowing development in rural areas where this helps to sustain the rural economy and community life, preserves the quality of the countryside and supports the purposes of the Green Belt. • Minimise the overall need to travel by encouraging more balanced and self-contained settlements, promoting mixed-use development and locating development where it is accessible. • Reduce dependence on the car by requiring development to be located and designed so it is accessible by and gives priority to pedestrians, cyclists and public transport. • Maintain and enhance the quality of the urban environment by protecting open space and requiring good quality, sustainable design in all new development. • Foster a ‘sense of community’ through the protection and provision of services and facilities and through careful design of new development. • Maintain and improve the vitality and viability of Welwyn Garden City and Hatfield town centres and the district’s village and local centres, by protecting their primary shopping functions and encouraging a greater diversity of uses. • Increase economic prosperity through the regeneration of key areas of the district, in particular Hatfield Town Centre and the former Hatfield Aerodrome site. Lower-Tier Plans located within Oxfordshire County Council

Cherwell District Council The Cherwell Local Plan The Council have adopted priorities in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: 2011 – 2031 (Adopted • SO 1 To facilitate economic growth and employment and a more diverse local economy with an emphasis on attracting and developing higher technology industries. • 2016) SO 2 To support the diversification of Cherwell's rural economy. • SO 3 To help disadvantaged areas, support an increase in skills and innovation, improve the built environment and make Cherwell more attractive to business by supporting regeneration. • SO 4 To maintain and enhance the vitality, viability, distinctiveness and safety of Cherwell's urban centres. • SO 5 To encourage sustainable tourism • SO 6 To accommodate new development so that it maintains or enhances the local identity of Cherwell's settlements and the functions they perform. • SO 7 To meet the housing needs of all sections of Cherwell's communities, particularly the need to house an ageing population and to meet the identified needs of Gypsies and Travellers and Travelling Show people, in a way that creates sustainable, inclusive and mixed communities.

165

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• SO 8 To improve the affordability of housing in Cherwell and to provide social rented and i ntermediate housing to meet identified needs whilst ensuring the viability of housing development and a reliable supply of new homes. • SO 9 To improve the availability of housing to newly forming households in rural areas. • SO 10 To provide sufficient accessible, good quality services, facilities and infrastructure including green infrastructure, to meet health, education, transport, open space, sport, recreation, cultural, social and other community needs, reducing social exclusion and poverty, addressing inequalities in health, and maximising wellbeing. • SO 11 To incorporate the principles of sustainable development in mitigating and adapting to climate change impacts including increasing local resource efficiency (particularly water efficiency), minimising carbon emissions, promoting decentralised and renewable or low carbon energy where appropriate and ensuring that the risk of flooding is not increased. • SO 12 To focus development in Cherwell's sustainable locations, making efficient and effective use of land, conserving and enhancing the countryside and landscape and the setting of its towns and villages. • SO 13 To reduce the dependency on the private car as a mode of travel, increase the attraction of and opportunities for travelling by public transport, cycle and on foot, and to ensure high standards of accessibility to services for people with impaired mobility. • SO 14 To create more sustainable communities by providing high quality, locally distinctive and well-designed environments which increase the attractiveness of Cherwell's towns and villages as places to live and work and which contribute to the well-being of residents. • SO 15 To protect and enhance the historic and natural environment and Cherwell's core assets, including protecting and enhancing cultural heritage assets and archaeology, maximising opportunities for improving biodiversity and minimising pollution in urban and rural areas. Oxford City Council Oxford Local Plan 2036 The vision of this Plan is to build on the positive aspects of Oxford and deal positively with the issues. The Council aim to do this by adopting the following objectives: (Adopted 2020) • To build on Oxford’s economic strengths as a global centre for research, learning and health care • To remain at the heart of the Oxfordshire economy and an important net contributor to the national economy through its key strengths in the knowledge intensive businesses (such as education, health, science and technology) and as a leading environmentally sustainable city To reduce inequalities across Oxford, particularly in employment, health and education • To provide a diverse range of employment opportunities to meet the needs of the city’s businesses and residents, allowing Oxford to grow and function sustainably, and with a skilled workforce ready to fill the employment opportunities that arise South Oxfordshire District Council South Oxfordshire Local The Council have adopted priorities in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Plan 2011-2035 Objective 1 - Settlements (Adopted 2020) • OBJ 1.1 Support the settlement hierarchy, the growth and development of Didcot Garden Town, the delivery of new development in the district, the growth of our market towns and the vitality of our villages. • OBJ 1.2 Support rural communities and their ‘way of life’, recognising that this is what attracts people to the district. • OBJ 1.3 Meet identified housing needs by delivering high-quality, sustainable, attractive places for people to live and work. • OBJ 1.4 Focus growth in Science Vale through delivering homes and jobs, retail and leisure facilities and enhanced transport infrastructure. Objective 2 - Housing • OBJ 2.1 Deliver a wide range of housing options to cater for the housing needs of our community (including self-build and older persons’ accommodation). • OBJ 2.2 Support the regeneration of housing and facilities to strengthen communities and address deprivation issues. • OBJ 2.3 Support meeting the economic and housing needs of the county as a whole, reflecting the special character of South Oxfordshire. Objective 3 - Economy

166

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• OBJ 3.1 Improve employment opportuni ties and employment land provision, which will provide high quality local jobs to help retain more skilled residents in the local workforce. • OBJ 3.2 Aim to reduce commuting distances by supporting business growth in locations close to existing business areas, transport connections and broadband provision. • OBJ 3.3 Ensure economic and housing growth are balanced, to support sustainable journeys to work, recognising that we cannot determine where people work – some of whom will choose to travel to employment locations beyond our district, such as London, Oxford and Reading. • OBJ 3.4 Support the retail and service sectors as well as low and high-tech industries. • OBJ 3.5 Create the conditions whereby world-renowned and cutting edge industries choose to locate and grow their businesses here, contributing to a strong and successful economy, in line with the Strategic Economic Plan for Oxfordshire. • OBJ 3.6 Inspire the next generation of workers by planning for high quality education facilities. • OBJ 3.7 Encourage tourism by protecting our built and natural assets, such as the Thames, and providing services and facilities for visitors. Objective 4 - Infrastructure • OBJ 4.1 Ensure that essential infrastructure is delivered to support our existing residents and services as well as growth. • OBJ 4.2 Make sustainable transport, walking and cycling an attractive and viable choice for people, whilst recognising that car travel and parking provision will continue to be important in this predominantly rural district. Objective 5 - Design • OBJ 5.1 Deliver high quality, innovative, well designed and locally distinctive developments in sustainable locations with regard to the South Oxfordshire Design Guide. • OBJ 5.2 Support development that respects the scale and character of our towns and villages, enhancing the special character of our historic settlements and the surrounding countryside. Objective 6 - Community • OBJ 6.1 Champion neighbourhood planning, empowering local communities to direct development within their area and provide support to ensure Neighbourhood Development Plans are deliverable, achievable and sustainable. • OBJ 6.2 Provide access to high quality leisure, recreation, cultural, community and health facilities. • OBJ 6.3 Ensure all communities have access to the services and facilities they value, supporting access to sport and recreation and the health and wellbeing of everyone. Objective 7 - Natural and Built Environment • OBJ 7.1 Protect and enhance the natural environment, including biodiversity, the landscape, green infrastructure and our waterways, placing particular importance on the value of the Oxford Green Belt, our two Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty and the River Thames. • OBJ 7.2 Conserve and enhance our rich and varied historic assets and their settings, celebrating these as some of our strongest attributes. Objective 8 - Climate Change • OBJ 8.1 Minimise carbon emissions and other pollution such as water, air, noise and light, and increase our resilience to the likely impact of climate change, especially flooding. Lower energy use and support an increase in renewable energy use. Support growth in locations that help reduce the need to travel. West Oxfordshire District Council West Oxfordshire Local The Council have adopted priorities in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These core Objectives include: Plan 2031 (Adopted • Strong market towns and villages • 2018) Meeting the specific housing needs of our communities • Sustainable economic growth • Sustainable communities with access to services and facilities; and • Protecting and enhancing our environment and reducing the impact from climate change 167

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Vale of White Horse District Council Vale of White Horse The Council have adopted priorities in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives includ e: Local Plan, Part 1: Building healthy and sustainable communities • SO 1: Provide for a range of homes across the district to deliver choice and competition in the housing market and to meet the identified need, including for Strategic Sites and affordable housing. Policies 2031 and Part 2: • SO 2: Cater for existing and future residents’ needs, including the needs of different groups in the community and provision for a growing older population. Detailed Policies and • SO 3: Direct growth to the most sustainable locations in the district, ensuring development is integrated with and respects the built, natural and historic heritage Sites (Adopted 2019). and creates attractive places in which people will want to live, as well as being supported by a sufficient range of services and facilities. • SO 4: Improve the health and well-being of Vale residents, reduce inequality, poverty and social exclusion and improve the safety of the Vale as a district where everyone can feel safe and enjoy life. Supporting economic prosperity • SO 5: Support a strong and sustainable economy within the district, including the visitor economy. • SO 6: Support the continued development of Science Vale as an internationally significant centre for innovation and science based research and business. • SO7: Maintain and enhance the vitality and viability of the Vale’s town centres and local shopping centres in order to strengthen their service centre roles. • Sustainable transport and accessibility • SO 8: Reduce the need to travel and promote sustainable modes of transport. • SO 9: Seek to ensure new development is accompanied by appropriate and timely infrastructure delivery to secure effective sustainable transport choices for new residents and businesses. Protecting the environment and responding to climate change • SO 10: Maintain and improve the natural environment including biodiversity, landscape, Green Infrastructure and waterways. • SO 11: Ensure all new development achieves high quality design standards and conserves and enhances the natural, historic, cultural and landscape assets of the Vale.SO 12: Minimise greenhouse gas emissions and other pollution (such as water, air, noise and light) across the district and increase our resilience to likely impacts of climate change, especially flooding. Lower-Tier Plans located within Surrey County Council

Elmbridge Borough Council Elmbridge Borough The Council have adopted 18 objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Local Plan, Core Strategy • To retain the high quality of life experienced by most Borough residents and share the benefits across all sections of the community, within an overall context of 2026 (Adopted 2011) stabilising and ultimately reducing the Borough's ecological footprint. • To protect the unique character of the Borough, and to enhance the high quality of the built, historic and natural environment. • To deliver high quality buildings and neighbourhoods that enhance character, improve people’s sense of safety and security and promote healthier lifestyles • To reduce people’s reliance on driving, by directing new development to sustainable locations, promoting attractive and convenient alternatives to using the private car and, in so doing, reducing congestion and pollution caused by traffic. • To promote sustainable lifestyles, and limit the use of natural resources, reducing the need to travel and maximising the use of renewable energy. • To continue to protect the Green Belt, in order to prevent the coalescence of the Borough’s towns and villages and retain the distinctiveness of our local communities. • To take part in a co-ordinated approach to the management of the Borough’s waterways in a way that protects and enhances their distinct role and character and their biodiversity value, improves water quality, and that minimises their potential to flood. • To enhance the distinctiveness and diversity of the landscapes within the Green Belt, and to promote improvements to our network of strategic and local open land and green corridors, balancing the desire to increase access to the open countryside with the need to protect and enhance biodiversity interests. • To provide sufficient housing to meet the local target of 3,375 additional units in the most sustainable locations in the urban area.

168

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To address inequalities, promote better integration and increase oppo rtunities for people who live in the less affluent areas of the Borough. • To supply homes and land that address local housing needs in terms of mix, size, design and tenure. • To adopt a viable approach to contribute to increasing the supply of affordable housing as a key priority. Elmbridge • To meet the needs of an increasingly ageing population through a variety of measures, including lifetime homes, specialist accommodation and care and support services that respond to their needs. • To provide for the identified pitch requirements of Gypsies, Travellers and Travelling Showpeople in sustainable locations supported by good quality facilities • To maintain a thriving economy by providing an adequate supply of land and buildings, in the right places, to support a diverse range of business and commercial activity. • To continue to support the Borough’s variety of tourist attractions whilst protecting the amenities of those who live close by and provide an adequate supply of visitor accommodation in appropriate and sustainable locations. • To support and develop the distinctive roles of our town and village centres, in order that they provide a strong focus for commercial and community development • To respond to the social and physical infrastructure needs arising from new development in a way that delivers sustainable growth. Epsom and Ewell Borough Council Epsom and Ewell Local The Council have adopted a number of objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Plan, Core Strategy • making sure that sufficient suitable land is identified through the development plan for meeting the regional and local requirements for housing and employment, (Adopted 2007) and maintaining a suitable mix of premises to meet the needs of local business; • focussing development on previously developed land within the built up area or in the hospital cluster, rather than on green field releases, and ensuring it is located where access to services can be secured and where it can make the most efficient use of the site; • meeting the diverse social needs of our communities and in particular meeting the needs for affordable housing and for those with a nomadic way of life; • ensuring the necessary infrastructure and services are provided to support communities, and as an integral part of new development wherever possible; • protecting and improving community, recreational and cultural facilities, especially ones that cater for young people and the elderly, and maximising their accessibility; • conserving and improving the natural landscape, the historic built environment and local biodiversity, and protecting designated areas of special importance; • protecting the Green Belt and maintaining the separate identity of neighbourhoods; • ensuring all aspects of new developments accord with the principles of good design, create safe and inclusive places, and contribute positively towards local distinctiveness; • ensuring new development incorporates sustainable building principles and high standards of energy efficiency; • protecting and enhancing open spaces, and creating new ones, and improving public access to them in the interests of residents, workers and visitors; • enhancing the vitality and viability of Epsom town centre, Ewell village and Stoneleigh local centres, and other local centres serving the Borough’s communities; • minimising the need to travel and encouraging opportunities for trips to be made by alternative modes of travel to the motor car; • encouraging highway safety and environmental improvement measures which reduce the detrimental impacts of high traffic volumes. Guildford Borough Council Guildford Borough The Council have adopted a number of Strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: • Council Local Plan, To deliver sufficient sustainable development that meets all identified needs. • To improve opportunities for all residents in the borough to access suitable housing, employment, training, education, open space, leisure, community and health Strategy and Sites facilities. (2015-2034) (Adopted • To ensure that all development is of high quality design and enables people to live safe, healthy and active lifestyles. 2019) • To retain the distinct character and separate identities of our settlements. • To protect and enhance our heritage assets and improve the quality of our built and natural environment.

169

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To protect those areas designated as Thames Basin Heaths Special Protection Area, Special Areas of Conserva tion, Sites of Special Scientific Interest and Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty for their biodiversity and landscape characteristics. • To ensure that new development is designed and located to minimise its impact on the environment and that it mitigates, and is adapted for, climate change. • To maintain and enhance our role as one of the County’s key employment locations in both a strategic and local context by providing and protecting a range of employment sites in appropriate locations. • Reinforce our role as a world leader in innovation and research, with a particular focus on bio-technology, space and electronic gaming industries, and the sustainable growth of Surrey Research Park and the borough’s other business hubs. • Support and expand the economic vitality of our rural areas whilst protecting existing heritage, landscape and character. • Reinforce Guildford’s role as Surrey County’s premier town centre destination whilst protecting and enhancing its cultural facilities and heritage assets. • To facilitate the timely provision of necessary infrastructure to support sustainable development. • To deliver an integrated, accessible and safe transport system, balanced in favour of sustainable transport modes, to facilitate sustainable development Mole Valley District Council Mole Valley District Mole Valley District Council have created a vision for the area which states “Mole Valley will make provision for its share of the Region's growth of homes and jobs and Council Local Plan, Core provide for the needs of its communities but in a way that is sustainable, minimises significant harmful change to its distinctive character, environment and feel, and Strategy 2026 (Adopted mitigates its impact on the causes of climate change. The District's natural, built and historic environment will be safeguarded and enhanced and communities will have 2009) safe, convenient and sustainable access to the services and facilities they require”. They aim to achieve this vision by a commitment to accommodating development and growth in a way that is sustainable, safeguards the distinctive characteristics of the District's towns, villages and countryside which are enjoyed and appreciated by residents and visitors. Development will be principally directed to the most sustainable locations in the District's main built-up areas to take advantage of existing infrastructure and services and reduce the need to travel. Limited development will take place in some of the District's rural villages. If there is insufficient land in the built-up areas to meet the District's development needs, provision will be met by small scale extensions to the built-up areas following a review of the Green Belt boundary. Reigate and Banstead Borough Council Reigate and Banstead The Council have adopted a number of objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Object ives include: Borough Council Local • To ensure that future development addresses the economic and social needs of the borough without compromising its environmental resources Plan, Core Strategy • To enable required development to be prioritised within sustainable locations within the existing built up area, which have the necessary or planned infrastructure, (Adopted 2014 and services and community provision, while also catering for local housing needs. reviewed 2019) • To ensure that the design and scale of new development recognises, enhances and protects the character of our town centres and other urban areas • To achieve an overarching, multi-functional framework which links existing and planned communities through a connected, easily accessible green space network, whilst also respecting the ecological and cultural heritage of the borough, the role of the Green Belt and the promotion of local distinctiveness • To increase opportunities for pursuing a healthy lifestyle, by maintaining and enhancing recreation facilities which encourage walking and cycling • To maintain and enhance the borough’s valued landscapes, historic, built and natural environment including habitats and species and heritage assets • To keep and enhance the identified character and separate identities of the borough’s towns and other urban areas • To safeguard and promote biodiversity and wildlife corridors at a local level, as well as on designated sites, through responsible and positive design and management • To ensure that the design of new development makes best use of the site, integrates effectively with its setting, promotes local distinctiveness, maximises accessibility and minimises the opportunities for crime • To require that developments conserve natural resources, minimise greenhouse gas emissions and help to reduce waste, and are adaptable to climate change (including the risk from flooding)

170

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To ensure that the types o f dwellings built are suited to the requirements of the forecasted local population, and that an appropriate proportion is ‘a ffordable’ to those in need • To enable the accommodation needs of Gypsies and Travellers, and Travelling Showpeople, to be met in appropriate locations • To seek to secure in appropriate locations, adequate land, community services and infrastructure to support business and community needs • To tackle congestion, pollution and greenhouse gas emissions of private car use by promoting sustainable modes of transport to promote healthier lifestyles • To improve overall accessibility to key services and facilities for all by encouraging development in accessible locations maintaining and enhancing the movement network • To support the sustainable growth of a one-runway, two-terminal airport at Gatwick, subject to satisfactory environmental safeguards being in place • To strengthen the vitality and viability of the borough’s town centres and local shopping centres. • To direct regeneration to the parts of the borough where it is needed to build vibrant and cohesive communities. • To ensure the right amount, range, size and type of commercial areas are available and that the necessary infrastructure and facilities are provided to support a level of economic growth compatible with protecting the environment. • To enhance the role of Redhill town centre as a centre of strategic importance, part of a regional transport hub, and as a safe and attractive retail, culture, leisure destination with a high quality environment. • To work in partnership with service providers and other relevant stakeholders to realise opportunities to enhance the quality of life for residents in the borough. Runnymede Borough Council Runnymede Local Plan The Council have adopted a number of objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Object ives include: 2030 (Adopted 2020) Supporting Local People • To protect and improve the health and well-being of the population, reduce health inequalities and improve the quality of people’s lives through developing healthier and safer communities and improving life chances; • To support the delivery of at least 7507 high quality additional homes in Runnymede in the period 2015-2030 (an average of 500 homes a year) including the delivery of affordable housing, starter homes, housing for those with specialist needs and plots for those who wish to build their own home; • To continue to support the improvement of local leisure activities that are accessible to all; • To ensure Runnymede’s communities are supported by new or enhanced community and other infrastructure services and facilities, including a range of sustainable and active travel choices; • To deliver a garden village at Longcross which achieves a sustainable community capable of meeting its own day to day service needs and which offers a choice of sustainable and active travel modes; Enhancing our environment • To increase resilience to climate change, including flood risk, to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and promote water efficiency and the use of renewable and low carbon energy; • To protect the Borough’s soil, mineral and groundwater resources by making the most efficient use of land, reduce air, land and noise pollution and improve water quality; • To protect and enhance the Borough’s heritage assets, both designated and non-designated and promote their use as part of the Council’s leisure and tourism offer; • To protect and enhance the Borough’s biodiversity, habitats and species and to contribute to net gains in biodiversity; • To protect and enhance the Borough’s most valued landscapes and its green spaces as well as the general extent of the Green Belt; • Revitalising areas in need of physical improvement and proactively seeking opportunities for regeneration to assist with place shaping and the enhancement of the built environment; Improving our economy • To maintain the economic role of Runnymede in the wider area and sustain economic growth and competitiveness by protecting the most valued employment sites and supporting development of the Borough’s Enterprise Zone at Longcross Park; • To support projects which improve the integration of road and rail to reduce congestion and improve accessibility to a range of sustainable and active travel choices; 171

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To support the regeneration of Addlestone, Chertsey and Egham town centres to enhance their retail and leisure offer and to m aintain the role of other centres in the Borough in meeting their community’s day to day needs. Spelthorne Borough Council Spelthorne Borough The Council have adopted 21 objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Council Local Plan, Core • To protect and improve the quality of the environment, including improving the landscape, promoting biodiversity and safeguarding the Borough’s cultural heritage. Strategy and Policies • To ensure the Borough develops in a way that minimises harmful CO2 emissions contributing to climate change and that caters for potential future climate change. Development Plan • To secure an improvement in the Borough’s air quality. Parts of Spelthorne suffer from poor air quality. Document 2026 • To minimise the impact of noise on local communities and the environment. (Adopted 2009) • To safeguard valuable urban open space and provide for open recreational uses. • To meet the Borough’s housing requirement in the Regional Spatial Strategy for the South East. • To ensure provision for housing incorporates a mix of tenure, size and type to meet local needs, including affordable housing. • To ensure provision is made for the needs of all sections of the community. • To ensure necessary infrastructure and services are provided. It is important that provision of infrastructure and services keeps pace with the changing requirements of the Borough and any deficiencies in provision are met. • To ensure effective use is made of urban land in meeting development needs. • To ensure new development is designed to a high standard appropriate to its setting and contributes to an improvement in the appearance of the environment. • To seek ways to reduce flooding and its associated risks to people and property including ensuring development does not increase the risk. • To contribute to making Spelthorne a safer place. • To ensure development contributes to sustainable transport choices and reduces the need to travel. Reducing reliance on the car offers congestion and air quality benefits. • To prevent further urbanisation. • To support the retention of sufficient well located employment land to enable the maintenance of the local economy and to support redevelopment of well located land to meet business needs. • To encourage redevelopment of poorly located employment land for housing or to meet other development needs. • 1To provide for the continued development of Staines as a focus for a mix of town centre uses including retail, leisure and employment and to improve access to the town centre. • To maintain the role of the centres of Ashford, Shepperton and Sunbury Cross in providing local services. • To encourage development of a sustainable transport system that supports the spatial strategy and provides for the needs of all sections of the community in an environmentally acceptable way and further improve Staines’ role as a public transport interchange. Tandridge District Council Tandridge District Local The Council have adopted a number of objectives under particular themes in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Plan, Core Strategy 2026 Objectives 1 Social Progress (Adopted 2008) • Provision of sufficient and adequate housing (sustainably located and constructed) to meet the needs of all sections of the community, including affordable dwellings, retirement accommodation, homes for young people, sites for Gypsies/Travellers and Travelling Showmen and homes for those with special needs. • Provision of adequate infrastructure (including water supply, drainage and other utility services) and services, (including health, social care and education) to accompany new development. • Provision of adequate transport infrastructure and services (including public transport) that supports the aim of reducing the need to travel by car. • Protection and provision of open space, sports, play, recreational facilities, community and cultural services that are sufficient to meet the community’s needs and that are accessible to all. Provision of a safe and secure environment. Objectives 2 Environmental Protection

172

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• Minimising the impact on climate change through a reduction in projected greenhouse gas emissions from planned development and ensuring that developmen t is able to withstand the effects of climate change. • Reduction in the consumption of natural resources, in support of the aim of “one planet living”. • Minimising the risk of flooding. • Encouraging the reuse of previously developed land for residential, commercial and community uses. • New development constructed in accordance with sustainability principles, including location, siting, energy conservation and renewable energy sources. • Retention of the Green Belt to ensure that communities remain separated and to prioritise the re-use of brown field over green field sites, in particular those brown field sites used for non-residential purposes. • Minimising the impact of Gatwick Airport by working with BAA Gatwick on the development of the airport up to the projected 45 million passengers per annum of the single runway and opposing expansion beyond its current agreed capacity. • Protection and enhancement of the distinctive character of built up and rural areas. • Protection and enhancement of the District’s distinctive heritage. • Protection and enhancement of the character and appearance of the countryside and in particular the landscapes of national importance, i.e. the Surrey Hills and High Weald Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty. Objectives 3 Sustainable Economy • Supporting an economy that is thriving and growing within environmental limits (both urban and rural). • Maintenance and enhancing of the role of town centres and other centres. Surrey Heath Borough Council Surrey Heath Local Plan, The Council have adopted 17 objectives under particular themes in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the are a. These Objectives include: Core Strategy and • To promote and deliver sustainable development in the Borough. Development “Housing, Infrastructure and Environment” Management Policies • To provide sufficient new housing to meet the Boroughs need without causing harm to areas of importance for biodiversity. 2028 (Adopted 2012) • Provide housing that meets the needs of all sections of the community. • Through the regeneration of the Princess Royal Barracks site, to deliver a sustainable rural community set within a high quality built and natural environment at Deepcut. • Protect and enhance biodiversity within the Borough including sites of local importance for biodiversity and aim to deliver Surrey Biodiversity Action Plan (BAP) targets. • Ensure that new development contributes to environmental, infrastructure and service improvements and minimises impacts upon both the natural and built environment. • Ensure new development respects the essential character of the local area, including historic structures and environment. • Maintain and protect the Countryside and Green Spaces in settlement areas and provide an integrated green infrastructure network. • To support the development of a waste strategy that improves levels of recycling and minimises waste production. • To minimise impact on climate change and to minimise the effect of climate change upon the Borough through a reduction of greenhouse gas emissions and adoption of more environmentally friendly technologies and practices in both new and existing developments. • Improve travel choice and transport services to encourage sustainable travel patterns and, in particular, reduce reliance on the private car. “Economic Development” • Maintain the economic role of the Borough within the Western Corridor and Blackwater Valley sub-region. • Promote the role of Camberley town centre as a secondary regional centre and as a safe and attractive retail, cultural and entertainment centre with a high quality of environment. • Maintain the role of Bagshot and Frimley as district centres for local shops, services and community facilities and protect these uses elsewhere in the Borough. • Identify sites on which employment use should be maintained and growth encouraged. 173

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

“Children and Young People”, “Health and Well Being” and “Safer and Stronger Communities” • Support the community through: protection from crime and the fear of crime, reflection of cultural diversity, improved facilities for health, wellbeing and life-long learning. • Provide and support high quality leisure and cultural facilities that are accessible to all. Waverley Borough Council Waverley Borough Local The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include : Plan Part 1: Strategic • To contribute to the achievement of sustainable development, having regard to the guiding principles in securing the future: delivering UK sustainable development Policies and Sites strategy. (Adopted 2018) • To support the delivery of at least 11,210 additional homes in Waverley in the period 2013 to 2032 (an average of 590 homes a year). To contribute to the delivery of sustainable communities by directing most new development to the main settlements of Farnham, Godalming, Haslemere and Cranleigh, where there is the best available access to jobs, services and other facilities. This will include some new development on greenfield land on the edge of these settlements. • To support the provision of new development in and on the edge of villages where it meets identified local needs or helps to sustain local facilities and to support the sustainable growth and expansion of rural businesses. • To support the development of suitable brownfield land, including a new settlement at the Dunsfold Aerodrome site, subject to appropriate infrastructure and mitigation. • To ensure that cross boundary impacts arising from major development or infrastructure provision in Waverley or adjoining local authority areas are considered • To support measures that promote sustainable transport, including improvements to public transport and improved facilities for pedestrians and cyclists. • To maintain and protect all those areas of the Green Belt that fulfil the purposes of the designation. • To protect the countryside for its intrinsic character and beauty and as a recreational asset, including its visitor facilities and, where appropriate, promote its continued recreational use. • To provide appropriate protection to the hierarchy of national and local landscape designations in Waverley, including the Surrey Hills Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty. • To deliver a balance of housing and employment growth that takes account of both the need for additional housing and the need to maintain Waverley’s economic prosperity. • To ensure that adequate provision is made for new or improved social, physical and green infrastructure to meet the needs of the increased population and additional demands arising from employment related development. • To deliver an increase in the overall stock of affordable housing and to ensure that as far as possible the type and tenure of affordable housing meet the local needs identified in the Strategic Housing Market Assessment where it is viable to do so. • To support the delivery of a range of sizes and types of new homes and accommodation, including homes and accommodation to meet the needs of specific groups of the population, including older people, first time buyers and Gypsies, Travellers and Travelling Showpeople. • To safeguard existing employment accommodation and support the delivery of new and improved commercial premises, both within the main settlements and in rural areas, in order to meet the needs of a range of businesses in Waverley; in particular to accommodate the projected growth in B1a/b (Offices/ Research and Development) uses and the specific needs of small to medium enterprises (SMEs). • To support the vitality and viability of the centres of Farnham, Godalming, Haslemere and Cranleigh, taking account of the differences between each of the centres and the different roles that they play. • To meet the leisure, recreation and cultural needs of the community. • To safeguard and enhance the historic heritage and the diverse landscapes and townscapes in Waverley, and to ensure that new development takes proper account of the character and distinctiveness of the area in which it is located. • To ensure that the design, form and location of new developments contribute to the creation of sustainable communities that are attractive, safe and inclusive. • To protect and enhance Waverley’s biodiversity, including its wildlife species and their habitats, both on designated sites such as the Thames Basin Heaths and Wealden Heaths (Phases 1 and 2) Special Protection Areas, and on undesignated sites. 174

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• To reduce the emissions that contribute to climate change and minimise the risks resulting from the impact of climate change. • To ensure that new development is located and designed to manage and reduce its risk from flooding. Woking Borough Council Wokingham Local Plan, The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Core Strategy 2026 • To ensure all residents, workers, visitors and other interested groups are involved in creating, developing and delivering future land use patterns across the borough (Adopted 2010) • To seek efficient use of resources in development proposals (including land, materials and water). • To reconcile demand for housing and other development with respect for the borough’s character • To maintain and enhance the separation and distinctiveness of the borough’s settlements • To concentrate development in the areas with best access to users/occupiers and other services • To provide housing in appropriate locations, scales and types that meet the needs of the borough • To provide non-housing development in appropriate locations, scales and types across the borough. These include education, health, libraries and other community facilities along with shopping and employment To apply the sequential approach to development by encouraging it on sites occupied with buildings or structures (including where recently cleared). For example brownfield sites. • To keep the borough moving with appropriate infrastructure improvements to public transport and roads where needed • To protect and enhance the natural and man-made environments • To ensure appropriate high quality well designed, laid out and built development is delivered in the borough • To avoid areas where flooding, noise and pollution would impact on development either existing or proposed Encourage the provision of appropriate infrastructure, services and facilities that enable the borough’s residents to achieve their potential Lower-Tier Plans located within West Sussex County Council

Chichester District Council Chichester Local Plan, The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Key Policies (2014- Economy 2029) (Adopted 2015) • A strong local economy where businesses can thrive and prosper • Employees with good skills relevant to local employers, prepared for national and international competition and with well-paid and secure jobs. • Vibrant and sustainable city and market towns, with a good range of business and retail types. • The District to be known as a centre for creative and innovative industries, building on our rich arts and heritage base Housing and Neighbourhoods • Increased housing supply • Vibrant safe and clean neighbourhoods • Housing fit for purpose Environment • Managing a changing environment • Greener Living • Environment resources • Health and Well-Being • Encourage healthy and active lifestyles for all • A culturally enriched and empowered community • The needs of an older population • Accessible health and wellbeing services

175

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• Health Protection Strategic Infrastructure • Traffic management to mitigate congestion • Improved cycling networks and links to public transport • Support plans for a network of safe and convenient cycle routes across the area, especially in the city. • Traffic calming and parking Telecommunications • Wastewater Treatment and Water Supply • Water Resource and Flood Risk Management Crawley Borough Council Crawley Borough Local The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include : Plan 2015-2030 • To make Crawley an attractive town where people will want to live, work and spend their leisure time supported by well-designed neighbourhoods, strengthened (Adopted 2015) employment areas and a vibrant and attractive town centre and neighbourhood centres. • To reinforce Crawley’s role as a competitive regional shopping destination by delivering a significant expansion in the range and quality of retail and other town centre priorities through encouraging step change retail offer in the town centre core. • To reduce crime and fear of crime in Crawley through protecting and improving community safety in the borough. • To protect and enhance the valued built environment and character within the borough through high quality new design and the protection of culturally valuable areas and buildings • To meet as much of the agreed housing need as possible within the borough boundary, in light of constraints; by supporting the delivery of 340no. homes (net) each year from 2015 to 2030. • To provide a good choice of well-designed housing in terms of tenure, type, size and location • To ensure that 40% of new housing development is affordable • To improve the business offer and to maintain, support and promote a diverse employment base that can serve the local and sub-regional and regional economy • To support Gatwick Airport to maximise its potential as a 1-runway, 2-terminal airport; increasing passenger throughput up to 45 million passengers per annum subject to satisfactory legal agreements • To ensure the protection and enhancement of valued open spaces. • To facilitate and support the provision of new leisure facilities. • To facilitate and support the provision of new cultural facilities • To ensure the provision of sufficient infrastructure to meet the requirements of the borough. • To support the provision of quality education – including supporting and facilitating, where appropriate, improving skills levels. • To promote healthy, active, cohesive and socially sustainable communities • To work towards ensuring Crawley is a Carbon Neutral town by 2050. • To ensure new development will be of high quality and sustainable design and construction in line with national standards; with new buildings being built to a high energy efficiency standard to ensure warmth continues to be affordable to all residents and meet the challenges to work towards becoming Carbon Neutral. • To ensure all businesses have good access to good quality technological connections. • To reduce car journeys and promote sustainable and alternative methods of transport, whilst ensuring sufficient transport infrastructure is delivered to meet the requirements of the borough • To conserve and enhance the biodiversity habitats, key landscape features, fauna and flora within the borough • To adapt to the effects of climate change through the reduction of the risk of flooding and the amount of waste water; sustainable design of developments and effective management of water resources

176

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Horsham District Council Horsham District The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include: Planning Framework • Ensure that future development in the district is based on sustainable development principles that strike the correct balance between economic, social and (Adopted 2015) environmental priorities and delivers living, working and balanced communities which contribute to community cohesion. • To meet employment needs, create opportunities to foster economic growth and regeneration, and maintain high employment levels in the district which help reduce commuting distances. • To protect and promote the economic viability and vitality of Horsham town, the smaller market towns and the rural centres and promote development which is appropriate within the existing hierarchy and diversity of settlements in the district. • To recognise and promote the role of Horsham Town as the primary focus for the community and businesses in the district whilst preserving the unique ambiance that contributes to its attractiveness. The smaller market towns will be recognised as secondary hubs, and encouraged to achieve their role in meeting local needs and acting as a focus for a range of activities, including employment, retail, leisure and recreation. To promote a living and working rural economy where employment opportunities exist which reduce the need for residents to travel, including reducing commuting distances, and facilitate and promote innovation in business including such as high speed broadband. • Provide a range of housing developments across the district that: delivers the target number of new homes; respects the scale of existing places; and so far as is possible caters for the needs of all residents, including the delivery of a range of housing sizes and types including affordable housing • To locate new development in sustainable locations that respect environmental capacity and which have appropriate infrastructure, services and facilities in place, or where these can realistically be provided; and to encourage the appropriate re-use of brownfield sites in sustainable locations. • To protect, enhance and, where appropriate, secure the provision of additional accessible community services, facilities, open spaces and infrastructure throughout the district in accordance with local and district needs. • To safeguard and enhance the character and built heritage of the district’s settlements and ensure that the distinct and separate character of settlements, are retained and, where possible, enhanced and amenity is protected. • Identify and preserve the unique landscape character and the contribution that this makes to the setting of rural villages and towns and ensure that new development minimises the impact on the countryside. • To safeguard and enhance the environmental quality of the district, ensuring that development maximises opportunities for biodiversity and minimises the impact on environmental quality including air, soil, water quality and the risk of flooding. • Ensure that new development minimises carbon emissions, adapts to the likely changes in the future climate and promotes the supply of renewable, low carbon and decentralised energy Mid Sussex District Council Mid Sussex District Plan The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include : 2014 – 2031 • Protecting and enhancing the environment • Promoting economic vitality • Ensuring cohesive and safe communities • Supporting healthy lifestyles Lower-Tier Plans located within Warwickshire County Council

Stratford-On-Avon District Council Stratford -On -Avon Local The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area. These Objectives include : Plan, Core Strategy By 2031: (2011-2031) (Adopted • The rural character of the District will have been maintained and enhanced. The Green Belt and countryside of the District will have been protected from 2016) inappropriate development. 177

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• The historic character of the District will have been maintained and enhanc ed. Sites of historic importance will have been protected from harmful development. • The character and local distinctiveness of the District will have been reinforced by ensuring new development is of high quality design, taking into account the intrinsic and special value of its landscapes and townscapes. • To help mitigate and adapt to climate change, all residential development will have incorporated enhanced water efficiency measures as set out in the Building Regulations. All non-residential development will as a minimum have achieved the water and energy efficiency BREEAM ‘Good’ standard. • The District will have reduced its greenhouse gas emissions, so as to contribute to the national target for reduction, through a range of measures such as the location and design of development, provision of renewable and low carbon energy schemes, and promoting opportunities for low carbon travel. • The flood plain will have been maintained and, where opportunities arise, restored. The risk of flooding will be managed effectively by taking a whole catchment approach to implement sustainable flood management schemes. Water bodies will have reached a good status or potential in accordance with the Water Framework Directive. • Working with Natural England and Warwickshire County Council, biodiversity will have increased across the District. Sites of environmental, nature conservation and geological importance will have been protected from harmful development. • Community facilities and open space will have been improved across the District. Through collaborative working between District, Town and Parish Councils and key partners in education, public safety, health and other services, opportunities to improve the health and wellbeing of the District's communities will have been realised as a result of the development process. • All eligible development will make contributions to infrastructure and community facilities through CIL, planning obligations or a combination of the two. All critical projects listed in the Infrastructure Delivery Plan will be delivered in order to ensure that new development is supported and accompanied by the necessary infrastructure. • The value of tourism to the District will have increased substantially, initially by 25% during the period 2011-2015, through the District Council working with its private sector partners, including Shakespeare’s England. Stratford-upon-Avon will have re-established its position in the top 20 UK towns and cities for international visitors. • To support the role and function of the District's town and main rural centres, retail and commercial uses in them will have been retained and strengthened. Specifically, additional comparison goods retail floorspace will have been provided in Stratford-upon-Avon town centre on appropriate sites. • Previously developed sites in sustainable locations will have been re-used for purposes that are of an appropriate type and scale, while retaining their important natural, historic and other features. • A sustainable balance between employment growth and housing provision will be maintained as a result of the implementation of at least 35 hectares of additional land for general business uses, thereby helping to meet the needs of new and existing businesses wishing to locate or expand in the District. • Transport services will have been improved and congestion reduced across the District. Working with Warwickshire County Council, the District Council will seek to ensure that new development contributes towards achieving the aims and goals set out in the Local Transport Plan for an inclusive and accessible transport system. • At least an additional 14,600 homes (an average of 730 per annum) will have been built across the District on brownfield and greenfield sites, reflecting the dispersed settlement pattern of the District. Where justified by the available evidence, the District Council will have worked with neighbouring councils to help meet any unmet housing needs arising outside the District. In addition, the needs of gypsies and travellers will have been met through the provision of 41 additional pitches by 2019 and an additional 30 pitches thereafter, a total of 71 pitches by 2031. • A mix of sizes, types and tenures of housing will have been built by a range of developers, housing associations and other providers. To improve the affordability of housing across the District, 35% of dwellings on eligible sites will have been provided as affordable homes.

178

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix B3: GLA and Single-Tier London Borough Authorities

Title Description

Greater London Authority London Plan 2021 The legislation stipulates that the London Plan should only deal with things of strategic importance to Greater London taking account of the principal purposes of the Greater London Authority which are: • promoting economic development and wealth creation in Greater London; • promoting social development in Greater London; and • promoting the improvement of the environment in Greater London. To ensure that London’s growth is Good Growth, each of the policy areas in this Plan is informed by six Good Growth objectives: • GG1 Building strong and inclusive communities • GG2 Making the best use of land • GG3 Creating a healthy city • GG4 Delivering the homes Londoners need • GG5 Growing a good economy • GG6 Increasing efficiency and resilience The London Borough Authorities must have consideration of the London Plan (2021) when developing their area Local Plans. The Boroughs as single-tier authorities will develop spatial plans specific to their area as set out below. Joint Waste Plans for London Borough Authorities

North London (including Barnet and Enfield London Borough Councils) Draft North London The Waste Plan will identify a range of suitable sites for the management of all North London's waste up to 2031 and will include policies and guidelines for determining Waste Plan planning applications for waste developments. The plan is currently only at consultation stage. Existing and proposed waste sites are identified by map within the submissions document. South London (Croydon, Kingston Upon Thames, Merton, Sutton and Wandsworth London Borough Councils) Draft South London The Waste Plan will identify a range of suitable sites for the management of all South London's waste up to 2031 and will include policies and guidelines for determining Waste Plan planning applications for waste developments. The following existing waste sites allocated in this plan are located within the Study Area and/or within the 5km buffer: • C11 SafetyKleen, Unit 6b, Redlands, Coulsdon, Croydon CR5 2HT • K2 Genuine Solutions Group, Solutions House, Unit 1A, 223 Hook Rise South, Kingston KT6 7LD • K3 Kingston Reuse and Recycling Centre, Chapel Mill Road, off Villiers Road, Kingston KT1 3GZ • K4 Kingston Waste Transfer Station, Chapel Mill Road, off Villiers Road, Kingston KT1 3GZ • M4 Garth Road Reuse and Recycling Centre, 66-69 Amenity Way, Garth Road, Merton SM4 4AX • M5 Garth Road Transfer Station, 66-69 Amenity Way, Garth Road, Merton SM4 4AX • M11 Morden Transfer Station, Amenity Way, Merton SM4 4AX • S9 Premier Skip Hire, Unit 12, Sandiford Road, Sutton SM3 9RD West London (Brent, Ealing, Hillingdon, Harrow, Hounslow, Richmond Upon Thames London Borough Councils)

179

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

West London Waste The Waste Plan will identify a range of suitable sites for the management of all West London's waste up to 2031 and will include policies and guidelines for determining Plan (2015) planning applications for waste developments. The following existing waste sites allocated in this plan are located within the Study Area and/or within the 5km buffer:

• Site 222 Council Depot, Forward Drive, Harrow • Site 331 Rigby Lane Waste Transfer Station, Hayes, Hillingdon • Site 342 Twickenham Depot, Langhorn Drive, Twickenham, Richmond There are no future allocations relevant to the study area. Single-Tier London Borough Authorities

Barnet London Borough Council Barnet London Local The Council have adopted core objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Plan Core Strategy Objectives include: Development Plan • To manage housing growth to meet housing aspirations. • Document (Adopted To meet social infrastructure needs. • To promote Barnet as a place of economic growth and prosperity. 2012) • To provide safe, effective and efficient travel. • To promote strong and cohesive communities. • To promote healthy living and well-being. • To protect and enhance the suburbs. • To ensure efficient use of land and natural resources. • To enhance and protect our green and natural open spaces. London Borough of The LRMS for Barnet aims to increase awareness of local flood risk issues and sets out how partners are working together to reduce flood risk. The LRMS options and objectives Barnet Local Flood in managing flood risk in the Borough include: Risk Management • Prevent risks of flooding in new developments; • Strategy (2017) Promote flood resistance and resilience; • Evaluate maintenance and update the flood risk asset register; • Prepare emergency plans for flood warnings and alerts, efficient response to flood incidents and emergency recovery following a flood incident; • Establish and maintain long term partnership working, both internally within Barnet Council departments and externally with other RMAs. Additionally collaborate with other key partnership groups in order for the contribution to the achievement of wider environmental benefits; • Update and review hydraulic modelling of CDAs; • Modelling of Barnet catchment sewerage network; • Develop, maintain, apply and monitor a strategy for local flood risk management of the area; 9. Prepare flood hazard maps and flood risk maps; and 10. Prepare FRMPs Brent London Borough Council

Brent Local Plan The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Core Strategy Objectives include: (Adopted 2010) Strategic Objectives • Objective 1 To promote economic performance & regeneration – by:

180

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

o Creating five main growth areas of mixed use, mixed tenure development, the largest being Wembley which will be the main focu s of new retail and town centre uses, expanding the town centre eastwards into the Stadium area. o 10,000 new jobs within the Wembley Area over 20 years, half of which will be created by 2017. o Completing three large scale hotels in the Wembley area and one large regional visitor attraction. o Increasing newly approved retail floorspace in Wembley by 25%. • Objective 2 To meet employment needs and aid the regeneration of industry and business – by: o Working with developers and end users to offer suitable training and job placement opportunities. o Ensuring that sufficient sites and premises are available in the borough's main commercial areas such as Park Royal and that industrial/warehousing floorspace is renewed. • Objective 3 To enhance the vitality and viability of town centres – by: o Maintaining the position of town centres in the retail hierarchy, completing new retail developments in Willesden and Harlesden, and maintaining a range of local services. • Objective 4 To promote the arts and creative industries – by: o Increasing the supply of modern subsidised workplace developments for creative industries in the growth areas and promote new public art to support regeneration in the borough. Infrastructure & People’s Needs • Objective 5 To meet social infrastructure needs – by: o Securing provision for needs arising from new housing development, especially the provision of new education, health and community facilities. o Constructing at least three new secondary and three new primary schools in the borough. o Providing community facilities to meet the needs of Brent's diverse community. • Objective 6 To promote sports and other recreational activities – by: o Placing particular emphasis on the provision of new facilities to address existing deficiencies and to meet the needs of new population in the growth areas, creating at least one new swimming pool in the borough in the plan period and eight new multi-use games areas. Housing Needs • Objective 7 To achieve housing growth and meet housing needs – by: o Promoting development that is mixed in use and tenure, so that at least 11,200 additional homes are provided in the period from 2007/08 to 2016/2017, and that 85% of the borough's new housing growth is contained within 5 growth areas Ensuring that at least 25% of all new homes built in the borough are family sized (3 bed or more) and 50% (approx.) are affordable Transport infrastructure • Objective 8 To reduce the need to travel and improve transport choices – by: o Completing first class retail and other facilities in Wembley that reduces the need to travel to other centres. Improving key transport interchanges at Wembley, Alperton, First Central and Queen's Park Promoting access by public transport, bicycle or on foot and reducing car parking standards for growth areas because of their relative accessibility. o Reducing modal share of car trips to Wembley from 37% towards 25% Completing at least 5 car free schemes per annum in the plan period. Open Space & the Environment • Objective 9 To protect and enhance Brent’s environment – by: o Preserving the borough's open spaces for recreation and biodiversity. o Creating new and enhanced open spaces to address deficiencies where possible, but particularly to meet the needs of additional population commensurate with current levels of provision.

181

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

o Increasing the amount of public open space in the borough (and at least 2.4ha within Wembley) and the amount of land with enh anced ecological value Enhancing the borough’s green and blue infrastructure by tree planting, returning rivers to their more natural courses and mitigating the pollution effects of development. • Objective 10 To achieve sustainable development, mitigate & adapt to climate change – by: o Promoting mixed use, mixed tenure development in growth areas integrating Infrastructure and housing provision. o Reducing energy demand from current building regulation standards, particularly in growth areas and by achieving exemplar low carbon schemes and Combined Heat and Power plants Building at least two exemplar low o carbon schemes and two district wide CHP plants by 2017. • Objective 11 To treat waste as a resource – by: o Collaborating with the other West London waste authorities, ensuring that there is an appropriate network of facilities for integrated waste management and that existing, appropriately located, facilities are protected. • Objective 12 To promote healthy living and create a safe and secure environment - by o Ensuring that there is sufficient space for Primary Health Care providers, particularly to meet additional need in the growth areas Ensuring development delivers transport solutions and opportunities for healthy lifestyles (such as walking and cycling). o Embracing a design-led approach to reduce crime and the fear of crime by installing new CCTV systems and ensuring that crime levels continue to be reduced Improving participation rates in sports and active recreation through the provision of better quality sporting facilities and open space. Brent Local Flood The objectives for the LFRMS reflect the requirements of the Flood and Water Management Act 2010 and the National Flood and Coastal Erosion Risk Management Strategy, Risk Management 2011.The objectives of the Strategy are as follows: Strategy (LFRMS) • Improving the understanding of the risks of flooding in Brent Reducing the risk of flooding for people and businesses in Brent. • (Date Unknown) Providing clear information on the roles and responsibilities of everyone involved in flood risk management in Brent • Ensuring that emergency plans and responses to flood incidents in Brent are effective. • To take a sustainable and holistic approach to flood management, seeking to deliver wider environmental and social benefits. Croydon London Borough Croydon Local Plan The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These 2018 (Adopted Objectives include: 2018) A Place of Opportunity • Strategic Objective 1: Establish Croydon as the premier business location in South London and the Gatwick Diamond. • Strategic Objective 2: Foster an environment where both existing, and new, innovative, cultural and creative enterprises can prosper. • Strategic Objective 3: Provide a choice of housing for people at all stages of life. • Strategic Objective 4: Reduce social, economic and environmental deprivation, particularly where it is spatially concentrated, by taking priority measures to reduce unemployment, improve skills and education and renew housing, community and environmental conditions. A Place to Belong • Strategic Objective 5: Ensure that high quality new development both integrates, respects and enhances the borough’s natural environment and built heritage. • Strategic Objective 6: Provide and promote well designed emergency services, community, education, health and leisure facilities to meet the aspirations and needs of a diverse community. • Strategic Objective 7: Conserve and create spaces and buildings that foster safe, healthy and cohesive communities. A Place with a Sustainable Future • Strategic Objective 8: Improve accessibility, connectivity, sustainability and ease of movement to, from and within the borough. • Strategic Objective 9: Ensure the responsible use of land and natural resources and management of waste to mitigate and adapt to climate change. • Strategic Objective 10: Improve the quality and accessibility of green space and nature, whilst protecting and enhancing biodiversity.

182

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• Strategic Objective 11: Tackle flood risk by making space for water and util ising sustainable urban drainage systems. Croydon Local Flood The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including: Risk Management • Continue to build our evidence base on flood mechanisms, incidents and assets and improve how it is communicated internally and externally. • Strategy (LFRMS): Maximise use of resources in targeted flood management. • Ensure evidence of historic floods and ongoing studies effectively feed into planning policy and decision-making 2015-2020 • Support sustainable growth and development by understanding the needs of all parties • Work effectively with Risk Management Authorities in and around Croydon to jointly manage the risks. • Improve awareness of the causes of flooding with the general public and encourage proactive management • Take a more holistic view of asset management in Croydon, improving priorities and addressing source control more effectively. • Maximise opportunities to learn, improve and review flood management procedures based on lessons learnt Ealing London Borough Council Ealing Local Plan The Council have adopted a Spatial Vision for Ealing 2026 which aligns with the vision adopted in the Local Plan. The vision is outlined below: Development (or • (a) By 2026, we aim to provide 14,000 additional homes, 94,500 sqm of new office floorspace, decrease our net stock of industrial floorspace by 57,000 sqm (equivalent Core Strategy) 2026 to 14 hectares) through managed release11 and provide up to 128,400 gross sqm of new retail floorspace. • (b) Development of these new homes, business and retail space will be primarily concentrated in: The Uxbridge Road / Crossrail corridor - particularly focused in Acton, (Adopted 2012) Ealing and Southall town centres; around key stations at Acton Mail Line, Ealing Broadway and Southall; and, municipal housing estates including Copley Close, Green Man Lane, Havelock and South Acton. •The A40 / Park Royal corridor – particularly focused in Greenford town centre; Acton Main Line, Greenford and North Acton stations; Park Royal; and, other industrial estates. • (c) To promote business and enterprise by securing the stock of employment land, encouraging regeneration and renewal and being responsive to market demands. For industrial and warehousing businesses, we will protect our position as one of London’s premier locations. For the office market we will reverse our relative underperformance compared to neighbours; with a focus on providing high quality office space in Ealing town centre and capturing benefits afforded by Crossrail. • (d) To ensure the viability and vitality of the borough’s town centres in accordance with the established shopping hierarchy. • (e) To be a healthy and safe place to live and ensure that the necessary physical, social and green infrastructure and services as identified in the Infrastructure Delivery Plan are provided and enhanced in the borough. • (f) To support sustainable, safe and convenient transport networks to and through Ealing that, in particular, improve north-south transport links between the Uxbridge Road / Crossrail and A40 / Park Royal corridors and to promote healthy travel behaviour and seeks to reduce the need to travel. • (g) To protect and enhance suburban communities, improve public transport, cycle and pedestrian links to the development corridors and neighbourhoods. • (h) To care for the borough’s historic character and enhance the significance of heritage assets in regeneration proposals, ensure excellence in urban design and design out crime to make Ealing’s environment safe, attractive and accessible for all. • (i) To protect and enhance the pattern of green spaces and green corridors, identify and safeguard quiet areas and spaces of relative tranquillity and ensure that new development improves and adds to green space. • (j) To reduce the environmental impact of activities within the borough, protecting and improving air quality and ambient noise levels, achieving and maintaining a clean and healthy environment for all communities to enjoy. • (k) To promote sustainable design and construction in all development to play our part in addressing the global challenge of climate change. Ealing Local Flood The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including: Risk Management • Develop and improve the understanding of flood risk across the borough. • Strategy (LFRMS) Maintain and improve communication and cooperative working between strategic parties and flood risk management authorities. • Prevent the increase of flood risk through inappropriate development. 2016 • Develop community awareness of flood risk and ways of reducing the risk in the future. • Identify and implement flood mitigation measures where funding can be secured.

183

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Enfield London Borough Council The Enfield Plan The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Core Strategy 2010- Objectives include: 2025 (Adopted • Strategic Objectives 1 Enabling and focusing change - To meet the future needs of Enfield's existing and future population by focusing transformational change and 2010) growth in the Upper Lee Valley, in existing town centres and new neighbourhoods, where physical and social infrastructure already exists or can be improved through planned and phased development. To protect and enhance those parts of the Borough which currently offer a good quality of life to Enfield's communities. • Strategic Objectives 2 Environmental sustainability - To promote a sustainable pattern of development integrating infrastructure and housing, reducing the Borough's carbon footprint, minimising the need to travel and protecting the Borough's green belt and biodiversity. To mitigate and adapt to the impacts of climate change, promoting energy efficiency and renewable sources of energy including exemplar schemes as part of regeneration of the Upper Lee Valley area. To manage and reduce flood risk and pollution, promote sustainable water management and retain sufficient waste management facilities in the Borough. • Strategic Objectives 3 Community cohesion - To build upon and work together to revitalise the capacity of existing communities in those parts of the south and east of the Borough where deprivation and lack of opportunities are prevalent, particularly in Ponders End, Edmonton Green and New Southgate, and to provide a framework for the development of a new sustainable community in Central Leeside, providing a catalyst for regeneration of the Upper Lee Valley. To work with partners in continuing to make the Borough one of London's safest - supporting improvements in the safety of Enfield's streets and public spaces. • Strategic Objectives 4 New homes - To facilitate the provision of sustainably constructed new homes of exemplary space and design standards to meet the aspirations of local people. To meet the housing needs identified in Enfield's Housing Market Assessment, improving the existing housing stock, developing new housing, including mixed tenure and providing housing that people choose to make their long term home. To ensure new residential development is supported by good public transport, social, green and utilities infrastructure and achieve the maximum intensity of use having regard to development plan policy. • Strategic Objectives 5 Education, health and wellbeing - To ensure the capacity and quality of local social infrastructure provision including schools and further education, health and policing facilities, social care, retail services, leisure and recreation facilities is sufficient to meet the needs of Enfield's existing population and new residents. To promote healthier lifestyles and to address the inequalities in health and educational attainment between Enfield's residents particularly in areas such as Edmonton Green, Enfield Highway, Ponders End, Turkey Street and Upper Edmonton, where these issues are more prevalent. • Strategic Objectives 6 Maximising economic potential - To develop a spatial framework for a diverse and competitive economy in Enfield, maximising the economic potential of the Upper Lee Valley and town centres, enhancing appropriate employment locations and ensuring a more efficient use of land. To support new business enterprise and inward investment and economic diversity, promoting higher wage growth sectors, such as advanced manufacturing, renewable energy, knowledge based industries, leisure and services, and capitalising on the benefits arising from the London 2012 Olympics and Paralympics Games and its Legacy Transformation. To support a robust strategy for recovering from the recession, and protection from the troughs of future economic cycles. • Strategic Objectives 7 Employment and skills - To support job creation and address the levels of unemployment and economic inactivity particularly in the south and east of the Borough, including amongst young people and disadvantaged sections of the community, and the development of skills to enable all residents to access the employment market. To tackle the barriers to employment facing particular sections of the community. • Strategic Objectives 8 Transportation and accessibility - To enhance traffic flow by the provision of appropriate infrastructure as well as the promotion of sustainable methods of transport and a pattern of development that reduces the need to travel. To ensure development is accessible by all means of transport and that high generating uses are supported by good public transport, walking and cycling facilities. To seek improved movement and accessibility within the Borough, the North London sub region and beyond, focusing particularly on improvements to both road and public transport orbital connections, to improved east-west movement through the Borough, and to support existing and potential businesses in providing for freight movement. To maximise the benefits to Enfield arising from the proposals to improve the West Anglia railway in the Upper Lee Valley. • Strategic Objectives 9 Natural environment - To protect and enhance Enfield’s natural heritage by retaining the open character of the Borough, safeguarding the green belt and other open space and developing the wider network of green infrastructure in the Borough. To meet the deficiencies in open spaces that exist in the east and south of the Borough and improve access to green areas and waterways (i.e. through River Restoration projects), particularly for the communities close to the Lee Valley Regional Park.

184

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• Strategic Objectives 10 Built environment - Use a design -led approach to developments and places, while addressing historic land contamination, in order to promote a step-change in the quality of the built environment and public realm, creating safe and accessible environments and improve urban greening with tree planting and landscaping. To maximise the contribution that heritage assets and existing features make, enhance local distinctiveness and identity, and create safer, stronger communities. Enfield Local Flood The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including: Risk Management • Flood Risk Information – provide up to date information regarding the level of flood risk within Enfield taking account of emerging climate change impacts, improve Strategy (LFRMS) understanding and awareness of flood risk. • Maintain Flood Risk Management Assets – ensure the continued serviceability of existing flood risk management assets by carrying out regular inspections and 2016 maintenance as required following best practice principles. • Flood Risk and Development – ensure new development is safe from flooding, does not increase flood risk elsewhere and, through the redevelopment of previously developed land, reduces overall flood risk. • Reduce Runoff Rates – retrofit sustainable drainage to existing developments, store flood waters in parks and other open spaces during extreme flood events and apply natural flood management techniques where opportunities exist. • Protect Existing Properties from Flooding – improve protection against flooding for all properties to a 1 in 100 year standard where possible, identify areas where flood protection is sub-standard and implement flood alleviation schemes where opportunities exist. • Preparedness and Resilience – promote flood resistance and resilience measures to properties at risk of flooding where an adequate standard of protection cannot otherwise be achieved, ensure that residents in flood risk areas are adequately prepared. • Emergency Response to Flooding – respond effectively in the event of flooding providing emergency assistance to those in need. • Partnership – continue to work collaboratively with fellow risk management authorities to ensure flood risk management activities are coordinated across the borough and surrounding areas Harrow London Borough Council Harrow Local Plan The Council have adopted core strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. Core Strategy These Objectives include: (Adopted 2012) • Protect the historical and environmental features that contribute to Harrow’s character and distinctiveness as a place to live, work and visit. • Enhance the infrastructure, environment and other resources which make Harrow a desirable place to live, work and visit. • Manage the Borough’s contribution to climate change and increase resilience to flooding. • Adapt to population and demographic changes to meet people’s needs and quality of life. Harrow Local Flood The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including: Risk Management • To develop and to improve the understanding of flood risk across the borough; • Strategy 2016 To better inform residents and profile flood risk including flood prevention, preparedness, resilience and resistance; • To improve the way in which we provide long term sustainability and flood risk reduction and mitigation through development to ensure the economic prosperity and protection of residents, business and infrastructure; • To encourage residents, businesses and local landowners to take action and contribute to the management and reduction of flood risk; and • To be compliant with statutory obligations and to play a positive role to combat climate change and to deal with the impacts of climate change. Hillingdon London Borough Council Hillingdon Local The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Plan Part 1: Strategic Objectives include: Priorities 2026 • Hillingdon is taking full advantage of its distinctive strengths with regard to its places, communities and heritage: (Adopted 2012)

185

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

o SO1: Conserve and enhance the borough’s heritage and their settings by ensuring new development, including changes to the public realm, are of high quality design, appropriate to the significance of the heritage asset, and seek to maintain and enhance the contribution of built, landscaped and buried heritage to London’s environmental quality, cultural identity and economy as part of managing London’s ability to accommodate change and regeneration. o SO2: Create neighbourhoods that are of a high quality sustainable design, that have regard for their historic context and use sustainability principles which are sensitive and responsive to the significance of the historic environment, are distinctive, safe, functional and accessible and which reinforce the identity and suburban qualities of the borough's streets and public places, introduce public art to celebrate civic pride and serve the long-term needs of all residents. o SO3: Improve the quality of, and accessibility to, the heritage value of the borough’s open spaces, including rivers and canals as areas for sports, recreation, visual interest, biodiversity, education, health and wellbeing. In addition, address open space needs by providing new spaces identified in Hillingdon's Open Space Strategy. o SO4: Ensure that development contributes to a reduction in crime and disorder, is resilient to terrorism, and delivers safe and secure buildings, spaces and inclusive communities. SO5: Safeguard and promote areas of geological importance and make a proportionate contribution to West London’s target to extract 0.5 million tonnes of minerals. • The social and economic inequality gaps in Hillingdon are being closed: o SO6: Promote social inclusion through equality of opportunity and equality of access to social, educational, health, employment, recreational, green space and cultural facilities for all in the borough, particularly for residents living in areas of identified need. o SO7: Address housing needs in Hillingdon using appropriate planning measures. Improved environment and infrastructure is supporting healthier living and helping the borough to mitigate and adapt to climate change: o SO8: Protect and enhance biodiversity to support the necessary changes to adapt to climate change. Where possible, encourage the development of wildlife corridors. o SO9: Promote healthier and more active lifestyles through the provision of access to a range of sport, recreation, health and leisure facilities. o SO10: Improve and protect air and water quality, reduce adverse impacts from noise including the safeguarding of quiet areas and reduce the impacts of contaminated land. o SO11: Address the impacts of climate change, and minimise emissions of carbon and local air quality pollutants from new development and transport. o SO12: Reduce the reliance on the use of the car by promoting safe and sustainable forms of transport, such as improved walking and cycling routes and encouraging travel plans. o SO13: Support the objectives of sustainable waste management. • Economic growth has been concentrated in Uxbridge, and the Heathrow and Hayes/West Drayton Corridor without ignoring local centres: o SO14: Provide 9,000 new jobs and accommodate most economic growth in Uxbridge and the Heathrow Opportunity Area. o SO15: Protect land for employment uses to meet the needs of different sectors of the economy. Manage the release of surplus employment land for other uses. o SO16: Manage appropriate growth, viability and regeneration of town and neighbourhood centres. • Improved accessibility to local jobs, housing and facilities is improving the quality of life of residents: o SO17: Link deprived areas with employment benefits arising from the development of major sites and existing key locations. o SO18: Improve access to local services and facilities, including health, education, employment and training, local shopping, community, cultural, sport and leisure facilities, especially for those without a car and for those in more remote parts of the borough through well planned routes and integrated public transport. o SO19: Meet the current London Plan target to provide 425 new homes per annum. o SO20: Improve facilities at bus and underground/ rail interchanges to promote sustainable growth in Uxbridge, Heathrow, the Hayes/ West Drayton Corridor and accessibility to other town centres. • Hillingdon has a reliable network of north/south public transport routes and improved public transport interchanges:

186

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

o SO21: Improve public transport services between the north and the south of the borough to ensure easier access between reside ntial areas such as Northwood and South Ruislip, Hillingdon Hospital, Brunel University, Stockley Park and Heathrow Airport. o SO22: Promote efficient use of public transport and in particular the enhancement of Underground services to Uxbridge and faster services to central London. • Hillingdon has prospered from the presence of Heathrow: o SO23: Develop and implement a strategy for the Heathrow Opportunity Area, in order to ensure that local people benefit from economic and employment growth and social and environmental improvements including reductions in noise and poor air quality. o SO24: Optimise the potential employment and educational benefits of Heathrow airport for local residents. o SO25: Maintain support for operational uses within the existing airport boundary that do not increase environmental impacts and continue to reduce existing impacts. Hillington Local The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including: Flood Risk • Develop knowledge and awareness of different flood risks, and roles and responsibilities in managing flooding. • Management Maintain and improve communication and cooperative working between RMA and LLFA and the public. • Development in Hillingdon understands and takes account of flood risk issues and plans to reduce flood risk. Strategy 2016 • Identify and implement new flood risk management measures • Promote the effective management of flood risk assets • Ensuring that emergency plans and responses to flood incidents are effective and that communities understand their role in an emergency. Kingston Upon Thames London Borough Council Royal Borough of The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Kingston Upon Objectives include: Thames Local • Theme 1: A Sustainable Borough o Development Reduce greenhouse gas emissions and the impacts of climate change by delivering low carbon development in accessible locations, developing district heating networks when major new development is undertaken, and by working with partners to develop a climate change adaptation strategy to include Framework Core reducing the heat island affect that especially affects Kingston Town Centre. Strategy 2026 o Manage and reduce fluvial and surface water flood risk in the Borough by ensuring flood risk strategies are kept up to date, guiding new development to (Adopted 2012) areas of low risk where possible and requiring mitigation measures such as Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems. Where development is required within flood risk zones such as Kingston Town Centre, mitigation measures will be required. o Improve the natural and green environment and local biodiversity through active management and enhancement of local sites and protect natural resources by designating suitable land, requiring new development to increase access to open space and protect and promote biodiversity by tree planting and landscaping. o Promote sustainable waste management within the four borough waste partnership by preparing a Joint Waste Plan to identify suitable waste management sites to meet needs identified in the London Plan and policies to ensure high standards of development and to safeguard existing sites. o Promote and improve sustainable forms of travel, including through travel awareness and travel planning to reduce the need for car use by locating trip generating development in accessible locations, especially Kingston Town Centre and the three District Centres; and by working with partners to improve orbital public transport to these centres and other key trip generators in the Borough, such as Kingston University, the Courts and Kingston Hospital that serve sub-regional catchments. o Safeguard the distinctive character of the Borough and promote a high quality environment and street scene by guiding development to areas with opportunities for growth and change, such as the town centres, employment areas and the three Key Areas of Change, and by ensuring that new development creates locally distinct places and high standards of design. Conserve, manage and enhance Kingston’s heritage assets which reflect its rich and distinguished history as a Royal Borough and promote heritage-led regeneration, ensuring new development is designed to enhance historic buildings and maintains their public access and enjoyment. 187

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

o Protect and enhance local spaces, Green Belt and Metropolitan Open Land including the extensive Green Belt in the south of th e Borough, 8 the River Thames and its environs and the Hogsmill Valley, by development management, and by improving access and the quality of facilities. Protect and enhance the special character and environment along the River Thames and promote use of the river and the riverside by improving facilities and access, and protecting and enhancing biodiversity. • Theme 2: A prosperous and Inclusive Borough o Maintain Kingston’s position as a successful Metropolitan and Sub-regional Centre by providing a range of employment opportunities, education and community facilities, cultural, leisure and shopping attractions and new homes, through the implementation of the Kingston Town Centre Area Action Plan. o Maintain and improve the vitality and viability of Kingston’s three District Centres and 25 Local Shopping Centres by designating these centres as the focus for new and improved facilities which support economic growth and regeneration. o Ensure that there is sufficient and appropriately located industrial land and buildings to support economic prosperity by building on the Borough's economic strengths to promote a diverse and flourishing economy and by designating the main employment areas and town centres as locations for employment use. o Support improvements to the quality of facilities for Higher and Further Education and the provision of additional student accommodation by partnership working with Kingston University and College to recognise their economic o and cultural contributions, and to identify suitable policies/sites for their future growth. • Theme 3: A Safe, Healthy and Strong Borough o Meet the significant future need for school places by identifying sites and expanding existing schools to meet identified needs, including a site for a new secondary school in the north of the Borough. o Improve overall health and wellbeing and reduce health inequalities by partnership working with health providers, local strategic partners and the voluntary and community sector as appropriate to identify needs and by promoting an environment that supports active lives and takes account of the health impacts of new developments. o Facilitate the reorganisation and improvement of healthcare facilities and delivery of healthcare services at all levels by coordinating with health providers, including Kingston Hospital NHS Trust and South West London Mental Health Trust, to identify priorities for new facilities in accessible locations and promote their co-location to deliver the best range of health services at a local neighbourhood level. o Facilitate improvements to community, voluntary sector and faith facilities by working in partnership to monitor needs and developing policies and mechanisms to support future provision at a neighbourhood level. Provision of such facilities will be encouraged in the most accessible locations – Kingston Town Centre, the three town and local centres, and where appropriate through co-location. o Promote a wide range of actions and measures to diversify and improve cultural, leisure and recreation facilities by working with partners to identify suitable facilities and locate developments where they are accessible, particularly Kingston Town Centre, New Malden, Surbiton and Tolworth District Centres. o Make communities safer and reduce the fear of crime by suitable development management policies to promote a safe, secure and attractive environment, having regard to the most up-to-date best practice guidance and principles, and partnership working with the police, local strategic partners and stakeholders to manage potential nuisance generating activities, which are generally to be located within the Borough’s town centres. o Ensure that necessary infrastructure and facilities are provided to support new development by implementing an Infrastructure Delivery Plan with partners that identifies priorities, timescales and delivery mechanisms. The Council will work with developers to ensure that infrastructure needs generated by the proposals are secured including by developing a Community Infrastructure Levy. o Promote good design of buildings and the public realm to meet the needs of a diverse community through suitable policies and guidance that deliver socially inclusive and accessible developments, recognising the anticipated changes to social characteristics within the Borough over the plan period. Kingston Upon The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including: Thames Local Flood • Educate, encourage and empower local stakeholders to take action on reducing flood risk. • Apply an intelligence led risk based approach to the management of flood risk in the Royal Borough of Kingston Upon Thames. 188

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Risk Management • Establish and maintain collaborative partnerships with key organisations, including Thames Water, neighbouring boroughs and t he Environment Agency. • Strategy (LFRMS) Use planning powers to encourage sustainable solutions for the management of local flood risk which take account of the likely effects of climate change. 2010 London Borough of Hounslow Hounslow Local Plan The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Objectives 2030 (Adopted include: 2015) • Objective One: Supporting our Town Centres - To maintain our town centres as a focus for the community and to attract investment, through an improved retail and service offer, new leisure and cultural facilities, and new residential quarters. Enhanced public realm and environmental improvements will also help build their identity. • Objective Two: Promoting Economic Growth and Inward Investment - To encourage inward investment and facilitate job growth by maintaining the supply of employment land, allocating development sites to accommodate forecasted employment growth and supporting our existing employers to expand. To make the London Borough of Hounslow an attractive place to do business by creating an environment conducive to entrepreneurs and ensuring our residents are appropriately skilled. • Objective Three: Delivering Sustainable Mixed Communities - To provide a mix of housing types and tenures to meet the needs of our growing population including affordable housing, aspirational family homes and high quality provision for the elderly to allow people to choose to live in the borough throughout their lives and create stable mixed communities. • Objective Four: Reinforcing Local Character and Context - To recognise the varied character of the borough’s districts and seek to preserve and enhance their special qualities, heritage assets and overall townscape quality and appearance. Combine this with the promotion of well-designed development that meets the needs of 21st century urban living and contributes positively to the character of an area. • Objective Five: Maximising the Benefits of our Green and Blue Infrastructure - To protect, maintain and improve the openness, access, amenity, biodiversity, and recreational value of the borough’s green and blue spaces to maximise their health and wellbeing benefits to our communities. To enhance existing green infrastructure links and create new ones to connect green and blue spaces and facilitate better access for local residents and contribute to biodiversity and wider environmental resilience. • Objective Six: Delivering Community Infrastructure - To ensure the delivery of appropriate infrastructure providing a range of community, education, health, cultural, sport and entertainment facilities that will support the borough’s growing community and which are seen as a positive reason for visiting, living in and working in the borough. • Objective Seven: Ensuring Environmental Quality - To protect from, mitigate and seek to reduce the detrimental effects of noise, poor air quality and general environmental pollution through strong environmental standards. To promote the mitigation of, and adaptation to, climate change through requirements for sustainable design and construction; reduced carbon emissions; the management of flood risk; and conservation of resources. • Objective Eight: Enhancing Connectivity - To promote ease of movement for all through enhancing public transport, cycling and walking measures to provide genuine alternatives to private vehicles for the majority of journeys. To improve the provision of telecommunications infrastructure to increase the attractiveness of the borough to business, and reduce the need for commuting. Hounslow Local The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including: Flood Risk • Develop and improve the understanding of flood risk across the borough. • Management Improve communication and co-operation between strategic partners and Risk Management Authorities, residents and businesses in Hounslow. • Prevent the increase of flood risk through inappropriate development • Develop greater community awareness of flood risk and reducing those risks in the future. Strategy (LFRMS) • Identify and implement flood mitigation measures in areas at risk from surface water flooding where additional funding can be secured. 2014 • To take a sustainable and holistic approach to flood management, seeking to deliver wider environmental, economic and social benefits.

London Borough of Richmond Upon Thames

189

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

London Borough of The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Objectives Richmond Upon include: Thames Local Plan Protecting Local Character (Adopted 2018 and • Maintain and enhance the borough's attractive villages, including the unique, distinctive and recognisable local characters of the different village areas and their sub- 2020 in relation to areas. • Protect and, where possible, enhance the environment including the heritage assets, retain and improve the character and appearance of established residential areas, two legal and ensure new development and public spaces are of high quality design. challenges) • Protect and improve the borough's parks and open spaces to provide a high quality environment for local communities and provide a balance between areas for quiet enjoyment and wildlife and areas to be used for sports, games and recreation. • Protect and enhance the borough's network of green infrastructure that performs a wide range of functions for residents, visitors, biodiversity and the economy. • Protect and enhance the borough's biodiversity, including trees and landscape, both within open spaces but also within the built environment and along wildlife corridors. • Protect and improve the unique environment of the borough's rivers, especially the River Thames and its tributaries as wildlife corridors, as opportunities for recreation and river transport where possible, increasing access to and alongside the rivers where appropriate, and gain wider local community benefits when sites are redeveloped. A Sustainable Future • Minimise and mitigate the effects of climate change by requiring high levels of sustainable design and construction including reductions in carbon dioxide emissions by minimising energy consumption, promoting decentralised energy and the use of renewable energy as well as requiring high standards of water efficiency. • Promote and encourage development to be fully resilient to the future impacts of climate change in order to minimise vulnerability of people and property; this includes by risk of flooding, water shortages, subsidence and the effects of overheating. • Optimise the use of land and resources by ensuring new development takes place on previously developed land, reusing existing buildings and encouraging remediation and reuse of contaminated land. • Reduce or mitigate environmental impacts and pollution levels (such as air, noise, light, odour, fumes water and soil) and encourage improvements in air quality, particularly along major roads and areas that already exceed acceptable air quality standards. • Ensure local environmental impacts of development are not detrimental to the health, safety and the amenity of existing and new users or occupiers of a development or the surrounding area. • Promote safe and sustainable transport choices, including public transport, cycling and walking, for all people, including those with disabilities. • Encourage improvements to public transport, including quality and connectivity of transport interchanges, and support the use of Smart City technology and practices. • Promote sustainable waste management through minimising waste and providing sufficient land for the reuse, recycling and treatment of waste, and minimise the amount of waste going to landfill in line with the West London Waste Plan Support sustainable growth of the visitor economy for the benefit of local communities and promote the borough as an attractive and inviting place to visit and enjoy. • Conserve and enhance the borough's unique historic and cultural assets that are connected by the River Thames. • Create attractive and pleasant environments and spaces that promote active and healthy lifestyles, including recognising their benefits to residents' social life and their economic benefits to the borough's centres. Meeting People’s Needs • Ensure there is adequate provision of facilities for community and social infrastructure that are important for the quality of life of residents and which support the growing population, by protecting existing and, where required, securing new facilities and services that meet people's needs. • Ensure there is sufficient provision of facilities and services for education and training for all age groups to help reduce inequalities and support the local economy; this includes school places as well as children’s centres and youth provision and promoting local employment opportunities and training programmes. • Ensure there is a suitable stock and mix of high quality housing that reflects local needs by providing a choice of housing types and sizes, with higher density development located in more sustainable locations, such as the borough's centres and areas better served by public transport. • Pursue all opportunities to maximise affordable housing across the borough through a range of measures, including providing more choice in the different types of affordable housing and different levels of affordability.

190

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• Ensure there continues to be good provision of, and access to , shopping and other local services and facilities that meet the needs of our communities. • Reinforce the role of Richmond, Twickenham, Teddington, Whitton and East Sheen centres, which play an important role in the provision of shops, services, employment and housing as well as being a focus for community and cultural life. • Ensure that local and neighbourhood centres as well as parades of local importance provide a focus for local communities to meet, shop, work and spend leisure time. • Encourage opportunities for leisure, entertainment, sport, cultural activity and the development of community life. • Ensure there continues to be a wide variety of employment and training opportunities available to residents and support for businesses. • Protect and encourage land for employment use, particularly for affordable small / medium spaces, start-up and incubator units and flexible employment space, in order to support the borough’s current and future economic and employment needs. • Facilitate inward investment and support businesses, particularly small and medium-sized enterprises and creative industries to grow the employment base of the borough. • Encourage the creation of healthy environments and support healthy and active lifestyles, including through measures to reduce health inequalities. This includes ensuring there is an appropriate range of health facilities that meet local needs, and tackling childhood obesity by restricting access to unhealthy foods, particularly fast food takeaways, in proximity to schools. • Promote inclusive and sustainable communities, social interaction, cohesive, healthy and dementia-friendly communities, and enable the older population to remain independent and active for longer Richmond Upon The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including Thames Local Flood • Encourage direct involvement in decision making through the establishment of and maintaining partnerships with key organisations, including the Environment Agency Risk Management and Thames Water. • Improve our knowledge and understanding of the interactions between different sources of flooding in Richmond Borough Strategy (LFRMS) • Encourage residents, businesses and local landowners to take action and contribute to the management and reduction of flood risk 2014-2020 (2014) • Target resources where they have the greatest effect by adopting a risk based approach. • Contribute to wider social, economic and environmental outcomes by encouraging sustainable multi-benefit solutions for the management of local flood risk. Merton London Borough Council Merton Local The Council have adopted strategic objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Development Objectives include: Framework Core • Strategic Objective 1 To make Merton a municipal leader in improving the environment, taking the lead in tackling climate change, reducing pollution, developing a low Planning Strategy carbon economy, consuming fewer resources and using them more effectively • Strategic Objective 2 To promote social cohesion and tackle deprivation by reducing inequalities. (2011) • Strategic Objective 3 To provide new homes and infrastructure within Merton's town centres and residential areas, through physical regeneration and effective use of space • Strategic Objective 4 To make Merton more prosperous with strong and diverse long term economic growth. • Strategic Objective 5 To make Merton a healthier and better place for people to live and work in or visit. • Strategic Objective 6 To make Merton an exemplary borough in mitigating and adapting to climate change and to make it a more attractive and green place. • Strategic Objective 7 To make Merton a well-connected place where walking, cycling and public transport are the modes of choice when planning all journeys. • Strategic Objective 8 To promote a high quality urban and suburban environment in Merton where development is well designed and contributes to the function and character of the borough. Merton Local Flood The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including Risk Management • Identify areas at highest risk of flooding from local sources and develop a prioritised action plan in line with the principles of the Strategy, • Strategy (LFRMS) Work with Risk Management Authorities and stakeholders to identify ways of managing flood risk in those areas at greatest risk within the borough, • Work with planners and developers to ensure no increase in risk of flooding from new development, 2014-2020 (2014) • Maximise available resources and funding to target those areas at greatest risk, 191

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

• Prioritise maintenance activities to reduce surface water flooding, and, Advise communities, residents and businesses on the level of flood risk affecting them and how they can better protect themselves and their property. Sutton London Borough Council Sutton Local Plan The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Objectives 2016-2031 include: (Adopted 2018) Sutton’s People • To meet the borough's share of London's future housing need and make a positive contribution to meeting housing needs across the wider area of south-west London. • To provide homes of the right price, of the right tenure and of the right size for the borough's current and future residents. • To meet the needs of older people and other groups who need specialist housing. • To achieve the highest design and environmental standards possible and to future proof buildings in terms of a changing climate. • To use the Green Belt, Metropolitan Open Land, the parks and other open spaces to protect the open feel of the borough and its biodiversity. • To ensure growth is respectful of the suburban character and historic assets and places within the borough, promoting or reinforcing local distinctiveness. • To provide the necessary education and health facilities and to ensure utilities and digital infrastructure are fit for purpose. Sutton's Business • To work with existing businesses so that they expand and help them to enhance their premises. • To provide new opportunities for new businesses to come and flourish in the borough. • To ensure that new businesses match residents’ expectations that they will invest in local employment and training opportunities and that they will fit the aspirations of Sutton. Sutton's Centres • To ensure the borough's centres and parades have a good range of high quality shops. • To ensure the borough's centres are adapted for 21st century shopping. • To ensure popular uses are located in the borough's centres. • To improve the public realm in the borough's centres. Sutton's Linkages • To improve public transport within the borough and across south London, and secure improvements to the road network to address the impacts of new development where necessary. • To enhance cycle routes. • To improve footpaths and encourage walking. Sutton's Environment • To enhance the quality of the River Wandle and increase its benefits for people and wildlife. • To protect and enhance the borough's biodiversity. • To reduce flood risk to and from new development. • To cut pollution and address the causes and impacts of climate change by promoting low carbon and environmentally sustainable developments. • To conserve and enhance the borough's historic places and heritage assets, including their settings, and address heritage at risk as part of a positive strategy for the historic environment. Sutton Local Flood The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including • Risk Management Improve our understanding and data holdings regarding mechanisms of flooding in Sutton, • Build on relationships with Risk Management Authorities and maximise joint working opportunities for multiple benefits, Strategy (LFRMS) • Proactively encourage sustainable practices and identify opportunities for holistic water management across the Borough, 2014-2020 (2014) • Reduce the number of homes and businesses at risk of flooding, and • Support local residents to increase their own resilience to flooding. 192

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Title Description

Wandsworth London Borough Council Wandsworth Local The Council have adopted objectives in order to achieve their overall vision for growth of the area, which align with those adopted in the London Plan 2021. These Objectives Plan Core Strategy include: (Adopted 2016) Environmental Objectives • Secure sustainable development in the borough to help tackle climate change, protect and enhance the quality of life and improve environmental, social and economic opportunities (also social and economic). • Protect, reinforce and repair the existing distinctive character of the different districts of the borough, placing full value on the heritage and amenity of each different district. • Protect and enhance open spaces and the natural environment, and seek the protection and enhancement of habitat and biodiversity. • Manage waste more efficiently - reduce; reuse; recycle and recover energy from waste and reduce the amount of waste to landfill, in accordance with strategic targets. • Promote low carbon development through increased energy efficiency and the proportion of energy generated locally and from renewable sources. • Encourage the use of sustainable building techniques and sustainable water resources. • Protect people from risks to their health and safety, and damage to their amenity. • Reduce the environmental impact of transport without reducing access. • Protect and enhance the River Thames and its tributaries. Manage the consequences and reduce the risk of flooding. Social Objectives • Secure a range of new housing development to meet different needs and demands, including that for affordable and special needs housing. • Ensure that the strategic target for housing completions in Wandsworth is achieved. • Provide for the needs of and improve access to educational, social, welfare, health, community, police and prison services. • Create safer, healthier and more secure communities. • Promote equality of opportunity, including seeking to ensure that new development is accessible for people with disabilities. Economic Objectives • Seek to maximise the employment potential of land in the borough by safeguarding land and buildings for business and industrial use and promoting development for employment purposes in appropriate locations including as part of mixed use development so as to increase job and business opportunities. • Promote the provision of flexible business space to meet the needs of the small and medium enterprises which comprise the overwhelming number of businesses in the borough. • Secure regeneration in areas of deprivation to reduce poverty and social exclusion. • Seek to ensure that the scale of development is related to environmental capacity and the capacity of public transport and other infrastructure. • Increase the viability and vitality of the town centres and local centres, including the proposed centres at Battersea Power Station and Vauxhall, as the focus for shopping and for employment and leisure and other community activities. • Promote development proposals that contribute to a safe, accessible and integrated transport system and proposals that contribute to London's overall transport system, with improved accessibility to surrounding areas, especially central London. Wandsworth Local The LFRMS for outlines the challenges faced in the area from flooding and how they aim to overcome these challenges through a number of objectives including: Flood Risk • Further understand the risk of flooding across the London Borough of Wandsworth, • Management Encourage appropriately mitigated development across the London Borough of Wandsworth, • Seek to identify funding and resources available for flood risk management, Strategy (LFRMS) • Proactively manage sources of local flooding to homes, critical infrastructure and transport networks by working in partnership with others, 2016 • Work with Risk Management Authorities to raise awareness of flood risk with communities, residents and businesses and how they can better protect themselves and their property, and • Use knowledge of flood risk to inform the emergency response to flooding within the London Borough of Wandsworth.

193

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix B4: Strategic Economic Plans

Strategic Economic Description Plan Title

Thames Valley The Thames Valley SEP sets out in detail the established vision and investment priorities for the former County of Berkshire, (now divided into the six unitary authority areas including Bracknell Berkshire Strategic Forest). The SEP outlines the constraints the Thames Valley Berkshire Local Enterprise Partnership (LEP) face and the objectives which aim to overcome such issues. These objectives include: Economic Plan (SEP) • Use better those who are already in the workforce. • 2015/2016 – Inspire the next generation and build aspirations and ambition. • 2020/2021 Ensure that economic potential is not restricted by labour supply issues. • Ensure that knowledge is effectively commercialised and grown within Thames Valley Berkshire. • Strengthen networks and invest in the ‘soft wiring’ to use ideas better. • Make Thames Valley Berkshire’s towns genuine hubs in the idea’s economy. These objectives are to be achieved through High level Programmes including the development of infrastructure such as transport, communications and place-shaping and enhancing the skills, education and employment of the area’s population. Buckinghamshire The SEP forms the basis for ensuring Buckinghamshire Local economy is growing strongly, creating jobs and delivering major economic opportunities for the future. It details how this will be Local Enterprise achieved but centrally it comes down to 4 priorities: Partnership Strategic • Business Growth and Innovation. • Economic Plan (SEP) Skills and Talent. • 2014 Connectivity. • Town Centre Regeneration. Gloucestershire Local This SEP forms the basis for ensuring Gloucestershire’s local economy is “growing strongly, creating resilience and a prosperous economy encouraging more jobs and delivering major Enterprise economic opportunities for the future”. It identifies the current challenges faced by Gloucestershire including demographic changes, growing population, and an increased skilled workforce Partnership Strategic with a challenge on trying to fill all vacancies. It details how they will achieve to overcome these challenges via particular priorities including: Economic Plan (SEP) • Attracting and retaining successful businesses in high value sectors and the next generation of talented workers. 2018 Providing and nurturing the next generation of talented, highly employable, and productive individuals41 to meet the needs of local business, especially those in sectors with high growth potential. Delivering digital and integrated transport connectivity to stimulate business growth, ensuring infrastructure, regeneration, and housing meet the future needs of the businesses and people of Gloucestershire. Oxfordshire Local The SEP helps to identify potential opportunities and prospects of Oxfordshire and manages the County’s strong economic growth to ensure sustainability and inclusivity. It also acknowledges Enterprise the changing context for Oxfordshire’s economic well-being and responds to substantial engagement from the County’s businesses, universities, research institutions, local authorities, Partnership Strategic voluntary and community sectors and many of our residents too. Economic Plan (SEP) 2016 Swindon and The SEP identifies five strategic objectives extending across the Swindon and Wiltshire Local Enterprise Partnership (SWLEP) area which have been adopted to ensure economic growth of the Wiltshire Strategic SWLEP area. These objectives include: Economic Plan (SEP) • Skills and talent – there is a need for an appropriately skilled and competitive workforce to achieve the growth ambitions; • 2016-2026 Transport infrastructure improvements – there is a need for a well-connected, reliable and resilient transport system to support economic and planned development growth at key locations;

194

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Strategic Economic Description Plan Title

• Digital capability – there is a need to deliver excellence in digital connectivit y and cyber transformation to achieve business growth, innovative public services and influence societal change; • Place shaping – there is a need to deliver the infrastructure required to deliver our planned growth and regenerate our City and Town Centres, and improve our visitor and cultural offer; and • Business development – there is a need to strengthen the competitiveness of small and medium sized businesses and attract a greater share of foreign and domestic investment into the area. The Coast to Capital The SEP identifies eight economic priorities for the joint councils which include West Sussex. These objectives include: Local Enterprise • Priority 1: Deliver prosperous urban centres • Partnership Strategic Priority 2: Develop business infrastructure and support • Economic Plan (SEP) Priority 3: Invest in sustainable growth • Priority 4: Create skills for the future 2018-2030 • Priority 5: Pioneer innovation in core strengths • Priority 6: Promote better transport and mobility • Priority 7: Improve digital network capability • Priority 8: Build a strong national and international profile. Coventry and The SEP identifies key economic objectives for Warwickshire and Coventry. These objectives include: Warwickshire Local • Improve Coventry & Warwickshire’s economic competitiveness. • Enterprise Strategic Address the existing productivity gap between the CWLEP area and the UK average. • Economic Plan (SEP) Ensure strong road, rail and broadband connectivity across the full CWLEP area. • Become a global centre for R&D in Advanced Manufacturing and Engineering. 2016 • Create a supportive environment within which businesses can grow and prosper. • Invest in employment and skills provision to meet evolving demands of employers, providing a world-class apprenticeship offer. • Grow the creative and cultural industries with Coventry becoming UK Capital of Culture 2021. South East Midlands The SEP identifies economic objectives for a number of local authorities including Central Bedfordshire and Luton. The strategic direction for SEMLEP is a focus on supporting business Local Enterprise investment and private sector jobs growth to drive economic success, including the acceleration of housing growth and employment through investment in the enabling infrastructure. These Strategic Economic objectives include: Plan (SEP) 2015- • Objective 1: Stimulating enterprise and enhancing the competitiveness of SMEs. • 2020 Objective 2: Strengthening and exploiting our innovation and knowledge assets • Objective 3: Supporting new and existing businesses to export their goods and services. • Objective 4: Attracting domestic and international investments • Objective 5: Developing a skilled and adaptable workforce. • Objective 6: Addressing barriers to the labour market for disadvantaged groups. • Objective 7: Delivering infrastructure (transport, utilities and broadband) to accelerate sustainable growth in jobs, housing and investment in town centres. • Objective 8: Securing long-term and on-going funding to deliver the infrastructure plan. Northamptonshire The SEP identifies key economic strategic priorities for the Northamptonshire area including West North Northamptonshire. These priorities are adopted in order to achieve the visions for Enterprise 2031 “Deliver 80,000 new homes and create 70,000 new jobs” and by 2021 “create a £2bn economy, 32,500 new jobs and deliver 37,000 new homes. The strategic priorities include:

195

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Strategic Economic Description Plan Title

Partnership Strategic • Growing our businesses including Business and Innovation and Employment and Skills. • Economic Plan Growing our Places including Infrastructure and Connectivity and Housing. Hertfordshire Local This SEP forms the basis for ensuring “by 2030, Hertfordshire will be among the UK’s leading economies, helping to realise th e full economic potential of the assets and opportunities within Enterprise the Golden Triangle”. Partnership Strategic It identifies the current challenges and drivers faced by Hertfordshire including global economic uncertainty, UK leaving the EU, policy priorities of the Government changing, public spending austerity, growth of London, demographic changes, growing of the ‘gig economy’, climate change and resource use, digital connectivity and big data, changing urban forms and changing Economic Plan 2017- lifestyles. It details how they will achieve to overcome these challenges and drivers via particular priorities including: 2030 • Maintaining global excellence in science and technology. • Harnessing relationships with London (and elsewhere). • Re-invigorating places for the 21st Century. • Foundations for growth. Enterprise M3 This SEP identifies two ‘stimulants’ that will generate economic expansion for Surrey and Hampshire : • Strategic Economic Digital and Data Technologies – incorporating the ground-breaking 5G Innovation Centre based at the University of Surrey which includes Vodafone, Huawei, O₂ and EE as corporate Plan 2018/2030 members, and also the National Cyber Security Centre at Royal Holloway University. • The Clean Growth Economy – Siemens is working on an Energy Strategy for our region and there are plans to create an energy hub. These will underpin Enterprise M3’s five priorities for economic expansion: • High value sectors for a globally facing economy. • Enterprise and innovation for scaling up high productivity SMEs. • Skills for a high value, high growth economy. • Connectivity for a 21st century advanced digital and low carbon economy. • Dynamic communities and sustainable growth corridors.

196

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix C1: Population Statistics

Table C1.1: 2019 Mid-Year Population data for the Study Area

Authority 2019 mid-year population Classification* Percentage Rural** Population Percentage Urban**population Counties Gloucestershire County Council 639,313 Significant urban 30% 70%

Hampshire County Council 1,382,974 Significant urban 22% 78%

Hertfordshire County Council 1,188,458 Significant urban 12% 88%

Oxfordshire County Council 691,854 Predominantly urban 33% 67%

Surrey County Council 1,193,668 Significant urban 13% 87%

Warwickshire County Council 576,323 Predominantly urban 33% 67%

West Sussex County Council 865,423 Predominantly urban 24% 76% Unitaries excluding London Boroughs Bracknell Forest Council 122,541 Significant urban 2% 98%

Buckinghamshire Council*** 542,931 Predominantly rural 33% 66%

Central Bedfordshire Council 286,935 Predominantly urban 39% 61%

Luton Borough Council 213,651 Urban 0% 100%

Reading Borough Council 163, 834 Urban 0% 100%

Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead 151,422 Significantly urban 10% 90%

Slough Borough Council 149,776 Urban 0% 100%

Swindon Borough Council 223,722 Significantly urban 11% 89%

West Berkshire Council 158,453 Predominantly urban 37% 63%

West Northamptonshire Council*** 755,506 Significantly rural 12% 88%

Wiltshire Council 503, 436 Predominantly urban 48% 52%

Wokingham Borough Council 170,114 Significantly urban 18% 82% * People living in the Large Market Towns are defined as Urban in the Rural Definition. For the purposes of classifying Local Authorities these towns are considered to be Rural. ** As identified above Rural and Urban Percentage populations are based on 2011 Census data, Office for National Statistics. 2019 is not yet available. *** Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous authority tier i.e. Counties.

197

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table C1.2 Population Ethnicity Distribution (data limited to that available from ONS Census 2011)

Local Authority Area All usual White %age Mixed/multiple %age Asian/Asian %age Black/African/Caribbean/Black %age Other ethnic %age residents ethnic groups British British group

Counties

Gloucestershire County Council 596,984 569,647 95 8,661 1 12,433 2 5,150 1 1,093 0

Hampshire County Council 1,317,788 1,252,123 95 18,051 1 35,356 3 8,298 1 3,960 0

Hertfordshire County Council 1,116,062 977,495 88 27,497 2 72,581 7 31,401 3 7,088 1

Oxfordshire County Council 653,798 594,004 91 13,233 2 31,657 5 11,424 2 3,480 1

Surrey County Council 1,132,390 1,023,682 90 23,554 2 63,498 6 12,430 1 9,226 1

Warwickshire County Council 545,474 505,688 93 7,949 1 25,096 5 4,443 1 2,298 0

West Sussex County Council 806,892 756,499 94 12,155 2 28,334 4 7,146 1 2,758 0

Unitaries excluding London Boroughs

Bracknell Forest Council 113,205 102,554 91 2,303 2 5,664 5 2,189 2 495 0

Buckinghamshire Council* 505,283 436,670 86 12,360 2 43,269 9 10,490 2 2,494 0

Central Bedfordshire Council 254,381 238,722 94 4,789 2 6,402 3 3,614 1 854 0

Luton Borough Council 203,201 111,078 55 8,281 4 60,952 30 19,909 10 2,980 1

Reading Borough Council 155,698 116,387 75 6,180 4 21,161 14 10,470 7 1,500 1

Royal Borough of Windsor and 144,560 124,505 86 3,315 2 13,848 10 1,725 1 1,167 1 Maidenhead

Slough Borough Council 140,205 64,053 46 4,758 3 55,697 40 12,115 9 3,582 3

Swindon Borough Council 209,156 187,898 90 4,226 2 13,365 6 2,861 1 806 0

West Berkshire Council 153,822 145,854 95 2,420 2 3,808 2 1,376 1 364 0

West Northamptonshire Council* 691,952 632,822 92 14,182 2 25,427 4 16,923 2 2,598 0

Wiltshire Council 470,981 454,971 97 5,568 1 6,178 1 3,228 1 1,036 0

Wokingham Borough Council 154,380 136,525 88 3,182 2 11,438 7 2,093 1 1,142 1

Totals and Percentage of Population 8,216,678 7,448,555 91 155,412 2 443,383 5 126,839 2 42,489 1 (%age)

198

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

* Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous authority tier i.e. Counties.

Table C1:3: 2019 Population Age Distribution (percentage)

Authority % Persons Under 19 % Persons 19-44 % Persons 45-69 % Persons 70 and over Counties Gloucestershire County Council 21% 29% 34% 16%

Hampshire County Council 22% 29% 33% 16%

Hertfordshire County Council 24% 33% 31% 13%

Oxfordshire County Council 22% 34% 30% 14%

Surrey County Council 23% 31% 32% 14%

Warwickshire County Council 22% 30% 32% 15%

West Sussex County Council 22% 27% 33% 17% Unitaries excluding London Boroughs Bracknell Forest Borough Council 24% 34% 31% 10%

Buckinghamshire Council* 24% 29% 32% 14%

Central Bedfordshire Council 24% 31% 32% 13%

Luton Borough Council 29% 36% 25% 9%

Reading Borough Council 24% 41% 26% 9%

Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead 24% 30% 32% 14%

Slough Borough Council 30% 38% 25% 7%

Swindon Borough Council 24% 33% 32% 12%

West Berkshire Council 24% 28% 24% 14%

West Northamptonshire Council* 25% 32% 31% 13%

Wiltshire Council 22% 28% 34% 16%

Wokingham Borough Council 25% 30% 32% 13% * Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous authority tier i.e. Counties.

199

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table C1.4: Predicted Population Growth from Mid-Year 2019 (ONS 2020) to 2030 (ONS, 2018)

Authority 2019 Mid-Year 2019 2030 Population Population Percentage Population Growth

Counties

Gloucestershire County Council 639,313 692,244 7.9%

Hampshire County Council 1,382,974 1,435,108 3.7%

Hertfordshire County Council 1,188,458 1,216,842 2.3%

Oxfordshire County Council 691,854 725,092 4.6%

Surrey County Council 1,193,668 1,212,948 1.6%

Warwickshire County Council 576,323 630,394 9.0%

West Sussex County Council 865,423 923,646 6.5%

Unitaries excluding London Boroughs

Bracknell Forest Council 122,541 127,623 4.0%

Buckinghamshire Council* 542,931 564,319 3.8%

Central Bedfordshire Council 286,935 311,651 8.2%

Luton Borough Council 213,651 205,356 3.9%

Reading Borough Council 163, 834 165,028 0.7%

Royal Borough of Windsor and 153,520 1.3% 151,422 Maidenhead

Slough Borough Council 149,776 151,601 1.2%

Swindon Borough Council 223,722 237,308 5.8%

West Berkshire Council 158,453 157,677 0.4%

West Northamptonshire 8.1% Council* 755,506 820,000

Wiltshire Council 503, 436 531,520 5.4%

Wokingham Borough Council 170,114 184,322 8.0% * Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous authority tier i.e. Counties.

200

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table C1.5: Predicted Household Data changes from 2018 to 2028 (ONS, 2018)

Authority 2018 Household Data 2028 Household Data Household Data Increase

Counties

Gloucestershire County Council 622,361 671,515 7.5%

Hampshire County Council 1,353,032 1,401,309 3.5%

Hertfordshire County Council 1,168,496 1,196,647 2.3%

Oxfordshire County Council 657,072 688,351 4.6%

Surrey County Council 1,162,201 1,181,678 1.6%

Warwickshire County Council 562,442 611,614 8.3%

West Sussex County Council 842,829 897,128 6.2%

Unitaries excluding London Boroughs

Bracknell Forest Council 118,920 124,228 4.3%

Buckinghamshire Council* 531,403 552,428 3.8%

Central Bedfordshire Council 281,136 305,618 8.3%

Luton Borough Council 212,301 204,815 3.5%

Reading Borough Council 158,955 160,356 0.8%

Royal Borough of Windsor and 147,214 149,036 1.2% Maidenhead

Slough Borough Council 148,573 151,161 1.7%

Swindon Borough Council 220,552 233,637 5.7%

West Berkshire Council 155,482 154,757 0.4%

West Northamptonshire 737,259 799,074 8.0% Council*

Wiltshire Council 484,388 513,395 5.4%

Wokingham Borough Council 165,088 179,492 8.0% * Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous authority tier i.e. Counties.

201

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table C1.6 Reporting of Health (ONS Census data,2011)

Local Authority All Very good %age Good %age Fair health %age Bad health %age Very bad %age Residents health health health (2011)

Counties

Gloucestershire County Council 596,984 283,942 48 210,173 35 76,317 13 20,772 3 5,780 1

Hampshire County Council 1,317,788 646,983 49 460,937 35 156,806 12 41,411 3 11,651 1

Hertfordshire County Council 1,116,062 568,026 51 378,624 34 125,609 11 34,316 3 9,487 1

Oxfordshire County Council 653,798 342,600 52 218,698 33 69,321 11 18,072 3 5,107 1

Surrey County Council 1,132,390 593,689 52 380,019 34 119,554 11 30,599 3 8,529 1

Warwickshire County Council 545,474 258,530 47 189,851 35 70,472 13 20,701 4 5,920 1

West Sussex County Council 806,892 378965 47.0 286383 35.5 104836 13.0 28645 3.6 8063 1.0

Unitaries excluding London Boroughs

Bracknell Forest Council 113,205 59,320 52 38,814 34 11,394 10 2,859 3 818 1

Buckinghamshire Council* 505,283 262,901 52 170,886 34 53,987 11 13,607 3 3,902 1

Central Bedfordshire Council 254381 125019 49.1 90360 35.5 29202 11.5% 7672 3.0 2128 0.8

Luton Borough Council 203201 94607 46.6 73300 36.1 25277 12.4% 7571 3.7 2446 1.2

Reading Borough Council 155,698 78,169 50 54,913 35 16,770 11 4,590 3 1,256 1

Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead 144,560 78,802 55 46,571 32 14,234 10 3,872 3 1,081 1

Slough Borough Council 140,205 67,156 48 50,464 36 16,288 12 4,906 3 1,391 1

Swindon Borough Council 209,156 100,931 48 73,591 35 25,056 12 7,556 4 2,022 1

West Berkshire Council 153,822 79,432 52 53,069 35 16,456 11 3,818 2 1,047 1

West Northamptonshire Council* 755,506 324,025 47 249,082 37 87,222 12 24,570 3 7,053 1

Wiltshire Council 470,981 234,318 50 160,362 34 57,221 12 14,974 3 4,106 1

Wokingham Borough Council 154,380 83,759 54 51,808 34 14,566 9 3,310 2 937 1

Totals and %ages 7,409,786 3,738,558 50 2,538,780 34 844,051 11 225,363 3 63,034 1

202

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table C1.7 Reporting of Health Problems and Disability

Local Authority Total Population (2019) Day-to Day activities Limited a Day-to Day activities Limited a little Day-to Day activities not Limited lot (%Total Population) (%Total Population) (%Total Population)

Counties

Gloucestershire County Council 637,070 6.7 8.8 78

Hampshire County Council 1,382, 542 6.3 8.6 80.3

Hertfordshire County Council 1,189,519 5.8 7.6 80.3

Oxfordshire County Council 691,667 5.4 7.5 81.5

Surrey County Council 1,196,236 5.4 7.4 81.8

Warwickshire County Council 577,933 7.4 8.8 78.2

West Sussex County Council 863,980 6.9 9.1 77.3

Unitaries excluding London Boroughs

Bracknell Forest Council 122,549 4.8 6.5 81

Buckinghamshire Council* 543,973 5.1 7.2 80.4

Central Bedfordshire Council 288,648 5.3 7.3 75.4

Luton Borough Council 213,052 6.6 7.7 81

Reading Borough Council 161,780 5.4 6.9 83.8

Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead 151,422 5.2 6.8 83.2

Slough Borough Council 149,539 5.7 6.8 81.1

Swindon Borough Council 222,193 6.5 7.9 79.5

West Berkshire Council 158,450 5.2 7.5 84.2

West Northamptonshire Council* 755,506 6.5 8.2 76.7

Wiltshire Council 500,024 6.2 8.7 79.1

Wokingham Borough Council 171,119 4.2 6.4 79.4 203

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

204

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix C2: Economic Statistics

Table C2.1: Employment rate (ONS, 2019) Authority In Employment (16 – 64) Unemployed

Counties

Gloucestershire County Council 81.9% 3.4%

Hampshire County Council 79.8% 2.8%

Hertfordshire County Council 79.1 3.5%

Oxfordshire County Council 83.4% 1.1%

Surrey County Council 81.8% 2.2%

Warwickshire County Council 80.7% 2.2%

West Sussex County Council 82% 3.0% Unitaries excluding London Borough Authorities

Bracknell Forest Borough Council 84.1% 2.6%

Buckinghamshire Council* 79.3% 3.7%

Central Bedfordshire Council 80.8% 1.1%

Luton Borough Council 70.4% 5.0% Reading Borough Council 79.2% 3.0%

Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead 81.2% 2.5%

Slough Borough Council 75.1% 4.2%

Swindon Borough Council 80.1% 3.5%

West Berkshire Council 83.5% 2.7%

West Northamptonshire Council* 80.8% 3.5% Wiltshire Council 78.8% 1.9%

Wokingham Borough Council 81.1% 1.9%

Great Britain 75.8% 4.0% *Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous Authority Tier i.e. Counties. 205

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table C2.2: Employment by Industry Sector 2019 (Nomis, 2019) for County Authorities Industry Gloucestershire Hampshire Hertfordshire Oxfordshire Surrey West Sussex Warwickshire

1. Agriculture, forestry & fishing 1.0% 0.8% 0.2% 0.6% 0.4% 1.3% 1.0% 2. Mining, quarrying & utilities 1.7% 1.1% 0.8% 0.9% 1.2% 1.1% 2.0% 3. Manufacturing 12.2% 8.5% 5.5% 6.9% 4.6% 7.9% 11.8% 4. Construction 6.1% 5.9% 6.6% 5.3% 6.0% 4.3% 4.3% 5. Motor trades 2.0% 2.3% 1.9% 1.9% 1.9% 2.0% 3.3% 6. Wholesale 3.1% 4.2% 5.3% 3.4% 4.8% 4.1% 5.3% 7. Retail 10.2% 10.7% 9.2% 9.0% 8.3% 10.5% 7.9% 8. Transport & storage 2.7% 4.1% 3.6% 3.2% 2.7% 7.9% 8.2% 9. Accommodation & food services 8.5% 7.6% 6.0% 7.4% 7.1% 8.4% 8.6% 10. Information & communication 3.7% 5.7% 5.5% 5.3% 6.5% 3.1% 3.3% 11. Financial & insurance 3.4% 2.9% 2.4% 1.2% 3.5% 2.8% 2.0% 12. Property 1.5% 1.3% 1.6% 1.6% 1.6% 1.5% 1.3% 13. Professional, scientific & technical 8.1% 9.1% 13.2% 11.7% 12.2% 7.1% 8.9% 14. Business administration & support services 7.1% 7.6% 14.7% 7.2% 8.0% 8.7% 7.6% 15. Public administration & defence 3.1% 3.4% 2.0% 2.7% 2.3% 2.8% 3.0% 16. Education 7.8% 8.5% 8.0% 15.6% 9.7% 8.4% 6.9% 17. Health 13.2% 11.2% 9.1% 11.9% 13.6% 13.3% 9.9% 18. Arts, entertainment, recreation & other services 4.1% 4.7% 4.5% 4.0% 5.8% 4.6% 4.9% *Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous Authority Tier i.e. Counties.

206

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table C2.3: Employment by Industry Sector 2019 (Nomis, 2019) for Unitary Authorities. Industry Bracknel Buckingham Central Luton Reading Royal Borough of Slough Swindon West West Wiltshire Wokingham l Forest shire* Bedfordshir Windsor and Berkshire Northamptonshire* e Maidenhead 1. Agriculture, forestry & fishing 0.1% 0.6% 0.8% 0.0% 0.1% 0.2% 0.0% 0.1% 0.7% 0.8% 1.4% 0.7% 2. Mining, quarrying & utilities 0.4% 0.9% 0.6% 0.3% 3.2% 1.2% 3.0% 1.7% 1.8% 8.5% 1.1% 1.7% 3. Manufacturing 2.5% 7.5% 9.6% 7.6% 2.1% 3.0% 6.0% 8.7% 11.1% 4.2% 9.6% 5.1% 4. Construction 2.9% 6.3% 5.8% 4.9% 2.1% 7.2% 3.6% 3.9% 5.1% 1.9% 5.7% 3.9% 5. Motor trades 2.5% 2.5% 3.8% 1.6% 1.8% 1.5% 2.4% 2.6% 2.0% 6.1% 2.2% 1.1% 6. Wholesale 10.0% 7.5% 4.8% 4.3% 2.8% 7.2% 6.0% 3.0% 5.1% 7.5% 4.8% 6.7% 7. Retail 10.0% 9.2% 9.6% 6.5% 10.1% 7.2% 7.2% 10.4% 7.1% 10.4% 9.6% 5.6% 8. Transport & storage 1.5% 2.5% 6.7% 9.8% 4.1% 1.5% 12.0% 8.7% 2.5% 6.1% 2.9% 1.7% 9. Accommodation & food services 5.8% 6.7% 8.7% 4.9% 6.4% 9.6% 4.8% 6.1% 6.1% 2.1% 8.6% 5.6% 10. Information & communication 13.3% 5.8% 2.9% 2.4% 14.7% 10.8% 9.6% 3.0% 14.1% 4.7% 3.3% 14.6% 11. Financial & insurance 2.1% 1.9% 1.2% 0.8% 3.7% 1.8% 1.1% 10.4% 0.9% 5.2% 1.2% 0.9% 12. Property 1.3% 1.7% 2.9% 2.2% 1.1% 1.8% 0.8% 0.9% 1.5% 1.4% 1.9% 0.8% 13. Professional, scientific & technical 15.0% 9.2% 9.6% 6.5% 11.9% 13.3% 8.4% 7.8% 8.1% 12.0% 15.7% 14. Business administration & support services 8.3% 9.6% 7.7% 17.4% 10.1% 6.0% 12.0% 11.3% 10.1% 8.0% 6.2% 11.2% 15. Public administration & defence 1.0% 2.9% 2.9% 3.3% 3.2% 1.5% 1.8% 2.2% 3.0% 9.9% 4.8% 1.1% 16. Education 8.3% 9.2% 10.6% 8.7% 6.4% 9.6% 7.2% 6.1% 8.1% 3.3% 8.6% 12.4% 17. Health 10.0% 11.7% 6.7% 13.0% 12.8% 8.4% 9.6% 10.4% 7.1% 7.1% 12.4% 7.9%

207

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Industry Bracknel Buckingham Central Luton Reading Royal Borough of Slough Swindon West West Wiltshire Wokingham l Forest shire* Bedfordshir Windsor and Berkshire Northamptonshire* e Maidenhead 18. Arts, entertainment, recreation & other services 4.2% 4.6% 4.8% 3.3% 3.2% 8.4% 2.1% 4.3% 6.1% 11.3% 3.8% 3.9% *Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous Authority Tier i.e. Counties.

Table C2.4: ALC coverage across the Study Area

Authority Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Grade 4 Grade 5 Non-agricultural Urban

Counties Gloucestershire County Council 0.1 8.8 79.1 8.7 0.0 3.1 0.2 Hampshire County Council 0.0 5.5 50.3 18.1 0.3 17.5 8.3 Hertfordshire County Council 0.0 5.4 65.1 4.7 0.0 10.3 14.5 Oxfordshire County Council 0.3 16.7 61.2 16.0 0.2 2.3 3.1 Surrey County Council 0.2 0.9 34.1 18.7 0.0 28.9 17.2 Warwickshire County Council 0.0 19.2 68.3 12.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 West Sussex County Council 0.0 0.0 19.3 29.8 0.6 34.6 15.7 Unitaries excluding London Borough Authorities Bracknell Forest Council 0.0 0.0 20.9 17.6 0.0 37.8 23.6 Buckinghamshire Council* 0.5 0.1 0.6 0.2 0.0 0.1 0.1 Central Bedfordshire Council 0.0 0.0 92.1 1.7 0.0 5.3 0.9 Luton Borough Council 0.0 0.0 30.6 0.0 0.0 49.8 19.6 Reading Borough Council 0.3 33.6 39.6 16.8 0.0 0.0 9.7 Royal Borough of Windsor and Maidenhead 0.6 4.5 28.5 18.2 0.0 29.3 18.9 Slough Borough Council 2.4 4.8 50.7 0.0 0.0 30.4 11.7 Swindon Borough Council 0.1 16.6 67.5 12.3 0.0 0.7 2.8 West Berkshire Council 0.2 18.9 56.3 12.6 0.3 6.7 4.9 West Northamptonshire Council* 0.0 19.0 68.2 10.8 0.0 2.0 0.0 Wiltshire Council 0.4 15.9 73.7 6.0 0.4 3.6 0.0 Wokingham Borough Council 0.3 15.6 59.1 17.2 0.0 2.9 5.0

208

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

*Buckinghamshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2020 and West Northamptonshire was adopted as a Unitary Authority in 2021. The data for these Unitary Authorities is currently unavailable and as such the data captured above is based on Buckinghamshire and West Northamptonshire as their previous Authority Tier i.e. Counties.

209

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix D: Waterbodies and Status

Table D.1 Surface Waterbodies Management Operational Location Waterbodies Classification Ecological Status or Potential Chem ical Issues preventing Catchment Catchment Status Good

Overall River Lake HMWB HMWB AWB AWB Bad Poor Moderate Good High Fail Pass River Lake River Lake Gloucestershire Upper South west of Cirencester 35 32 - 1 1 - 1 1 7 24 3 - 35 - Mostly pollution from and the Vale Thames at Kemble (source) to waste water and rural Lechlade in the areas and physical Cotswolds modifications Ock From Uffingdon and 13 13 ------6 7 - - 13 - Mostly pollution from Wantage, through waste water and rural Marcham and from areas and physical Wolvercote through modifications South Hinksey and Oxford in the north, to Abingdon on Thames and Dorchester Cotswolds Evenlode West of Oxford, flowing 18 16 - - 2 - - - 6 12 - - 18 - Mostly physical south-easterly from modifications and Moreton-in-the-Marsh pollution from rural through Kingham, areas, plus pollution Charlbury and from waste water Woodstock to Cassington. Windrush Stow on the Wold 19 16 1 2 - - - 2 6 9 2 - 19 - Mostly pollution from through Witney to waste water and rural Eynsham areas, plus physical modifications Cherwell and Cherwell from headwaters of the 24 22 - 1 - - 1 - 10 13 1 - 24 - Mostly pollution from Ray river at Charwelton in waste water, plus rural Northamptonshire to its pollution and physical confluence with the River modifications Thames at New Hinksey Oxon Ray From north of Quainton 11 10 - 1 - - 2 2 7 - - 11 - Mostly pollution from through Bicester to Islip waste water and rural where it joins the areas Cherwell

210

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Management Operational Location Waterbodies Classification Ecological Status or Potential Chem ical Issues preventing Catchment Catchment Status Good

Overall River Lake HMWB HMWB AWB AWB Bad Poor Moderate Good High Fail Pass River Lake River Lake Thames and Chilterns East Ilsley, Wallingford, 13 8 - 4 - - 1 - 3 10 - - 13 - Mostly physical Chiltern South South High Wycombe and north modification, plus Reading some levels/flow changes, wastewater and rural pollution Thame From Aylesbury through 20 19 - 1 - - - 7 13 - - 20 - Mostly pollution from Thame to Dorchester waste water and rural areas, plus physical modifications Kennet and Trib Kennet From Avebury, through 33 28 - 1 2 - 2 - 3 23 7 - 33 - Mostly physical Marlborough and modification, plus Newbury to southwest pollution from waste Reading water, some levels/flow changes and rural pollution Loddon and Loddon From Basingstoke, 22 16 - 3 2 - 1 1 9 12 - - 22 - Mostly pollution from Trib Aldershot and waste water and Farnborough north to physical modifications Wokingham to the east of Reading. Maidenhead Thames From Bracknell through 17 3 2 9 - - 3 - 4 12 1 - 17 - Mostly pollution from and Sunbury Lower Maidenhead to Windsor waste water and and Kingston up Thames physical modifications Wey and trib Wey From Bordon, Guildford 42 26 4 4 5 1 2 4 13 23 2 - 42 - Mostly pollution from and Haslemere, through waste water and Dorking and Woking to physical modifications, Weybridge plus some pollution from towns and cities Mole Mole Lower From Horley and Reigate, 12 5 - 4 1 - 2 - 4 7 1 - 12 - Mostly pollution from and Rythe Newdigate through waste water, physical Dorking, Leatherhead modifications and and Esher to Hampton pollution from towns Court Park and cities

211

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Management Operational Location Waterbodies Classification Ecological Status or Potential Chem ical Issues preventing Catchment Catchment Status Good

Overall River Lake HMWB HMWB AWB AWB Bad Poor Moderate Good High Fail Pass River Lake River Lake Mole Upper From Crawley in the 10 5 - 4 1 - 1 3 6 - - 10 - Mostly pollution from trib south to Horely and the waste water and M25 south of Caterham physical modifications, in the north, through plus some pollution Redhill to Salfords. from towns and cities and rural areas Colne Colne From Amersham, Hemel 26 10 - 6 - - 10 1 5 20 - - 26 - Mostly physical Hempstead and modifications, with Harpenden through significant issues also Watford and from waste water Rickmansworth to Slough pollution and and then Staines pollution from towns and cities , plus changes to flow/levels and some pollution from rural areas Totals 315 229 7 41 14 1 23 12 88 198 17 - 315 - % 100 73 2 13 4 0 7 4 28 63 5 - 100 -

212

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Table D.2 Groundwater Bodies Waterbody Overall Status Quantity Status Chemistry Status Trend Tackley Jurassic Good Good Good Upward trend Thatcham Tertiaries Good Good Good Upward trend Aldermaston Bagshot Beds Good Good Good No trend Byfield Jurassic Poor Good Poor No trend Lower Thames Gravels Poor Poor Good No trend Effingham Tertiaries Good Good Good No trend Radlett Tertiaries Poor Poor Good No trend Upper Hampshire Avon Poor Good Poor Upward trend Kemble Forest Marble Poor Good Poor Upward trend Upper Bedford Ouse Oolite Secondary Good Good Good Upward trend Dorking North Downs Chalk Poor Good Poor No trend Arun & Western Streams Hastings Beds Good Good Good No trend Chiltern Chalk Scarp Poor Good Poor Upward trend Upper Bedford Ouse Woburn Sands Poor Poor Good Upward trend Guildford Chalk Poor Poor Good No trend Upper Lee Chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Severn Vale - Jurassic Limestone Cotswold Edge South Good Good Good No trend South -West Chilterns Chalk Good Good Good Upward trend Shrivenham Corallian Good Good Good Upward trend Warwickshire Avon - Secondary Mudrocks Good Good Good Upward trend Twyford Tertiaries Good Good Good No trend Bath Oolite Poor Poor Poor Upward trend South of Malmesbury Good Good Good No trend Kent Greensand Middle Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Chichester chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend North Mymms Tertiaries Good Good Good Upward trend Epsom North Downs Chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend River Test Chalk Poor Good Poor Upward trend Headington Corallian Poor Good Poor Upward trend Kent Weald Western - Medway Poor Good Poor Upward trend Mid -Chilterns Chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Godalming Lower Greensand Poor Good Poor Upward trend

213

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Waterbody Overall Status Quantity Status Chemistry Status Trend Farnborough Bagshot Beds Good Good Good No trend East Hants Chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Basingstoke Chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Bicester -Otmoor Cornbrash Poor Good Poor Upward trend Vale of White Horse Chalk Poor Good Poor Upward trend Maidenhead Chalk Poor Good Poor Upward trend Copthorne Tunbridge Wells Sands Good Good Good No trend Upper Thames Gravels Poor Good Poor Upward trend Adur & Ouse Hastings Beds Good Good Good No trend Berkshire Downs Chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Nene Mid Lower Jurassic Unit Good Good Good No trend Lower Greensand Arun & Western Streams Poor Good Poor Upward trend Severn Vale - Secondary Combined Good Good Good No trend Upper Bedford Ouse Oolite Principal 1 Poor Good Poor Upward trend Bromley Tertiaries Good Good Good No trend Upper Bedford Ouse Chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Burford Jurassic Poor Good Poor Upward trend Banbury Jurassic Poor Good Poor Upward trend Chobham Bagshot Beds Poor Good Poor Upward trend Alton Chalk Poor Good Poor Upward trend Warwickshire Avon - Jurassic Limestones Cotswold Edge North Good Good Good No trend Reigate Lower Greensand Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Chipping Norton Jurassic Poor Good Poor Upward trend Old Basing Tertiaries Good Good Good No trend River Itchen Chalk Poor Poor Poor Upward trend Corallian Limestone (Calne to Swindon) Good Good Good No trend

214

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

Appendix E: Regional Environmental Opportunities

National Character Area Environmental Opportunities

NCA 95: Northamptonshire Uplands

• To protect and promote the designed landscapes, heritage assets, field pattern, parkland, battlefield sites, ridge and furrow and settlement sites; • To enhance and expand the semi-natural farmed features such as pasture, meadow, veteran and ancient trees; • To enhance river catchments by reconnecting floodplains, improving water quality and flow, and benefiting biodiversity and recreation, and; • To build on the existing canals, rivers and access routes to create strong ecological and recreational networks. NCA 107: Cotswolds

• To protect and enhance the highly distinctive farmed landscape and retain the balance of arable, pastoral and wooded land, as well as the expansive open views from the scarp, High Wold and dip slope; • To safeguard the cultural heritage and geodiversity that illustrate the history of land use; • To expand the network of semi-natural environments, including limestone grassland, beech woods and wetlands along rivers and streams, and; • To enable natural hydrological processes in order to improve water quality, reduce flooding, soil erosion and water pollutions and capture carbon. NCA 108: Upper Thames Clay Vales

• To promote sustainable farming and mineral working along the Thames and its tributaries to restore semi-natural habitats, historic features, geodiversity, soil quality and soil carbon stores, while engaging the public in river heritage; • To realise a farmland habitat mosaic that incorporates wet woodland, reedbeds, wet grassland, ponds, ditches and hedgerows; • To maintain heritage assets such as ridge and furrow, abandoned medieval villages, Roman Roads, canals, and parkland, and restore the setting of such assets as well as the Royal Hunting Forests of Bernwood, Braydon and Wychwood, and; • To ensure adequate greenspace in growing settlements, such as Swindon and Aylesbury and secure strategic access between town and country. NCA 109: Mid-Vale Ridge

• To maintain cultural character and local distinctiveness while providing greenspace for recreation, health and wellbeing; • To enhance and expand semi-natural habitats such as fens, grassland and calcareous heathland, and enhance wildlife corridors; • To expand areas of native broadleaved woodland, and; • To enhance the area’s internationally important geological heritage for educational benefit, contribution to sense of place, and recreational opportunities. NCA 110: Chilterns

• To manage woodlands (including internationally important Chilterns Beechwoods), hedgerows, commons, and parklands to enhance biodiversity, the historic landscape and recreation, and to secure sustainable biomass and timber; • To restore historic land use pockets and extend the species-rich Chiltern Downland; • To conserve the Chiltern’s groundwater resource, River Thames, and chalk streams at catchment scale, secure sustainable water use and a thriving flood plain landscape, and;

215

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

National Character Area Environmental Opportunities

• To enhance local distinctiveness and create green infrastructure within new and existing development in growth areas such as Luton. NCA 114: Thames Basin Lowlands

• To restore the natural functions of the rivers Wey, Mole, Hogsmill and Wandle at a landscape scale; • To manage semi-natural vegetation and the farmed landscape to reduce fragmentation and strengthen landscape scale, and; • To promote a well-connected green infrastructure in and around Greater London, including enhanced public greenspace and recreational opportunities. NCA 115: Thames Valley

• To enhance the area’s rivers and expand their operational flood plains and wetlands for better flow, water quality, biodiversity, cultural heritage and landscape character; • To plan for the enhancement of the area’s extensive gravel workings and other open waterbodies forming part of the South West London Waterbodies Special Protection Area; • To create green infrastructure in new and existing development and create links from urban areas to recreational assets such as the Thames Path National Trail, National Cycle Routes and the river and canal network; • To protect the area’s historic parklands, wood pastures, Ancient Woodland, commons, orchards and ancient pollards, and increase woodland for carbon sequestration, noise and pollution reduction, wood fuel, soil protection and biodiversity, and; • To develop opportunities associated with public access to historic buildings and landscapes such as Hampton Court Palace, Windsor Castle, and the Royal Botanic Gardens at Kew. NCA 116: Berkshire and Marlborough Downs

• To enhance and restore the flora, fauna, and heritage features of the Kennet and Avon Canal, chalk streams, springs, and wetlands; • To conserve and enhance linear features, field edges and in-field features such as farm reservoirs, and manage these as an interconnected network that includes targeted reversion of arable land to chalk grassland; • To manage natural and man-made landmarks and viewpoints to maintain sense of place, and; • To manage the Down’s wooded features (including Savernake Hunting Forest) and ensure new plantings reflect historic distribution patterns and support the networks of small woods. NCA 119: North Downs

• To enhance the distinctive rural character and historic environment, including settlement patterns and ancient routeways, protect the tranquillity of the landscape, and promote the famous landmarks and views; • To enhance and restore the range of woodlands for their internationally important habitats and species, cultural heritage, recreation, climate mitigation and adaptation, timber and biomass; • To enhance the mosaic of farming landscape and semi-natural habitats, including the internationally important chalk grassland, and; • To deliver well-integrated multifunctional green infrastructure in existing and developing urban areas. NCA 120: Wealden Greensand

• To protect the distinctive character of the landscape, including the rich historical and geological heritage; • To enhance the mosaic and connectivity of semi-natural habitats within the farmed landscape, particularly internationally important woodland and heathland habitats; • To enhance the quality of wetland and water environments to manage flood risk, water quality, water availability, sense of place, biodiversity, recreation, and climate change adaptation, and; • To deliver a network of integrated greenspaces in existing and developing urban areas.

216

Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report

National Character Area Environmental Opportunities

NCA 121: Low Weald

• To enhance the area’s intricate mix of semi-natural Ancient Woodlands, Gill Woodland, Shaws, small field copses, hedgerows, and individual trees to reduce habitat fragmentation; To enhance the distinctive historical aspects of the landscape, including its important geological features, such as those associated with the Wealden Iron Industry; • To improve the quality, state and structure of all Wealden rivers, streams, standing water bodies, and associated floodplains, and; • To expand and connect semi-natural habitats, restore degraded neutral grasslands to buffer sites, and encourage pollinators and predators for pest regulation. NCA 129: Thames Basin Heaths

• To manage and create woodlands, highway verges, field margins, reedbeds, and other features to intercept runoff and filter pollutants; • To adapt the developed landscape of the Blackwater and Thames to manage floodwater and restore watercourses; • To maximise the ecosystem services delivered by wooded features, including wet woodlands in the Kennet Valley and conifer plantations around Camberley; • To enhance the sense of history and biodiversity by restoring heathland, Ancient Woodland, meadows, historic hunting forests (such as Eversley) and historic common land, and; • To deliver quality green infrastructure that incorporates commons, woodland and restored gravel pits, with a focus on Blackwater Valley, Newbury and Reading. NCA 130: Hampshire Downs

• To implement sustainable management regimes that conserve, enhance and restore Priority Habitats and Species to the watercourses and wetlands of the rivers Test and Itchen; • To retain and manage remnant areas of biodiversity rich chalk grassland and seek to restore areas of poor condition and expand; • To encourage sustainable food and fodder production that retains and enhances landscape character and provides habitat, and; • To encourage woodland management regimes that ensure good condition Priority Habitats and Species, and maximise ecosystem benefits.

217